Magnum Version 8 Manual Rev1.7

Magn
num Ve
ersion 8 Rev.
v. 1.7
Chiller and Cond
densing U
Units Softtware
HVAC
C and CENT
C
V
V8 Softw
ware
The MC
CS Committment
ent is to pro
ovide practical solutio
ons for the industrys needs and
d to be
Our commitme
both a lea
ader and pa
artner in the
e effective use of microprocesso
or controls
s.
Micro Control
C
Syste
ems, Inc.
5877 Enterprise
E
P
Parkway
Fort Myers, Florida
a 33905
Phone: (239) 694
4-0089
Fax: (239) 694--0031
www
w.MCScontrolls.com
(W
Website contains product descriptions,
d
manuals, sofftware release
es, troublesh
hooting aids, etc.)
Informa
ation contained
d in this manua
al has been prrepared by Miccro Control Syystems, Inc. an
nd is copyrightt
protecte
ed 2011. Copy
ying or distribu
uting this docum
ment is prohib
bited unless exxpressly appro
oved by MCS.
MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS
1.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Revision Page
Date
Author
11-03-09
RCT
04-09-10
RCT
05-03-10
RCT
05-10-10
RCT
09-02-10
RCT
09-13-10
BWW
10-27-10
WLK
01-19-11
WLK
Description of Changes
Magnum Manual Rev 1.25 was used as the base for this manual
Renamed file to Magnum Version 8 Manual Rev 1.0 to avoid confusion
with existing manuals
Expanded all items regarding Magnum V8 software
Rev 1.1
Added pump rotation changes
Added process-pump rotation changes
Checked and updated all setpoints including the use of the safety time field
Added new setpoint fields
Replaced MCS Connect screens with new versions
Corrected items from DB E-mail dated 4/5/10
Reviewed and added compressor types to RO sequence
Added low temperature safety and unload section
Added high suction superheat for flooded chiller
Added section on EXV control and maximum operating pressure control to
the EXV logic
Rev 1.2
Updated the BMS points section for information on all 20 compressors
Updated OIL PUMP LUBE state
Added section on compressor setup
Added section on slide calculation
Added section on FLA calculation
Added BWWs comments
Added Centrifugal setpoints
Added Centrifugal write up and external purge option
Added SI16/AO4 and RO10 drawings
Rev 1.3
Added section on V8 enhancements
Corrected BMS entries for circuits 9-20
Rev 1.4
Expanded section on V8 enhancements
Updated setpoints
Updated new functions through 8.013-J
Added release version to new functions
Updated and expanded the User Defined section
Rev 1.5
Corrected page 10 statement about MCS-SI16-AO4 board
SI-16/AO4; 16 sensor inputs, 1 through 12 are universal and 13 through 16
can be either digital or virtual inputs pulse 4 analog outputs per board with a
maximum of 4 boards. This is not correct; all 16 inputs are universal
Rev 1.6
Updated EXV logic and setpoints
Rev 1.7
General editing of manual
2.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Table of Contents
1. Revision Page............................................................................................................................................................... 2
2. Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................................................... 3
3. Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1. INTRODUCTION TO MAGNUM HVAC AND CENT V8 SOFTWARE .................................................................................... 9
3.2. MAGNUM V8 SOFTWARE CONTROL POINT CAPACITY ...................................................................................................... 9
3.3. MAGNUM HARDWARE SUPPORTED BY MAGNUM V8 SOFTWARE ................................................................................. 9
3.4. ABOUT THIS MANUAL ........................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.5. ABOUT THE MAGNUM........................................................................................................................................................ 10
3.6. PC SUPPORT SOFTWARE FOR MAGNUM ........................................................................................................................... 10
3.7. MCS 485 NETWORK ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
3.8. MCS ETHERNET PORT .......................................................................................................................................................... 11
4. Version 8 Enhancements........................................................................................................................................... 12
4.1. NEW SETPOINT FUNCTIONS (08.00-A) ................................................................................................................................. 12
4.2. ADDED FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2.1.
Voltage Sensor (08.00-R)............................................................................................................................................. 12
4.2.2.
Motor Amps (08.00-R) ................................................................................................................................................. 12
4.2.3.
Custom display description of circuit (08.00-R) ......................................................................................................... 12
4.2.4.
User Logic RO Delay Before Off (08.00-R)................................................................................................................ 13
4.2.5.
Additional Information Messages (08.00-U) .............................................................................................................. 13
4.2.6.
Pump Rotation (08.01-C)............................................................................................................................................. 13
4.2.7.
Process Pump Addition and Rotation (08.01-C) ........................................................................................................ 13
4.2.8.
MOP Control Option to EXV Logic (08.01-G) .......................................................................................................... 13
4.2.9.
Delta Temperature Evaporator (08.01-G).................................................................................................................. 13
4.2.10. Condenser Low Ambient (08.01-O) ............................................................................................................................ 13
4.2.11. New Pressure Sensor Supported (08.01-V) ................................................................................................................ 13
4.2.12. Centrifugal Vane Control (08.01-C) ........................................................................................................................... 13
4.2.13. External Centrifugal Purge Control (08.01-P)........................................................................................................... 13
4.2.14. MCS Touch Screens Interface (08.00-U) .................................................................................................................... 14
4.2.15. Sensor Averaging (08.00-R) ........................................................................................................................................ 14
4.2.16. Virtual Points Separated From Real Points (08.00-A) .............................................................................................. 14
4.2.17. Added MDP to EXV Control Logic (8.01-X) .............................................................................................................. 14
4.2.18. Low Discharge Superheat Adjustment to EXV Logic (8.01-X).................................................................................. 14
4.2.19. Normal Condenser Discharge Control Bypass (8.02-A) ........................................................................................... 14
4.2.20. Test for Voltage Out of Balance (8.02-A) ................................................................................................................... 15
4.2.21. Expanded Testing of Low and High Off (8.02-E) ....................................................................................................... 15
4.2.22. Expanded Compressor Rotation to Check for Maximum Run Time (8.02-E)........................................................... 15
4.2.23. New Option to test for Low Super Heat on Suction or Discharge PSI (8.02-E) ....................................................... 15
4.2.24. New Large Character Screen Displaying Control Information (8.03-B).................................................................. 16
4.2.25. Circuit Amp Value added to Circuit Status Screen (8.03-B)...................................................................................... 16
4.2.26. Low Discharge Superheat Test to Economizer (8.03-F)............................................................................................ 16
4.2.1.
Tonnage and KW Information (8.03-F) ...................................................................................................................... 16
4.2.2.
Oil Flow Safety (8.03-J) ............................................................................................................................................... 18
4.2.3.
RTC Access to User Logic (8.03-J) ............................................................................................................................. 18
5. MCS 485 Communications ........................................................................................................................................ 19
5.1.1.
MCS 485 Network with Local RS232 Communications ............................................................................................ 19
5.1.2.
MCS 485 Network with Remote Modem Communications........................................................................................ 20
6. Requirements for PC Software .................................................................................................................................. 21
7. MAGNUM Control Zone Logic................................................................................................................................... 22
7.1. COMMON DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 22
7.1.1.
Target............................................................................................................................................................................ 22
7.1.2.
Control Zone................................................................................................................................................................. 22
7.1.3.
Control Sensor.............................................................................................................................................................. 22
7.1.4.
Control Input Rate of Change ..................................................................................................................................... 22
7.1.1.
Step Delay and Sensitivity............................................................................................................................................ 22
8. Variable Capacity Control Method............................................................................................................................. 23
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
8.1. SCREW COMPRESSOR WITH SLIDE PISTON ............................................................................................................................ 23

8.2. COMPRESSOR WITH A VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) ............................................................................................. 23
8.3. EXAMPLE OF A SYSTEM WITH 3 VARIABLE STEP COMPRESSORS......................................................................................... 24
9. Centrifugal Compressor Control ................................................................................................................................ 25
9.1. INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 25
9.2. CENTRIFUGAL RELATED TERMINOLOGY ............................................................................................................................. 25
9.2.1.
Lift Pressure: ................................................................................................................................................................ 25
9.2.2.
Surge and Surge Protection: ....................................................................................................................................... 25
9.3. CENTRIFUGAL BASE COMPRESSOR SETUP MCS-CONFIG ................................................................................................... 25
9.4. TYPICAL RELAY OUTPUT SETUP .......................................................................................................................................... 26
9.5. COMPRESSOR SPEED CONTROL ............................................................................................................................................ 26
9.6. COMPRESSOR VANE CONTROL ............................................................................................................................................. 26
9.7. TRANE PURIFIER PURGE SYSTEM INTERFACE ...................................................................................................................... 27
9.7.1.
Purge Interface Setup................................................................................................................................................... 27
9.7.2.
Purge related setpoints ................................................................................................................................................ 27
9.7.3.
Conditions to Run Purge Cycle ................................................................................................................................... 28
9.7.4.
Purge States .................................................................................................................................................................. 28
10. Magnum Display Summary ................................................................................................................................... 29
10.1. MAGNUM KEYPAD AND DISPLAY .......................................................................................................................................... 29
10.1.1. Menu Screen ................................................................................................................................................................. 29
10.1.2. Introduction to Status Screens ..................................................................................................................................... 29
10.1.3. Unit status ..................................................................................................................................................................... 29
10.1.4. Unit Tonnage and KW Information............................................................................................................................. 29
10.1.5. Purge Status Screen (only if Purge cycles are active)................................................................................................ 30
10.1.6. Compressor status ........................................................................................................................................................ 30
10.1.7. Compressor status (only CENT).................................................................................................................................. 30
10.1.8. EXV status..................................................................................................................................................................... 31
10.2. HVAC STATUS DISPLAY (MCS-CONNECT) ..................................................................................................................... 31
10.1. CENT STATUS DISPLAY (MCS-CONNECT) ......................................................................................................................... 33
11. MAGNUM Control States....................................................................................................................................... 35
11.1. UNIT CONTROL STATES (NUMBER)....................................................................................................................................... 35
11.1.1. UNIT IN POWER UP (0) ............................................................................................................................................ 35
11.1.2. NO RUN- I/O LOST (2) ............................................................................................................................................... 35
11.1.3. UNIT IN LOCKOUT (3) .............................................................................................................................................. 35
11.1.4. UNIT IS OFF (4) .......................................................................................................................................................... 36
11.1.5. UNIT IS HOLDING (5) ............................................................................................................................................... 36
11.1.6. UNIT UNLOADING (6) Only HVAC software .......................................................................................................... 36
11.1.7. UNIT UNLDNG-VANE (6) Only CENT software...................................................................................................... 36
11.1.8. UNIT IS LOADING (7) Only HVAC software............................................................................................................ 36
11.1.9. UNIT IS LOADNG-VANE (7) Only CENT software ................................................................................................. 36
11.1.10.
OFF-SMOKE ALARM (8) ...................................................................................................................................... 36
11.1.11.
RUN/STOP SW OFF (9) ......................................................................................................................................... 37
11.1.12.
SCHEDULED OFF (10)......................................................................................................................................... 37
11.1.13.
OFF- NO FLOW (11).............................................................................................................................................. 37
11.1.14.
AMBIENT OFF (13)................................................................................................................................................ 37
11.1.15.
UNIT IS UNLOADED (15) ..................................................................................................................................... 37
11.1.16.
UNIT IS LOADED (16) ........................................................................................................................................... 37
11.1.17.
OFF TMP-ICE MADE (17) .................................................................................................................................... 37
11.1.18.
ECONOMIZER ONLY (18) .................................................................................................................................... 37
11.1.19.
SWITCHING MODES (19) ..................................................................................................................................... 38
11.1.20.
VaneOpen-SpdHold (19) Only with CENT Software............................................................................................. 38
11.1.21.
UNIT SMOKE UNLDG (20)................................................................................................................................... 38
11.1.22.
UNIT OFF UNLDING (21) .................................................................................................................................... 38
11.1.23.
UNIT DMD UNLDING (22) ................................................................................................................................... 38
11.1.24.
UNIT HEAT UNLDING (23) .................................................................................................................................. 38
11.1.25.
UNIT UNLDNG-VFD (24) Only with CENT Software ......................................................................................... 39
11.1.26.
UNIT LOADNG-VFD (25) Only with CENT Software ......................................................................................... 39
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
11.2. COMPRESSOR CONTROL STATES (NUMBER) ........................................................................................................................ 39

11.2.1. LOST IO LOCKED (0) ................................................................................................................................................ 39
11.2.2. CMP LOCKED OUT (1) ............................................................................................................................................. 39
11.2.3. SWITCHED OFF (2) ................................................................................................................................................... 39
11.2.4. UNLD and PMPDWN (3) ........................................................................................................................................... 39
11.2.5. CMP ANTICYCE (4) ................................................................................................................................................... 39
11.2.6. CMP OFF/READY (5)................................................................................................................................................. 40
11.2.7. OIL PMP LUBING (6) ................................................................................................................................................ 40
11.2.8. CMP UNLOADED (8)................................................................................................................................................. 41
11.2.9. CMP UNLD STEP1 (9) Only HVAC Software .......................................................................................................... 41
11.2.10.
CMP DECR SPEED (9) Only CENT Software...................................................................................................... 41
11.2.11.
CMP UNLD STEP2 (10) Only HVAC Software .................................................................................................... 41
11.2.12.
CMP INCR SPEED (10) Only CENT Software ..................................................................................................... 41
11.2.13.
CMP IS HOLDING (11) ......................................................................................................................................... 41
11.2.14.
CMP IS LOADING (12) Only HVAC Software ..................................................................................................... 41
11.2.15.
CMP OPEN VANES (12) Only CENT Software.................................................................................................... 41
11.2.16.
CMP IS UNLDING (13) Only HVAC Software ..................................................................................................... 42
11.2.17.
CMP CLOSE VANES (13) Only CENT Software .................................................................................................. 42
11.2.18.
CMP IS RUNNING (14).......................................................................................................................................... 42
11.2.19.
FAST UNLOADING (15) ........................................................................................................................................ 42
11.2.20.
LO SUCT UNLOAD (16) ........................................................................................................................................ 42
11.2.21.
LO SUCT HOLD (17) ............................................................................................................................................. 42
11.2.22.
HI DISC UNLOAD (18) .......................................................................................................................................... 43
11.2.23.
HI DISC HOLD (19) ............................................................................................................................................... 43
11.2.24.
SAFETY TRIPPED (20) .......................................................................................................................................... 43
11.2.25.
LO TMP UNLOAD (21) .......................................................................................................................................... 43
11.2.26.
LO TMP HOLD (22) ............................................................................................................................................... 43
11.2.27.
HI AMP HOLD (23) ................................................................................................................................................ 43
11.2.28.
HI DIS TMP HLD (24)............................................................................................................................................ 43
11.2.29.
CMP IS AT 40% (25) Only HVAC Software .......................................................................................................... 44
11.2.30.
SURGE SPD/VANE (25) Only CENT Software..................................................................................................... 44
11.2.31.
CMP IS AT 70% (26) Only HVAC Software .......................................................................................................... 44
11.2.32.
HI WATER HOLD (27) ........................................................................................................................................... 44
11.2.33.
EXTRA 70% STEP (28) Only HVAC Software ...................................................................................................... 44
11.2.34.
OFF-LO OIL TMP (29) .......................................................................................................................................... 44
11.2.35.
HI AMP UNLDING (30) ......................................................................................................................................... 44
11.2.36.
DEF PREPMP OUT (31) Only HVAC Software................................................................................................... 44
11.2.37.
DEFROSTING (32) Only HVAC Software ............................................................................................................ 45
11.2.38.
DEF PUMP DOWN (33) Only HVAC Software ................................................................................................... 45
11.2.39.
HI TEMP UNLOAD (34) Only with HVAC Software ........................................................................................... 45
11.2.40.
HI TEMP HOLD (35) Only with HVAC Software................................................................................................. 45
11.2.41.
SCROLL STEP 1 (36) Only with HVAC Software ................................................................................................. 45
11.2.42.
11.2.43.
11.2.44.
12. Setpoint Definitions................................................................................................................................................. 46
12.1. SETPOINT ELEMENTS THAT ARE SET UP IN THE MCS-CONFIG PROGRAM: .......................................................................... 46
12.2. SETPOINT TYPES .................................................................................................................................................................... 46
12.2.1. SETPOINT.................................................................................................................................................................... 47
12.2.2. LOCKOUT ................................................................................................................................................................... 47
12.2.3. ALARM ......................................................................................................................................................................... 47
13. Setpoints for Magnum HVAC and CENT V8 Software ........................................................................................ 48
14. AUTHORIZATION FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 67
15. Standard Control Options ...................................................................................................................................... 68
15.1. GENERAL OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................................................ 68
15.2. COMPRESSOR TYPES ............................................................................................................................................................. 68
15.3. SEQUENCE OF COMPRESSOR RELATED RELAY OUTPUTS.................................................................................................... 69
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
15.3.1. Reciprocating Comp with Oil (Recip Comp w/Oil).................................................................................................... 69

15.3.2. Reciprocating Comp without Oil (Recip Comp w/o Oil) ........................................................................................... 69
15.3.3. Screw Comp with Oil (Screw Comp w/Oil) ................................................................................................................ 70
15.3.4. Scroll Comp (Scroll Comp) ......................................................................................................................................... 70
15.3.5. Hitachi Screw (Hitachi Screw Comp) ......................................................................................................................... 71
15.3.6. Bitzer Screw (Bitzer Screw Comp) .............................................................................................................................. 71
15.3.7. Hartford Screw (Hartford Screw Comp) .................................................................................................................... 72
15.3.8. Carlyle Screw (Carlyle Screw) .................................................................................................................................... 72
15.3.9. Hanbell-Load NO (Hanbell-Load NO)....................................................................................................................... 73
15.3.10.
Hanbell-Load NC (Hanbell-Load NC) ................................................................................................................... 73
15.3.11.
Hanbell- 3 Solenoid (Hanbell- 3 Solenoid [50-100%])......................................................................................... 74
15.3.12.
Hanbell Fixed Step (Hanbell Step) ......................................................................................................................... 74
15.3.13.
Centrifugal (Centrifugal Comp).............................................................................................................................. 75
15.3.14.
Mitsubishi Screw (Mitsubishi Screw)...................................................................................................................... 75
15.3.15.
McQuay Frame 4 (McQuay Frame 4) ................................................................................................................... 76
15.3.16.
Fu Sheng (Fu Sheng) ............................................................................................................................................... 76
15.3.17.
Trane Scroll with 3 Compressor Sets (Trane Trio) ................................................................................................ 77
15.3.18.
Trane Scroll with 4 Compressor Sets (Trane Quad).............................................................................................. 77
15.4. COMPRESSOR SETUP AND OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 78
15.4.1. General Information .................................................................................................................................................... 78
15.4.2. Compressor Information setup .................................................................................................................................... 79
15.4.3. Compressor Base setup................................................................................................................................................ 79
15.4.4. Relay Output Information Screen setup ...................................................................................................................... 79
15.4.5. Slide Data Information ................................................................................................................................................ 80
15.5. FULL LOAD AMP (FLA) CALCULATION AND SLIDE POSITIONING........................................................................................ 81
15.6. CONDENSER CONTROL LOGIC .............................................................................................................................................. 82
15.7. RO STEP CONDENSER CUT IN OUT LOGIC ........................................................................................................................ 83
15.8. RO STEP CONDENSER WITH VARIABLE SPEED FAN ............................................................................................................ 84
15.9. MODULATING CONDENSER................................................................................................................................................... 84
15.10. CONDENSER FAN BANK.................................................................................................................................................... 85
15.11. CONDENSER CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................................... 85
15.11.1.
Common Terms ........................................................................................................................................................ 85
15.11.2.
Develop the Control Discharge Pressure............................................................................................................... 86
15.11.3.
Condenser Related Setpoints................................................................................................................................... 86
15.11.4.
Type of Condenser, No Condenser Type ................................................................................................................ 87
15.11.5.
Type of Condenser, RO Step Common Type without a Fan AO ........................................................................... 87
15.11.6.
Type of Condenser, RO Step Common Type with a Fan AO and Condenser Faults ........................................... 88
15.11.7.
Type of Condenser, RO Step Individual Type ........................................................................................................ 89
15.11.8.
Type of Condenser, RO Step Combined Type ........................................................................................................ 90
15.11.9.
Type of Condenser, Modulating Common Type..................................................................................................... 90
15.11.10. Type of Condenser, Modulating Individual Type ................................................................................................... 92
15.11.11. Type of Condenser, RO Shared Type...................................................................................................................... 93
15.11.12. Type of Condenser, Dual V8 Type .......................................................................................................................... 93
15.11.13. Type of Condenser, Common VFD Fan w/Bypass Type ....................................................................................... 94
15.12. CHILLER BARREL HEATER OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 95
15.13. HOT GAS BYPASS (SCREW CHILLERS) ............................................................................................................................. 96
15.14. CHILLED WATER RESET ................................................................................................................................................... 96
15.15. TWO EXPANSIONS VALVES PER COMPRESSOR OPTION .................................................................................................. 96
15.16. OIL EQUALIZATION OPTION ............................................................................................................................................. 97
15.17. LIQUID INJECTION OPTION................................................................................................................................................ 97
15.18. OIL COOLER OPTION......................................................................................................................................................... 97
15.19. OIL PUMP CONTROL OPTION ............................................................................................................................................ 97
15.20. OIL DIFFERENTIAL CALCULATION ................................................................................................................................... 98
15.21. ON/OFF SWITCHES ............................................................................................................................................................ 98
15.22. LOW SUCTION UNLOADING AND HOLDING ..................................................................................................................... 98
15.23. HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE UNLOADING AND HOLDING .............................................................................................. 99
15.24. HIGH DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE UNLOADING AND HOLDING ...................................................................................... 99
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
15.25. HIGH AMPERE UNLOADING AND HOLDING ................................................................................................................... 100

15.26. LOW WATER TEMPERATURE UNLOADING AND HOLDING............................................................................................ 100
15.27. ENERGY EFFICIENT COMPRESSOR STAGING .................................................................................................................. 100
15.28. CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROL ................................................................................................................................. 101
15.29. PROCESS PUMP / HEAT EXCHANGER CONTROL............................................................................................................. 101
15.30. CONTROL POWER RELAY NO STOP.............................................................................................................................. 103
15.31. PART WIND OR STAR DELTA STARTER .......................................................................................................................... 103
15.32. LOW AND HIGH AMBIENT SHUTDOWN .......................................................................................................................... 103
15.33. ENGLISH, METRIC OR MIXED C/P SENSOR READINGS ................................................................................................... 103
15.34. COMPRESSOR AUTO ROTATION ..................................................................................................................................... 103
15.35. COMPRESSOR ANTI-CYCLE LOGIC ................................................................................................................................. 104
15.36. WARNING AND ALARM RELAY OUTPUTS...................................................................................................................... 104
15.37. VI PORT CONTROL LOGIC (OPEN DRIVE SCREW ONLY) ............................................................................................... 105
15.38. OPERATING SCHEDULES ................................................................................................................................................. 105
15.39. MOD-MOTOR LIMIT CONTROL FOR FLOODED CHILLER ............................................................................................... 105
15.40. COMPRESSOR LEAD AND ROTATION .............................................................................................................................. 105
15.41. EXHAUST FAN ................................................................................................................................................................. 105
15.42. HOT GAS REHEAT (HUMIDITY) CONTROL ..................................................................................................................... 105
15.43. OUTSIDE AIR ECONOMIZER/FLUID COOLER WITH ANALOG OUTPUT CONTROL ......................................................... 107
15.43.1.
Set up ...................................................................................................................................................................... 107
15.43.2.
Sequence of Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 109
15.43.3.
Economizer Function Is To Supply Outside Air ................................................................................................... 110
15.43.4.
Mechanical Cooling Enabled................................................................................................................................ 110
15.43.5.
Termination of the Economizer Function ............................................................................................................. 110
15.43.6.
Example: Fluid Cooler with VFD condenser fan ................................................................................................ 111
15.43.7.
Example: Fluid Cooler with condenser compressor fans.................................................................................... 113
15.44. EXTRA LIQUID LINE SOLENOID CONTROL ..................................................................................................................... 114
15.45. SPECIAL PATTERN FOR SCROLL COMPRESSORS ............................................................................................................ 115
15.45.1.
The following is a sample of the four-compressor setup: .................................................................................... 115
15.45.2.
Pattern of the four-compressor setup: .................................................................................................................. 116
15.45.3.
The three-compressor type will be setup in as follows: ....................................................................................... 116
15.45.4.
Pattern of the three-compressor setup:................................................................................................................. 117
15.45.5.
Safeties are the same for both compressor types.................................................................................................. 117
15.46. HIGH SUCTION SUPERHEAT SAFETY .............................................................................................................................. 118
15.47. LOW TEMPERATURE SAFETY AND UNLOAD (LOW SATURATED SUCTION TEMPERATURE) .......................................... 118
15.48. ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL LOGIC (EXV) .......................................................................................... 118
15.48.1.
Control logic for the EXVs can be based upon either Superheat or Refrigerate Level. ................................... 118
15.48.2.
EXV Related Setpoints. .......................................................................................................................................... 121
15.48.3.
EXV Control States ................................................................................................................................................ 122
15.48.4.
EXV Maximum Operating Pressure ..................................................................................................................... 123
15.48.5.
Tandem EXV Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 124
15.49. TEST FOR VOLTAGE OUT OF BALANCE (8.02-A)........................................................................................................... 126
15.50. EXPANDED TESTING OF LOW AND HIGH OFF (8.02-E).................................................................................................. 126
15.51. NEW LARGE CHARACTER SCREEN DISPLAYING CONTROL INFORMATION (8.03-B) ................................................... 127
15.52. THE ACTUAL CIRCUIT AMP VALUE ADDED TO CIRCUIT STATUS SCREEN (8.03-B) .................................................... 127
15.53. LOW DISCHARGE SUPER HEAT TEST TO ECONOMIZER (8.03-F) .................................................................................. 128
15.54. TONNAGE AND KW INFORMATION (8.03-F).................................................................................................................. 128
15.55. ADDED OIL FLOW SAFETY (8.03-J)................................................................................................................................ 129
16. MAGNUM Alarms and Safeties ........................................................................................................................... 131
16.1. INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................................... 131
16.2. INFORMATION ONLY ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................. 131
16.2.1. System generated alarms ........................................................................................................................................... 131
16.2.2. Alarms as a result of individual action...................................................................................................................... 131
16.2.3. Alarms generated by the control algorithm .............................................................................................................. 131
16.3. MAGNUM SYSTEM ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................. 132
16.3.1. Alarms are generated by the MAGNUM control algorithm:................................................................................... 132
16.4. SETPOINT SAFETY ALARMS ................................................................................................................................................. 132
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
16.4.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................ 132

16.4.2. Sensor inputs used in conjunction with MAGNUM setpoint safeties: ..................................................................... 133
16.4.3. Setpoint safeties .......................................................................................................................................................... 133
17. Magnum Unit Control States Quick Reference................................................................................................... 139
18. Magnum Compressor Control States Quick Reference..................................................................................... 140
19. OEM Factory Checkout Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 142
19.1. VISUAL CHECK .................................................................................................................................................................... 142
19.2. MCS POWER ON (COMPRESSOR POWER OFF) ................................................................................................................... 142
20. The Magnum Keypad Display Quick Reference ................................................................................................ 143
21. The MAGNUM Hardware Rev 6 Quick Reference Sheet.................................................................................. 144
22. The Magnum Hardware SI16/AO4 Quick Reference......................................................................................... 145
23. The Magnum Hardware RO10 Quick Reference ............................................................................................... 146
24. The Magnum Quick Reference Sheet (Temp and Humidity) ............................................................................ 147
25. The Magnum Quick Reference Sheet (PSI, CT and Digital) ............................................................................. 148
26. The Magnum Trouble Shooting Quick Reference Sheet ................................................................................... 150
27. BMS Communication Protocols........................................................................................................................... 152
27.1. SENSOR INPUT POINTS......................................................................................................................................................... 152
27.2. RELAY OUTPUT POINTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 154
27.3. ANALOG OUTPUT POINTS ................................................................................................................................................... 155
27.4. SETPOINTS............................................................................................................................................................................ 156
27.5. CHILLER/COMPRESSOR STATES.......................................................................................................................................... 156
27.6. OTHER POINTS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 157
27.7. NETWORK INPUTS TO MCS-MAGNUM ............................................................................................................................... 160
27.8. MCS CAPACITY CONTROL STATE CHART ......................................................................................................................... 161
27.9. MCS COMPRESSOR CONTROL STATE CHART.................................................................................................................... 162
28. MCS-MAGNUM BMS CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................................. 163
28.1. MCS-MAGNUM BMS PROTOCOLS SETTINGS. ................................................................................................................... 164
28.1.1. Bacnet Over IP:.......................................................................................................................................................... 164
28.1.2. Modbus RTU: ............................................................................................................................................................. 165
28.1.3. Modbus TCP/IP: ........................................................................................................................................................ 165
28.1.4. Johnson N2:................................................................................................................................................................ 166
29. User Logic ............................................................................................................................................................. 167
29.1. OPERANDS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 167
29.2. ACTION CELL....................................................................................................................................................................... 167
29.3. USER SENSOR INPUT (USER LOGIC)................................................................................................................................ 168
29.3.1. Examples of User Logic Sensor Input ....................................................................................................................... 169
29.4. USER RELAY OUTPUT ......................................................................................................................................................... 170
29.4.1. Examples of User Logic Relay Outputs .................................................................................................................... 171
29.5. USER ANALOG OUTPUT ...................................................................................................................................................... 172
3.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Introduction
3.1.
Introduction to MAGNUM HVAC and CENT V8 Software
MAGNUM V8 software has been designed to control many different types of compressors of both fixed
and variable capacity, as well as many additional features. Supported control options include multiple
liquid line solenoids, electronic expansion valves (EXVs), liquid injection, economizers, hot gas bypass,
variable frequency drives for compressors (VFDs), digital scrolls, and many more.
Applications vary from control of a single compressor to complex multiple compressor systems. In all
applications, however, safety and operating efficiency is of primary importance. The controller interface
is made to be informative and meaningful, with built-in logic to prevent unsafe conditions from occurring.
This helps reduce or even completely eliminate nuisance alarms.
There are two types of MAGNUM software described in this manual:
HVAC V8- This software supports all types of compressors except centrifugals. It supports the
configuration type 106 Chiller V8 CFG, as well as 109 Loop Control CFG. If this software is loaded
into a MAGNUM with a different type of configuration file, an invalid configuration type message will
be generated.
CENT V8- This software supports only centrifugal compressors, and requires a configuration type
119 CENT MAG CFG. If this software is loaded into a MAGNUM with a different type of
configuration file, an invalid configuration type message will be generated.
These software types are very similar and most topics will apply to both. However, if a topic applies only
to one type it will be labeled as either only HVAC or only CENT.
3.2.
MAGNUM V8 Software Control Point Capacity
3.3.
Circuits (compressors) up to 20
Steps per Compressor up to 4
Relay Outputs up to 80
Analog Outputs up to 20
Sensor Inputs up to 80
Setpoints 230
Alarms 100
MAGNUM Hardware Supported by MAGNUM V8 Software
The following MCS boards can be connected together via the MCS-I/O communications terminal block:
MCS-MAGNUM
(10 ROs, 12 SIs, 4 Digital SIs, and 4 AOs)
MCS-I/O
(8 RO - 8 SI - 1 AO with I/O 7.00-C with a GAL 5.0 chip)
MCS-RO8
(8 RO)
MCS-SI16
(16 SI)
MCS-RO10
(10 RO)
MCS-SI16-AO4
(16 SI and 4 AO)
The versatility of the MAGNUM offers the user much flexibility in configuring the controls in an
economical way. The limitation is not the number of boards but the total number of points (Refer to
section 3.2.)
3.4.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
About this Manual
The purpose of this manual is to document MCSs V8 software for the MAGNUM. This software
requires a configuration type 11 in MCS-Config. Any other type of configuration file will result in an
invalid Config message and the unit will not function.
This manual documents how the MAGNUM V8 software functions. Since this is a large manual, it is
structured in logical sections for ease of reference. The Table of Contents will guide you through the
sections but you are urged to read the entire manual. This will provide an understanding of the
capabilities of the MAGNUM Control System and hopefully introduce other ways that you may benefit
from the existing control strategies. Quick Reference sheets and MCS Specification sheets are
provided in the appendixes.
This manual was created using Microsoft Office, Word 2000. A printed copy may be ordered, please
refer to our Price Book. A PDF copy of this manual may be down loaded from our web site at
www.MCScontrols.com free of charge.
An approved OEM of MCS may make copies and / or change any section of this manual to develop
custom documentation for a site where a MAGNUM controller is installed. In this way, MCS supports the
documentation requirements of individual customer sites.
3.5.
About the MAGNUM
The MAGNUM is a rugged microprocessor controller designed for the harsh environment of the
HVAC/R industry. It is designed to provide primary control without needing mechanical controls. It will
interface locally with a null modem serial cable, remotely through an Ethernet connection, and also
through building management systems. The MAGNUM offers a great deal of flexibility with adjustable
setpoints and control options that can be set prior to activating a system or even when the unit is
operational. The MAGNUM is designed to safeguard the system being controlled, eliminate the need for
manual intervention, and to provide a simple but meaningful user interface.
3.6.
PC Support Software for MAGNUM
MCS-Config provides the configuration file (.cfg), which includes the input/output points list,
setpoints, circuit information, etc., for all versions of software. This program is designed to assist and
make the task of building the configuration file as simple as possible. A manual created in a PDF format
is available on our web site: www.MCScontrols.com, or available in other formats upon request.
MCS-Connect provides both local and remote communications to the MAGNUM independent of
software type. Local communications can be either via an RS485 or Ethernet connection. This program
displays the status of the controller, and changes can be made to the system with proper authorization.
Configuration files can be transmitted to or received from a MAGNUM unit. The MAGNUM automatically
performs history logging and this program allows the data to be presented in a useful graph form. A
manual created in a PDF format is available on our web site: www.MCScontrols.com, or available in
other formats upon request.
Both of these programs run with Windows 2000 or newer, and they use the Microsoft Windows Help
function to assist the user.
3.7.
MCS 485 Network
The MCS 485 Network can support up to 20 MAGNUMs and their associated I/O boards. Access to this
network can be local via RS 232 or Ethernet connection, or remotely via a 14.4K Baud modem. When
using the dialup connection through a modem there is no degradation in the performance of the
network.
10
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Each MAGNUM in the network must be assigned a unique address in the configuration file. This
address will be the key in establishing communications with the appropriate MAGNUM system. It can be
viewed or changed from the LCD / keypad of the unit with Factory authorization.
Notes:
RS 232 transmissions should not exceed 50 in length.
RS 485 transmissions should not exceed 1 mile without a repeater.
3.8.
MCS Ethernet Port
When connecting directly through the 100 MBPS Ethernet port on the MAGNUM from a PC it is
necessary to use a crossover Ethernet cable.
11
4.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Version 8 Enhancements
The following entries identify the enhancements that have been added to all Version 8 software. Refer to other
sections of this manual for in-depth descriptions of these items.
4.1.
New Setpoint Functions (08.00-A)
The following features have been added to provide additional flexibility in starting and fine-tuning a system.
Three new fields have been added to each setpoint:
Sec. to Ignore Safety: Time delay that the safety will be ignored upon compressor startup.
Window to Extend Safety Time: The amount of time after compressor startup (or Sec to Ignore
Safety if used) in which the Safety Time Extension field is added to the Time (sec) field.
Safety Time Extension: The amount of time added to the Time (sec) field during the Window to
Extend Safety Time.
Four new setpoints have been added to provide flexibility:

Setpoint #191, TEMP DIFF
Setpoint #192, FRZ TEMP DIFF
Setpoint #193, TE PSI DIFF
Setpoint #194, PSI DIFF
Eight new EXV related setpoint have been added to provide flexibility:
Setpoint #65, EXV ZONE1
Setpoint #66, EXV ZONE2
Setpoint #67, EXV ROC ZONE
Setpoint #68, EXV ROC ZONE1
Setpoint #71, EXV TOO FAST
Setpoint #72, EXV CHANGING
Refer to their definitions in the Setpoints section for a complete description.
4.2.
Added Functions
4.2.1.
Voltage Sensor (08.00-R)
Up to three sensors that measure voltage input can be specified. If used, a safety condition based upon
setpoint #195 LOW VOLTAGE and setpoint #196 HI VOLTAGE will be checked. If a safety trip occurs the
unit will be placed in a safety hold state.
4.2.2.
Motor Amps (08.00-R)
Up to three sensors that measure amperage input can be specified per circuit. If used a safety condition
based upon setpoints #75 HI AMPS and #76 LO AMPS, plus the associated Full Load Amps (FLA) for that
circuit will be checked. If a safety trip occurs, that circuit will be placed in a safety hold state.
4.2.3.
Custom display description of circuit (08.00-R)
Instead of displaying the circuit number in the status screens of both the Magnum and MCS Connect, up to
3 characters can be supplied using MCS-Config to replace the circuit number. For example, if 1-A is entered
12
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
for circuit 1, then 1-A will be displayed in place of 1. This provides the user additional flexibility in describing a
particular circuit.
4.2.4.
User Logic RO Delay Before Off (08.00-R)
A timer delay before turning off a relay has been added, providing the ability to keep a relay on for a period
of time after the condition to turn it off is met.
4.2.5.
Additional Information Messages (08.00-U)
The messages generated when manually changing the status of a relay output or sensor input have been
expanded. The messages now indicate which relay or sensor was changed and if the change was from
AUTO to MANUAL or MANUAL to AUTO.
4.2.6.
Pump Rotation (08.01-C)
Pump rotation functionality has been added. This is specified with setpoint #106 LEAD PUMP. If the setpoint
is active and its value is zero, then rotation will occur with each on/off cycle of the pump.
4.2.7.
Process Pump Addition and Rotation (08.01-C)
The number of process pumps has been expanded to two and rotation functionality has been added. This is
specified with setpoint #197 LEAD ProcPmp. If the setpoint is active and its value is zero, then rotation will
occur with each on/off cycle of the process pump.
4.2.8.
MOP Control Option to EXV Logic (08.01-G)
Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) has been added to the EXV control logic. If setpoint #199 MOP TARG
PSI is active then MOP logic will be activated. Refer to section 17.48 on Electronic Expansion Valve Control
Logic.
4.2.9.
Delta Temperature Evaporator (08.01-G)
If setpoint #202 DELTA TEMP EVP is active and the delta temperature across the evaporator is greater than
the value of this setpoint the unit will not increase wanted capacity.
4.2.10.
Condenser Low Ambient (08.01-O)
When a compressor is started its discharge pressure will be used as the controlling pressure for five
minutes, enabling that compressor to build head pressure. However, if setpoint #204 COND LOW AMB is
active and there is an ambient temperature sensor reading less than this setpoint, then this compressors
discharge pressure will remain in control for an additional time as specified in the Safety Time Field.
4.2.11.
New Pressure Sensor Supported (08.01-V)
Two pressure transducers developed by Huba Control designed refrigeration industry. These are the HB350 and the HB-700.
4.2.12.
Centrifugal Vane Control (08.01-C)
Vane control now can be based on either a vane position or compressor amp draw sensor input.
4.2.13.
External Centrifugal Purge Control (08.01-P)
Support for the Trane Purifier Purge operation has been added. If setpoint #163 Purge Target is active, it will
activate this feature.
13
4.2.14.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
MCS Touch Screens Interface (08.00-U)
The interface with the various touch screens has been expanded.
4.2.15.
Sensor Averaging (08.00-R)
Sensor inputs can now be averaged over a period of time, up to a maximum time of 30 seconds. This will
enable sensor smoothing if it is needed. Note: At power up, the initial value of the sensor input will be
counted as the sensor history for the number of seconds that has been selected as the averaging time (for
example, if the averaging time was selected at 5 seconds, the initial sensor input reading at startup will be
counted as having already run at that value for 5 seconds previously).
4.2.16.
Virtual Points Separated From Real Points (08.00-A)
Virtual points are sensor inputs, relay outputs, or analog outputs that are not connected to an outside device,
while a real point is connected with wiring from the input/output to an outside device (sensor, motor, etc.). By
placing the virtual points after the real points they will not take up points on an actual hardware board. In the
Setup section of MCS-Config the total number of points are specified and the number of Input/Output boards
must now be specified. Only the number of I/O boards indicated will be accessed.
4.2.17.
205
Added MDP to EXV Control Logic (8.01-X)
Minimal (oil) Differential Psi (MDP) requires the following setpoint to be active.
MDP MIN OIL DIFF If this setpoint is active the MDP function will be added to the EXV control
logic. When the oil differential pressure is less than the value of this setpoint
following compressor start up, the MDP function will be active. The system
will close the EXV valve to restore the oil differential pressure.
The setpoints time column is offset pressure to allow the EXV back to normal
control (assumed 1 decimal). The Sec to Ignore Safety column is the time delay
after the comp starts to allow the MDP logic to function. The Lockout Delay Hrs.
column is the adjust amount the EXV will be closed each time the delay reaches
zero.
When setpoint #205 MDP MIN OIL DIFF is active and oil differential is less than value of this setpoint and
the EXV is not already closing, then the unit will enter a new state: EXV MDP CLOSE. In this state the EXV
will be closed by the value in the Safety Down Time field. This state will be discontinued when the oil
differential is greater than the value of setpoint #205 MDP MIN OIL DIFF plus its Safety Time value, or
when the compressor has been running for longer than the time in the Sec to Ignore Safety field. If EXV
valve adjustment is negative, then the valve is being closed.
4.2.18.
Low Discharge Superheat Adjustment to EXV Logic (8.01-X)
Setpoint #110 LOW REFRIGERANT LEVEL TARGET must be active.

If discharge superheat is less than setpoint #84 LO DISC SUPERHEAT for 1/3 of its safety time and both
discharge temperature and pressure sensors are active, then add the value of setpoint #110 LOW
REFRIGERANT LEVEL TARGET to setpoint #9 EXV TARGET. This function takes precedence over the
regular control zone logic.
4.2.19.
Normal Condenser Discharge Control Bypass (8.02-A)
Depending on what option was selected in the MCS-Config program, normal condenser control can either
be based upon the compressor with the highest discharge pressure or on the pressure of the most recently
started compressor. If control based on newly started compressor was selected then setpoint #206 may be
used to bypass this logic because of a high ambient temperature.
14
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
206
CON
ND HI AMB
4.2.20.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
If this se
etpoint is activ
ve and the co
ondenser type
e is Common and the amb
bient
tempera
ature is above
e the value off this setpointt, then when a
an additional
compressor is started its discharg
ge pressure w
will not be the control
pressurre.
Test for Voltage
V
Out of Balance ((8.02-A)
This test requires

s setpoint #207
7 to be active.
207
UNB
BAL VOLTS
If this se
etpoint is activ
ve, the avera
age of the volttage sensors is calculated..
Each individual volta
age sensor is compared to this average, and if the
difference is greater than the valu
ue of this setp
point then an a
alarm is
generatted and the un
nit is locked o
out.
Only voltage sensors that are specified

s
in the
e MAG V8 scre
reen of MCS-C
Config will be included in the
e
culation.
calc
4.2.21.
208
Expanded
d Testing of Low and Hiigh Off (8.02
2-E)
This testt requires setp

points #208 LO
OW SI OFF an
nd #209 HI SI O
OFF to be acttive.
Presenttly there is Lo
ow SI Off cell in the circuit ssensor input g
grid. This hass
LOW
W SI OFF
been ex
xpanded to be
e either a digiital input or an
n analog inpu
ut.
(On
nly HVAC)
If this se
etpoint is activ
ve and the se
ensor is a dig ital input, whe
en it is on thiss
circuit will
w be disable
ed. The circuitt will be enab led when the digital is off.
209
HI SI
S OFF
(On
nly HVAC)
etpoint is active
e and the senssor is an analo
og input, when
n its value is le
ess
If this se
than the
e value of this setpoint
s
the circuit will be dissabled. The ciircuit will be
enabled
d when the sen
nsor reading iss greater than this value pluss the value in the
safety tim
me. The value
e in the safety time cell will b
be scaled base
ed upon the
number of decimals in
n this setpoint
Presenttly there is Hig
gh SI Off cell in the circuit sensor input grid. This hass
been ex
xpanded to be
e either a digiital input or an
n analog inpu
ut.
If this se
etpoint is activ
ve and the se
ensor is a digiital input, whe
en it is on thiss
circuit will
w be disabled. The circuitt will be enablled when the digital is off.
etpoint is active
e and the senssor is an analo
og input, when
n its value is
If this se
greater than
t
the value
e of this setpoint the circuit w
will be disabled
d. The circuit w
will
be enab
bled when the sensor readin
ng is less than this value min
nus the value in
the safe
ety time. The value in the saffety time cell w
will be scaled b
based upon th
he
number of decimals in
n this setpoint..
4.2.22.
Expanded
d Compresso
or Rotation to Check fo
or Maximum Run Time (8
8.02-E)
In the Compresso
or Info section
n of the MAG V8
V screen in M
MCS-Config, th
here is now a ccheck box to sselect
how
w compressors
s are to be rotated, based either on Run T
Time or First O
On/First Off.
4.2.23.
New Optio
on to test fo
or Low Supe
er Heat on S
Suction or Diischarge PS
SI (8.02E)
In the Circuit Bas

se screen unde
er the EXV Co
ontrol column sselect Disc Sp
ph to test disccharge pressu
ure or
Su
uct Sph to testt the suction pressure
p
to dettermine low su
uperheat.
15
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
4.2.24.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
New Larg
ge Characterr Screen Dis
splaying Con
ntrol Informa
ation (8.03-B
B)
A new
n information screen has been
b
added with
w large chara
acter size for e
ease of readin
ng. This screen
n is
acc
cessed from th
he Main Menu of the Magnum Keypad by pressing the F
F3 key.
ACTUAL
L DISPLAY
09:55
0
Con
ntrol On
OUT
O
IN
I
48.1F
45.3F
R22
DESC
CRIPTION
HH:MM
Heading
g
First line iss sensor that iss the controllin

ng sensor; eith
her entering
or leaving
Second lin
ne is contains tthe other value
e
The last lin
ne is the refrige
erant type
If th
he Scrolling In
nformation op
ption has been selected from
m the MCS-Co
onfig program, this page will be
inclluded in the sc
creen rotation.
4.2.25.
mp Value ad
dded to Circu
uit Status S
Screen (8.03--B)
Circuit Am
e amp value is
s now included
d in the first pa
age of each co
ompressor info
ormation scree
en. Use the right arrow
The
buttton to access it.
4.2.26.
210
harge Superrheat Test to Economiz

zer (8.03-F)
Low Disch
Req
quires setpoint #210 ECO LL3
L D-SHT
If there is an econom
mizer liquid lin
ne solenoid in the system ccontrolled on
ECO
O LL3 D-SHT
percenttage (%), not last step, a lo
ow discharge superheat test is made prrior
(On
nly HVAC)
to decid
ding whether the
t solenoid sshould be turrned on or nott. If the discha
arge
superhe
eat is less tha
an the value o
of this setpoin
nt plus setpoin
nt #84 LO DIS
SC
SUPER
RHEAT, then the
t solenoid iis turned off.
4.2.1. Tonnage an
nd KW Inform
mation (8.03
3-F)
Unit Tons- a virtual senso

or that calculattes the unit ton
nnage. The flo
ow (GPM) sen
nsor must be sselected in the
Temperature / GPM / Pow
wer Factor SI cell.
nnage = [Flow
w in GPM * (Ch
hiller in Tempe
erature Chille
er out Tempera
rature)] / Intern
nal constant off 24
Ton
GPM- Gallo
ons per Minute
e. This can be an actual flow
w sensor or virttual point that rreads a static value from a ssetpoint.
Unit KW- virtual sensor th
hat calculates the unit Kilowa
att usage. The
e Power Facto
or (PF) sensor must be seleccted in
the Temperrature / GPM / Power Factor SI cell.
Kw
w = Amps * Vollts * Power Factor * Internal Constant of .0
00173
Power Facttor- Virtual sen
nsor tied to a setpoint
s
where
e a manual vallue of the units power factor may be defin
ned.
Unit Volts- Voltage being
g supplied to th
he unit. This se
ensor can be a
an actual volta
age sensor or virtual point th
hat reads
a static value from a setpo
oint.
16
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Unit Amps-- (OPTIONAL)) Sensor reading amperage

e of the entire u
unit. If no total unit amp senssor is specified
d, the
software will automatically
y sum all the in
ndividual comp
pressor amp ssensors to app
proximate the u
unit amps.
To set up us
ser logic for Po
ower Factor (o
or GPM or Unitt Volts if desire
ed), first go to the Setpoints screen and sccroll
down to the very bottom. Starting
S
at settpoint #230 and working you
ur way up, activate the numb
ber of setpointts you will
need. Give each
e
point a descriptive
d
nam
me that will help you identifyy its function, ssuch as the exa
ample below. Then
input the vallue you would like that sensor to read, as well as a rang
ge that value m
may vary in an
nd the interval at which
you would like to adjust th
he value. Pay special
s
note to
o the type of se
etpoint selecte
ed (as in the exxample below
w) in the
Select Valu
ue: # decimals & print char cell
c so that the
e values will re
ead and calculate correctly.
Once your setpoints

s
have
e been defined
d, go back to th
he SI screen. F
Find the respe
ective sensor yyou wish to tie
e to a
setpoint and
d select User Logic
L
in the D
Display Type column.
c
The U
User Logic SI V
V11 Form sccreen will pop u
up. First
select the sa
ame Display Type
T
as you did in the Selec
ct Value: # deccimals & print char cell for tthe respective setpoint.
Next, select Setpoints in the first dropd
down menu off the Operand #1 box, and sselect the resp
pective setpoin
nt in the
second drop
pdown menu. Finally, select None in the middle dropdo
own menu (O
Operators). An example userr logic
displaying th
he value of a setpoint
s
is show
wn below:
The Unit Tons value is selected in the E

Evap. Tonnag
ge cell in the E
Evaporator Info
o screen unde
er the MAG HV
VAC V8
tab.
17
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
The
e Unit Volts se
ensor is selecte
ed in the Volts
s A cell in the
e General Info screen. The U
Unit Amps sen
nsor is
sele
ected in the U
Unit Amps cell (If not used th
hen the Ampss A cell from e
each circuit in the Circuit SI screen
will be totaled tog
gether to calcu
ulate the amps
s value). The U
Unit KW senso
or is selected in the Unit KW
W cell.
Optional
The followin
ng screen has been added to
o the status sc
creens in the kkeypad displayy to show Tonnage/KW information
(if available)):
L DISPLAY
ACTUAL
09:55
0
Unit
U
60/
/65
UNIT IS
S UNLOADED
025
5:42;33
AMP&VLT
A
KW&TON
K
KW/
/TON
110.0A
1
73.8K
7
0.
.15
388.0V
3
479T
4
PG
PG
4.2.2.
DESC
CRIPTION
HH
H:MM
AM
MP and VOLT
AMPS
A
VOLTAGE
V
CHIL
LLER UNIT
LEV
V/ENT
CURRENT CO
ONTROL STATE
E
TIME IN CU
URRENT STATE
E
KW and T
TON
KW/T
TON
KW
KW
W/TON with
2 decimals
TONS
GE UP
AGE DN
PA
PAG
Oil Flow Safety

S
(8.03--J)
Requires
s setpoint #211 if HVAC con
nfiguration type
e, setpoint #21
14 if CENT.
211
NO OIL FLOW
(On
nly HVAC)
If this se
etpoint is activ
ve and a sen sor is specifie
ed in the Oil Flow Switch cell
of the Circuit
C
SI screen, then a tesst will be mad
de for no oil flo
ow.
If the se
ensor is a digiital input, whe
en on (closed
d) this indicate
es that there iis
no oil flo
ow. If the sen
nsor is an ana
alog input, the
en a reading lo
ower than the
e
value in
n this setpointt indicates inssufficient oil flo
ow.
fety is checked
d only when th
he compressorr is running.
This safe
4.2.3.
RTC Acce
ess to User Logic
L
(8.03-J
-J)
The real time clock (RT

TC) can now be
b accessed in the user logic.
18
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
5.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
MC
CS 485 Commun
C
nications
s
5.1.1.
MCS 485 Network wiith Local RS

S232 Commu
unications
19
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
5.1.2.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
MCS 485 Network wiith Remote M

Modem Com
mmunication
ns
20
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
6.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Re
equireme
ents for PC Softw
ware
To install an
nd run the prog
gram we suggest the following system req
quirements:
Minimum Sy
ystem Requirred to Run Prrogram
Windows 2000 or higher

Pentium processo
or
20 Gigabyte
G
Available Hard Disk space
Sup
per VGA Displa
ay capable of displaying
d
256
6 colors
512 Megabytes RAM
R
21
MAGNUM Control Zone Logic

The control strategy is designed to modulate the compressor(s) capacity to maintain the control sensor
reading within the specified control zone. To accomplish this, the system will constantly monitor the control
value, its rate of change, and position in relationship to the control zone and make adjustments accordingly.
The strategies for a fixed step system, reciprocating compressor, reciprocating compressor with an inverter,
variable (slide) step system, or a screw compressor are all slightly different. The variable step system allows
for infinite variations of capacity while the fixed step system does not.
7.1.
Common Definitions
7.1.1.
Target
The control target is specified in setpoint #1. This will be the base of developing the control zone.
7.1.2.
Control Zone
The control zone is developed by utilizing two more setpoints to calculate the upper and lower limits.
Setpoint #2 is added to the target to determine the deadband to the upper limit, and setpoint #3 is subtracted
from the target to determine the deadband to the lower limit.
Example: Setpoint #1 Target = 45
Setpoint #2 Upper Deadband = 1
Setpoint #3 Lower Deadband = 1
47
Temperature
7.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Upper Limit
46
45
44
Lower Limit
Control Zone + 1
Control Zone - 1
Target
Control Zone
43
7.1.3.
Control Sensor
This sensor has been specified in MCS-Config as providing the control value reading. It will normally be the
entering temperature, leaving temperature, or suction pressure. The setpoints must be adjusted according to
the type of control measurement selected.
7.1.4.
Control Input Rate of Change
The Rate of Change is how rapidly the control value changes over a set period of time. If the control value is
increasing, the rate will be positive; if it is decreasing, the rate will be a negative value. How quickly the input
is changing, its direction, and its distance from the control zone will all be used to determine how the system
will respond.
7.1.1. Step Delay and Sensitivity
The system will not attempt to take action until the Step Delay counts down to zero. Setpoint #26 contains
the initial value. The speed that the counter will decrement by is based on the control input rate of change
and the sensitivity that has been specified in setpoint #25. The purpose of the sensitivity value is to limit how
quickly the system reacts to changes indicated by the control sensor. The lower the value of this setpoint,
the faster the system will react to changes of the control sensor.
22
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
8.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Va
ariable Capacity
C
Control Method
8.1
1.
Screw Compresso
or with slide piston
Thiis option is sp
pecified in MC
CS-Config by
y selecting the
e compresso
or type in the Compressorr
Info
ormation Sec
ction under th
he MAG HVAC
C V8 button.
As stated in the
t previous section,
s
the con
ntrol strategy iis designed to
o modulate the
e system capaccity to
maintain the control senso
or reading within the specified
d control zone
e. The system capacity will b
be based
upon the num
mber of comprressors that arre Wanted On. When the firsst, or an additiional compresssor, is
turned on the
e system capa
acity will be sett to the calcula
ated value. Fo
or the first com
mpressor this w
will be the
value of setp
point #31 MIN FLA %. When
n additional compressors are
e brought on, ttheir capacity is
calculated to provide the sa
ame percenta
age of capacityy prior to the ch
hange. The syystem will adju
ust the
required capacity between the calculated
d and the maxximum value a
an as specified
d in setpoint #3
30 MAX
FLA %. All co
ompressors th
hat are on will be adjusted to
ogether to mee
et the system capacity.
When the ma
aximum capac
city value of th
he currently op
perating comprressors has be
een reached, a
an
additional compressor, if available, will be
b Wanted On. The number of compresso
ors Wanted On
n will be
increased by
y one and the system
s
capacity will be set tto the calculate
ed value to ma
aintain the sam
me
capacity as before
b
the change and the sequence
s
will b
begin again. O
Once all available compresso
ors are
on, their max
ximum will be 100% regardle
ess of the valu
ue in setpoint #
#30 MAX FLA
A %.
When the miinimum calcula
ated value has
s been reache
ed, a compresssor will be turn
ned off. This w
will occur
when the red
duced numberr of compresso
ors can achievve the same ca
apacity at 90%
%. The number of
compressors
s Wanted On will
w be decreas
sed by one an
nd the system capacity will b
be set to 90% a
and the
sequence will begin again..
The compres
ssor slide conttrol is based upon the ampss drawn by tha
at compressor. For example,, if
setpoint #31 MIN FLA % is
s set to 30%, that means 30
0% of the calcu
ulated full load
d amperage for that
compressor. An acceptable
e zone for the amp draw is d
developed bassed on setpoin
nts #35 AMP
DEADBAND
D HIGH and #3
36 AMP DEAD
DBAND LOW. If the amp dra
aw is greater tthan the indica
ated
capacity nee
eded then the compressor
c
is unloaded. Co
onversely, if it iis less, then it is loaded.
be loading (loa
Screw compressors with slide pistons that are turned o
on can either b
ad solenoids a
are
pulsed), unlo
oading (unload
d solenoids are
e pulsed), or in
n a hold state (no action is ta
aken). The sta
ate of
each compre
essor reflects this
t action.
8.2
2.
Comprressor with a Variable Frequency

y Drive (VFD
D)
Thiis option is sp
pecified in MC
CS-Config by
y selecting the
e analog outp
put for the VF
FD in the Co
ompr
Spe
eed or Modullate Hot Gas AO
A cell in th
he Circuit Bas
se screen.
w control the
e compressor speed
s
in the ssame matter ass the compresssor slide. The
e same
The system will
setpoints will be used. This
s allows a fixed
d staged comp
pressors capa
acity to be varried. See section 13 for
setpoints ass
sociated with variable
v
capac
city control logiic.
23
8.3.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Example of a system with 3 variable Step Compressors

(Example below assumes compressor 1 is the current lead compressor.)
STAGE 1
Compressor 1s startup procedure has begun. Once on, the capacity will be adjusted from the minimum
to the maximum. All other compressors will be off. The steps Wanted On / Actual On will be 1 / 1.
STAGE 2
Compressor 2s startup procedure has begun. Once on, the system capacity will be changed to the
calculated % and compressor 1 will be unloaded until it matches the calculated system capacity. Both
compressors will be varied from the calculated to the maximum. All other compressors will be off. The
steps Wanted On / Actual On will be 2 / 2. If the system capacity has been reduced to 45%, or the
calculated % (whichever is larger) and less capacity is needed, a compressor will be turned off and the
system capacity will be set to the 90% or the maximum and the system will return to Stage 1.
STAGE 3
Compressor 3s startup procedure has begun. Once on, the system capacity will be changed to the
calculated % and compressors 1 and 2 will be unloaded until they equal the required capacity. All
compressors will be varied from the calculated to 100%. The steps Wanted On / Actual On will be 3 / 3.
If the system capacity has been reduced to 60%, and less capacity is needed, a compressor will be
turned off and the system capacity will be set 90% and the system will return to Stage 2.
24
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
9.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Ce
entrifuga
al Comprressor Control
9.1
1.
Introdu
uction
There are many

m
difference
es, in both con
ncept and func
ction, between
n centrifugal co
ompressors an
nd other typess. For
certain appliications, centrrifugal compres
ssors have dis
stinct advantag
ges such as h
high energy effficiency, high vvolume of
airflow, and low maintenance due to the
e small numbe
er of moving pa
arts. When co
ombined with a Variable Freq
quency
Drive (VFD)) it becomes siimple and effic
cient to vary th
he speed of the
e compressorr and operate a
at part load.
To provide control
c
for this unique type of
o compressor MCS has devveloped a new
w type software
e specific to ce
entrifugal
units: CENT
T V8. Much of the control log
gic is similar to
o that found in HVAC V8. A ttarget value an
nd control zon
ne are
calculated, and
a then comp
pressor capac
city is modulate
ed to keep the
e control senso
or within that zzone. Input sen
nsors are
monitored constantly
c
and preventative action
a
is taken
n to protect the
e unit from anyy potentially un
nsafe or dama
aging
conditions. Different
D
from other types off units though, both compresssor speed an
nd vane positio
on must be takken into
consideratio
on since both affect
a
cooling capacity.
c
9.2
2.
Centriffugal Relate
ed Termino
ology
The followin
ng terms relate
e to the controll of centrifugal compressors and how CEN
NT V8 processses them.
9.2.1.
Lift Press
sure:
Lift pressure
e equals conde
enser pressure
e minus evapo
orator pressurre. The lower tthe lift pressurre is, the more
efficiently the system operrates.
9.2.2.
d Surge Prottection:
Surge and
Surge is an unstable cond

dition that occu
urs at low mas
ss flows. Surge
es decrease ccompressor pe
erformance an
nd
efficiency, and could even
n cause perma
anent equipme
ent damage.
CENT V8 de
efines a single
e surge as a la
arge decrease in compresso
or amps follow
wed by a large increase in the
e amps
or a large de
ecrease in lift pressure
p
follow
wed by large in
ncrease in lift p
pressure. The
e CENT V8 sofftware will kee
ep the last
60 seconds of samples fo
or both amps and
a lift pressurre. It will calcullate the last te
en 1 second Ra
ate of Change
es for
both amps and
a lift pressurre. If within the
ese 10 Rate Of
O Changes the
ere is a value lless than (setp
point #220
AmpSurgeR
ROC x 1) or (setpoint #22
21 LiftSurgeR
ROC x 1) folllowed by a va
alue greater than setpoint #2
220 or
#221, a com
mpressor surge
e has occurred
d.
The softwarre will then cou
unt the numbe
er of compress
sor surges thatt occur. If the n
number of surg
rges is more th
han the
value in setp
point #219 Ex
xcessSurges within
w
5 minuttes (value of se
etpoint #219 S
Safety Time Fiield) the system will
shut down and
a generate an
a ExcessSurrges alarm. This
T safety con
ndition will auto
omatically resttart the compre
essor
after the time in the Safety
y Down Time of
o the setpointt #219. If a seccond ExcessS
Surges occurrs within the tim
me of the
Lockout Dellay Field, the compressor
c
wiill be placed in
n Cmp Locked
d Out state an
nd a manual re
eset is require
ed to
enable the compressor
c
to restart again.
9.3
3.
Centriffugal Base Compresso

C
or Setup MC
CS-Config
Similar to the HVAC V8 so

oftware the he
eader buttons for
f this type off configuration
n file are as folllows:
In the MAG CENT V8 scre

een the same information is
s required as fo
or HVAC V8 ssetup. The com
mpressor type must be
centrifugal.
25
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
The VFD forr compressor speed control, VFD fault, an

nd Vane Close
ed Indicator arre specified in the Circuit Base
screen if the
ey are used.
In the Circuiit SI screen the

e sensors for the
t Turbine Inlet Pressure a
and Vane Position are speciffied if they are
e used.
For compres
ssors with a VFD,
V
a Vane Position
P
sensorr is required an
nd is used for opening and cclosing the van
nes.
For compres
ssors without a VFD, a Vane
e Position sen
nsor is optiona
al. If unspecifie
ed then the am
mp sensor is ussed for
opening and
d closing the vanes.
v
In the above
a
example
e the Vane Po
osition sensor iis not specified
d; therefore, th
he vane
control will be
b based upon
n amp draw.
9.4
4.
Typica
al Relay Outtput Setup
Typical setu
up of a centrifugal compressor:
9.5
5.
Comprressor Spee
ed Control
Compressor speed is con

ntrolled by the associated an
nalog output. T
The speed will only be chang
ged after the vvanes are
either completely opened (speed will be
e increased) orr closed (spee
ed will be decre
eased).
9.6
6.
Comprressor Vane
e Control
If more capa
acity is needed
d the vanes will be opened by
b pulsing the Open Vane re
elay output (re
efer to UNIT
LOADNG-V
VANE state). If less capacity
y is needed th
he vanes will be closed by pu
ulsing the Closse Vane relay output
(refer to UNIT UNLDNG-VANE state). Vane positio
oning is based
d upon the Va
ane Position ssensor if speccified. If
no Vane Po
osition sensorr is used, then
n the compres
ssor amps arre used to dettermine vane positioning.
26
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
9.7
7.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Trane Purifier Purrge System Interface
Since many
y centrifugal co
ompressors op
perate in a vac
cuum, there is an opportunityy for contamin
nates to get intto the
system from
m small leaks or
o minor servic
cing errors. These contamina
ates are classsified as non-co
ondensable re
equiring a
method of disposal,
d
know
wn as purging. Setpoint #163
3 Purge Targe
et must be acctive for the sysstem to checkk for
purge cycles
s.
9.7.1.
erface Setup
p
Purge Inte
Under the Circuit

C
Base sc
creen, scroll do
own to the Pu
urge Relays an
nd Sensors se
ection and entter the requestted
information.
Purge Enab
ble RO This relay will be tu
urned ON whe
en a purge cyccle is active, else it will be offf.
Purge Sole
enoid RO Th
his relay will be
e turned ON once the Purge
e Exhaust Pum
mp has been o
on for 1 second
d.
aust Pump RO
O - This relay will be turned ON when a purge cycle is a
active, else it w
will be off.
Purge Exha
Purge Mode Switch SI This inputs ty
ype must be MODE
M
SEL SW
W. This is an e
external three--way switch that can be
set to:
OFF - in this settiing the purge system
s
will no
ot function, the purge state w
will be SWITCH
HED OFF.
MA
ANON - in this setting the purge state will be
b either M-PR
RG OFF if the
e system is no
ot purging or M-PRG
RU
UNNING if a purge cycle is active.
AUTO - in this se
etting the purge
e state will be either A-PRG
G OFF if the syystem is not p
purging or A-PRG
RU
UNNING if a purge cycle is active.
Purge Safe
ety Switch SI - If this switch is on for longe
er than the value in setpoint #164 P-FaulttTimer all purrge relay
outputs will be locked off and
a an error message
m
will be generated. T
This will have no effect on th
he status of the unit.
Purge Sucttion Temp SI This sensor provides the suction
nit. When a pu
s
line tem
mperature of tthe auxiliary un
urge
cycle is activ
ve this temperrature is monitored. If it rema
ains above the
e value in setp
point #163 PurgeTarget the
e
compressorr will not exhau
ust any non-co
ondensables frrom the purge
e drum. Howevver, if the temp
perature dropss below
this value th
hen the exhaus
st pump and solenoids
s
mustt be on to captture the non-ccondensables.
9.7.2.
163
Purg
ge Target
(Only CENT)
164
Purg
ge Fault
(Only CENT)
165
Purg
ge ExTime
(Only CENT)
Purge rela
ated setpoin
nts
When th
his setpoint is active
a
it indica
ates that a TRA
ANE external purge system.
When purge suction te
emperature iss less than thiss value, purge action may be
e
requ
uired.
If this se
etpoint is active
e and there is a purge safetyy switch, the vvalue of this
setp
point will conta
ain the number of seconds th
hat the switch must be on
befo
ore a purge errror alarm occu
urs.
If the tim
me of purging for
f the last 24 hours is greatter than the va
alue of this
setp
point a setpoin
nt alarm will be
e generated.
27
9.7.3.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Conditions to Run Purge Cycle
Mode selection switch in AUTO position: The compressor must be running and the suction line temperature of
the auxiliary unit must be less than the value in setpoint #163 Purge Target.
Mode selection switch in MANUAL position: The suction line temperature of the auxiliary unit must be less than
the value in setpoint #163 Purge Target.
Mode selection switch in OFF position: purge cycles will not run.
9.7.4.
Purge States
SWITCHED OFF The mode selection switch is in the OFF position.

FLOAT FAULT - The purge safety switch has been on longer than the value in setpoint #164 Purge Fault. All
purge relay outputs will be LOCKED OFF. When this switch returns to the normal off position, the purge relay outputs
will be changed to AUTO and the purge state will be either M-PRG OFF or A-PRG OFF.
M-PRG OFF The mode selection switch is in the MANUAL position. All purge relay outputs are OFF. If the
suction line temperature of the auxiliary unit drops below the value in setpoint #163 PurgeTarget the state will be
changed to M-PRG-RUNNING. Note, in this state the status of the compressor is not checked.
M-PRG RUNNING The purge relay enable and the purge pump are turned on. The purge solenoid will be
turned on 1 second after the pump has started. If the suction line temperature of the auxiliary unit rises above the
value in setpoint #163 PurgeTarget the purge solenoid will be turned off. 1 second later the purge relay enable and
the purge pump will be turned off and the state will be changed to M-PRG OFF,
A-PRG OFF - The mode selection switch is in the AUTO position. All purge relay outputs are OFF. If the
compressor is running and the suction line temperature of the auxiliary unit drops below the value in setpoint #163
PurgeTarget the state will be changed to A-PRG-RUNNING. Note, in this state the status of the compressor is
checked.
A-PRG RUNNING - The purge relay enable and the purge pump will be turned on. The purge solenoid will be
turned on 1 second after the pump has started. If the compressor goes off or the suction line temperature of the
auxiliary unit rises above the value in setpoint #163 PurgeTarget the purge solenoid will be turned off. 1 second
later the purge relay enable and the purge pump will be turned off and the state will be changed to A-PRG OFF.
28
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
10. Magnum Display Summary

The following is an examination of all the information screens that can be accessed through both the Magnum
keypad and MCS-Connect program.
10.1. Magnum keypad and display

10.1.1.
Menu Screen
The main menu is accessed by pressing the Menu key.

ACTUAL DISPLAY
09:55
-Status
-Outputs
-Inputs
-Alarms
-Graphs
Help
Main Menu
-Setpoints
-Serv Tools
-Lckout RST
-Lckout ALM
-Passwords
10.1.2.
DESCRIPTION
HH:MM
Main Menu
-Control Status Display

-Setpoint Display
-Relay and Analog Output Display -Service Tools Display
-Sensor Input Display
-Lockout Reset Display
-Alarm Display
-Lockout Alarms Display
-Graph Display
-Password Display
Introduction to Status Screens
The current status of the unit and compressors is displayed by selecting the Status option from the Menu
screen. This following screen will be displayed. By pressing the PG or PG function keys you will get
additional information on each compressor.
10.1.3.
Unit status
ACTUAL DISPLAY
09:55
Unit
45/54
UNIT IS UNLOADED
025:42:33
WTD ACT WTD% DLY
ROC
0
0
40% 180
0.0
TARGET=45.0 (ADJ +0.0)
PG
PG
10.1.4.
DESCRIPTION
HH:MM
CHILLER UNIT
CURRENT CONTROL STATE
TIME IN CURRENT STATE
ACTUAL
WANTED%
DELAY
#STEPS
ACTUAL%
NEXT CHG
TARGET SETPOINT + TARGET RESET
PAGE UP
WANTED
#STEPS
LEV/ENT
SLOPE
DIRECTION
PAGE DN
Unit Tonnage and KW Information
If tonnage/KW information is available the following screen is added to the status screens:
ACTUAL DISPLAY
09:55
Unit
60/65
UNIT IS UNLOADED
025:42:33
AMP&VLT
KW&TON
KW/TON
110.0A
73.8K
0.15
388.0V
479T
PG
PG
DESCRIPTION
HH:MM
AMPandVLT
Amps
Voltage
29
CHILLER UNIT
LEV/ENT TMP
KWandTON
KW/TON
KW
KW/TON with 2 decimals
Tons
PAGE UP
PAGE DN
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
The above screen is based upon flow of 230 GPM and power factor (PF) of 1. All other values in
the calculation are displayed on the screen.
10.1.5.
Purge Status Screen (only if Purge cycles are active)
ACTUAL DISPLAY
09:55
SUC-LT
20F
DESCRIPTION
PRG 1
45/54
A-PRG OFF
000:00:42
FLOAT
24TMR
NORMAL
27mi
PG
10.1.6.
PG
HH:MM
Purge Circuit
LEV/ENT TMP
CURRENT PURGE STATE
SUC-LT
FLOAT
24 TMR
Temperature of
Safety Float
Purge Run Time
suction line
Status
in last 24 hours
PAGE UP
PAGE DN
Compressor status
ACTUAL DISPLAY
09:56
SUCT
66P
55F
DESCRIPTION
CMP #1
45/54
CMP OFF/READY
000:00;30
DISC
OPD
MOTOR
190P
134P
0%
177F
---OK
PG
PG
HH:MM
SUCTION
Pressure
Temperature
COMPRESSOR
LEV/ENT TMP
DISCHARGE
OIL DIFFERENTIAL
MOTOR
Pressure
Pressure
Amp %
Temperature
---Status
PAGE UP
PAGE DN
ACTUAL DISPLAY
09:55
SST
38
DESCRIPTION
CMP #1
45/54
CMP OFF/READY
000:00:42
SSH
SCT
DSH
16.9
97
79.2
PG
10.1.7.
HH:MM
SAT.SUCTION
Temperature
COMPRESSOR
SUCT SHEAT
SAT.COND.
Temperature
Temperature
PAGE UP
PG
AROC
0.0A
0.0A
DISC S.HEAT
Temperature
PAGE DN
Compressor status (only CENT)
ACTUAL DISPLAY
09:55
LEV/ENT TMP
CMP #1
45/54
CMP OFF/READY
000:00:42
LROC
CNT
LIFT
0.0P
0c
45F
0.0P
0c
0.8F
PG
PG
DESCRIPTION
HH:MM
COMPRESSOR
AROC
LROC
CNT
Current Comp. Current Amp
Lift
Amp R.O.C.
Lift R.O.C.
Count
Last Comp.
Amp R.O.C.
30
Last
Lift
Lift R.O.C.
Count
PAGE UP
LEV/ENT TMP
LIFT
Current Lift
Lift Ratio
PAGE DN
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
10.1.8.
EXV
V status
ACTUAL
L DISPLAY
09:
:55
VLV
V%
27
7
EXV #1
IS HOL
LDING
000:3
36:42
DELAY
SPHT
60
12.2
PG
G
DESC
CRIPTION
45/5
54
RO
OC
0.
.0
HH:MM
VLV OPEN%
Percent
PG
G
ELECTRO
ONIC EXP VLV
V
CURRENT CONTROL STA
ATE
TIME IN CURRENT STA
ATE
TIME DELAY
Y
SUCT SH
HEAT
Delay To
Tempera
ature
Next Change
e
P
PAGE UP
LEV/
/ENT TMP
ROC
Rate
e Of
Chan
nge
PAGE DN
10.2. HVAC STATUS Diisplay (MCS

S-Connect)
Function
n
Buttonss
Sensor Inputs
Unit Tab
bs
Relay
Outputss
Analog Outputs
Unit Statuss
The screens
shot above shows the follow
wing features:
The
e top row of bu
uttons provides
s function sele
ection within M
MCS-Connect.
The
e authorization
n level button is located in th
his row, it will a
automatically u
update to displlay the currentt
authorization leve
el. The examp
ple above is at a factory leve
el authorization
n.
st below the top row of buttons, there is a row
r of tabs. Th
he first is the S
Site Info scree
en which will sh
how you
Jus
details of all the Magnum
M
contrrollers available to establish a connection, the remaining
g tabs allow yo
ou to
acc
cess to each one
o respectivelly.
31
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
The
ere are four qu
uadrants of info
ormation displlayed for each
h Magnum con
ntroller, namelyy: Relay Outputs,
Ana
alog Outputs, Sensor Inputs
s, and Unit Sta
atus (with six sub-menus of S
Status, Alarmss, SetPoints,
Res
set/Clear, Sch
hedule, and Se
ervice). Note: these
t
screens may not alwa
ays be displaye
ed in the same
e
pos
sition, MCS-Co
onnect will auttomatically adjjust the screen
n arrangementt for optimum display inform
mation.
The status of
o the Capacity
y Control State
es, Compresso
or Control Sta
ates and EXV C
Control Statess can be viewe
ed from
MCS-Conne
ect by clicking the Status ta
ab in the Unit Status
S
quadra
ant. The follow
wing screen wiill be displayed
d:
System (uniit) information is shown in the top section:

Cap
pacity Contro
ol State - State
e of chiller
Tim
me - Time spen
nt in current sttate. If the statte is UNIT IN P
POWER UP time will count down to zero.
Wa
anted / Actual - Number of capacity
c
steps
s Wanted On vversus Actual On.
Ste
ep Delay Value that is cou
unted down. Th
he sensitivity a
and difference
e between the control sensorr and
con
ntrol zone will determine
d
the speed of the countdown.
c
W
When this value
e reaches zero
o, the controlle
er will
determine if a cha
ange in the sy
ystem capacity
y is required.
anted % - Wan
nted slide perc
centage.
Wa
Ratte Of Change
e Rate of Cha
ange of contro
ol sensor.
Control On - The
e control sensor value. The name and the
e reading will b
be displayed, w
with color to in
ndicate its
ationship to the
e target setpoint.
rela
Mo
ode - The mode can be eithe
er COOLING or
o HEATING.
Compressor information (all active compressors will be
b displayed):
ate - Compress
sor number an
nd state. The default
d
Comprressor numberr can be chang
ged in MCS-C
Config
Sta
with
h a 3 characte
er entry in the Comp
Name//ID column off the Compresssor Base scre

een.
Tim
me - Time spen
nt in current sttate. If the statte is CMP ANT
TICYCLE time
e will count dow
wn to zero.
Oil Diff - Oil differential pressurre. It is calcula
ated as followss:
Se
emi hermetic screws:
s
Oil PSI Suction
S
PSI o
or Discharge
e PSI Suction
n PSI
Op
pen drive horiz
zontal and
Ca
arlyle screw co
ompressor:
Oil PSI Discharge
D
PSI
Re
eciprocating co
ompressors:
Oil PSI - Suction
S
PSI
All Others:
Oil PSI - Discharge
D
PSI
A % - Full Loa
ad Amps based
d on the comp
pressors respe
ective setpointt. For screw co
ompressors th
his
FLA
calc
culation is bas
sed current ope
erating conditiions.
Ste
eps - Indicates
s number of ste
eps associated
d with this com
mpressor that are turned on.
Lea
ad? - YES will be displayed for the lead co
ompressor.
Compressor Superheat in
nformation:
32
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Suc
ction Temp - Compressor number
n
and Suction Tempe
erature, if available.
Satturated Suctio
on - Calculate
ed Suction Satturated Tempe
erature (R22, R
R134a, R407cc, and R410a a
are
sup
pported).
Suc
ction Superheat - Calculate
ed Suction Superheat, only available if bo
oth the Suction
n Temperature
e and the
Suc
ction Pressure
e are used. Suction Superhe
eat = Suction T
Temperature - Suction Saturated Tempera
ature.
Dis
sc Temp - Disc
charge Tempe
Satturated Disch
harge - Calcula
ated Discharge Saturated T
Temperature (R
R22, R134a, R
R407c, and R4
410a are
sup
pported).
Dis
sc Superheat - Discharge Superheat
S
is av
vailable only iff both the Disccharge Tempe
erature and the
e
Discharge Pressu
ure are used. Discharge Superheat = Disccharge Tempe
erature - Disch
harge Saturate
ed
Tem
mperature.
Reff Type Refrigerant type us
sed.
10.1. CENT Status

S
Disp
play (MCS-C
Connect)
33
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
The Control Status for cen

ntrifugal compressor portion
n of the Status screen is sho
own below.
Centrifugal (unit)
(
information is shown in
n the top section:
Cap
pacity Contro
ol State - State
e of chiller
Tim
me - Time spen
nt in current sttate. If the statte is UNIT IN P
POWER UP time will count down to zero.
Wa
anted / Actual - Number of capacity
c
steps
s Wanted On vversus Actual On.
Ste
ep Delay Value that is cou
unted down. Th
he sensitivity a
and difference
e between the control sensorr and
con
ntrol zone will determine
d
the speed of the countdown.
c
W
When this value
e reaches zero
o, the controlle
er will
determine if a cha
ange in the sy
ystem capacity
y is required.
anted FLA % - Wanted Full Load Amp percentage.
Wa
Ratte Of Change
e Rate of Cha
ange of contro
ol sensor.
Control On - The
e control sensor value. The name and the
e reading will b
be displayed, w
with color to in
ndicate its
rela
ationship to the
e target setpoint.
Mo
ode - The mode can be eithe
er COOLING or
o HEATING.
CTRL LIFT Co
ontrol Lift = Satturated Discha
arge Temperatture - Saturate
ed Suction Tem
mperature (OR
R)
Turrbine Input PSI (converted to
o temperature).
Compressor information (all active compressors will be
b displayed):
ate - Compress
sor number an
nd state. The default
d
Comprressor numberr can be chang
ged in MCS-C
Config
Sta
with
h a 3 characte
er entry in the Comp
Name//ID column off the Compresssor Base scre

een.
Tim
me - Time spen
nt in current sttate. If the statte is CMP ANT
TICYCLE time
e will count dow
wn to zero.
Oil Diff - Oil differential pressurre. It is calcula
ated as followss:
Ce
entrifugal comp
pressors:
Oil Pressu
ure Pre-oil Filter Pressure
FLA
A % - Full Loa
ad Amps base
ed on the comp
pressors resp
pective setpoin
nt.
Ste
eps - Indicates
s number of ste
eps associated
d with this com
mpressor that are turned on.
Lea
ad? - YES will be displayed for the lead co
ompressor.
Sta
aging This fie
eld will display
y VANES for centrifugal co
ompressors
Liftt Temp If an
n Inlet Pressurre sensor is sp
pecified in the configuration, then this valu
ue will equal Sa
aturated
Discharge Tempe
erature Inlet PSI (converte
ed to temperatture). If no Inle
et Pressure se
ensor is presen
nt, this
valu
ue will equal Saturated
S
Disc
charge Temperature - Satura
ated Suction T
Temperature.
Liftt ROCs Currrent lift Rate Of
O Change/ La
ast lift Rate Of Change
Am
mp/Lift Surges
s This field is
s a counter forr the number o
of amp and lift surges respecctively.
Compressor Superheat in
nformation:
ction Temp - Compressor number
n
and Suction Tempe
Suc
Satturated Suctio
on - Calculate
ed Suction Satturated Tempe
erature (R22, R
R134a, R407cc, and R410a a
are
sup
pported).
Suc
ction Superheat - Calculate
ed Suction Superheat, only available if bo
oth the Suction
n Temperature
e and the
Suc
ction Pressure
e are used. Suction Superhe
eat = Suction T
Temperature - Suction Saturated Tempera
ature.
Dis
sc Temp - Disc
charge Tempe
Satturated Disch
harge - Calcula
ated Discharge Saturated T
Temperature (R
R22, R134a, R
R407c, and R4
410a are
sup
pported).
Dis
sc Superheat - Discharge Superheat
S
is av
vailable only iff both the Disccharge Tempe
erature and the
e
Discharge Pressu
ure are used. Discharge Superheat = Disccharge Tempe
erature - Disch
harge Saturate
ed
Tem
mperature.
Reff Type Refrigerant type us
sed.
34
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
11. MAGNUM Control States

The MAGNUM controller is a state computer, that is, decisions are made based upon setpoints, timers
and sensor inputs, the controller moves from one state to another. The controller will change states to
ensure the proper functioning of the chiller package.
As we review the various states, we must remember that a chiller package consists of a number of
different parts or functions: the compressors and their related items such as unloaders hot gas
bypasses, etc.; evaporator; and condensing functions. To control these functions the states will be
divided into four sections:
Capacity Control States

Compressor Control States
EXV Control States ?
Condenser Control States ?
Both the CAPACITY CONTROL STATES and COMPRESSOR CONTROL STATES are displayed on
the STATUS option on the graphics LCD. To view the state of the chiller, select the STATUS option
from the MENU on the keypad. You can then view the entire status by using the page up / down
function keys. The information can also be accessed via the MCS-Connect program under status
screen by clicking on the CONTROL STATUS button.
11.1. Unit Control States (number)

Note: All user logic points can now access the Unit Control State. The value accessed is the number
listed in parenthesis in the following headings.
11.1.1.
UNIT IN POWER UP (0)
This state is entered when the MAGNUM is powered up or the system has been reset. The system will
remain in this state for the time specified in setpoint #23 POWER DELAY or for 60 seconds if not
active. In this state all Relay Outputs are turned off. This time delay is to insure the microprocessor has
stable power before starting the algorithm.
11.1.2.
NO RUN- I/O LOST (2)
This state will be entered whenever the MAGNUM loses communications with any of the I/O boards that
are connected via the MCS I/O network. When this state is entered the system will generate an MCS I/O
offline alarm, which identifies which I/O is offline and a lost I/O shutdown alarm which locks out the unit.
Once locked out, if there are ten consecutive successful I/O reads the system will reset and attempt to
run. When this occurs a LOST I/O RESTART will be generated. Or, the lockout-reset key can be
pressed to reset the system, after the lost I/O has been corrected. This will generate a LOCKOUT
RESET. In this state all ROs except ALARM and OIL HEATER are turned OFF.
11.1.3.
UNIT IN LOCKOUT (3)
This state is entered whenever a critical situation is encountered that could cause harm to the chiller
package. Items such as freeze protect and emergency stop will force the system into this state.
Lockouts can be reset without authorization from the keypad or MCS-Connect program; however if the
lockout condition has not been corrected, the system will again be forced into the LOCKOUT state. In
this state, all ROs except ALARM and OIL HEATER (for screws with an oil pump) are turned OFF and
placed in the LOCKOUT state. NOTE: If the Lockout Reset is pressed more than the programmed
allowable number of times in one day the unit cannot be reset during the current day except through the
MCS-Connect program and requires Factory authorization. This number is selected from a drop down
menu under the Setup Info button, with a range of 2 to12.
35
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
11.1.4.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
UNIT IS OFF
O (4)
This state is entered when the system ha

as finished a S
STARTUP, DISABLE, LOCK
KOUT, or NO RUNI/O LOST sta
an active state
ate. The chillerr is now ready
y to move into a
e to meet the ccapacity required.
11.1.5.
UNIT IS HOLDING
H
(5))
This state is entered when one of three conditions

c
exissts:
1) The control senso
or reading is be
eing maintaine
ed with in the ccontrol zone.
2) Con
ntrol sensor rea
ading is above
e the control zo
one but the Ra
ate of Change
e is less than th
he value
in th
he (MAX ROC--, #27) setpoin
nt. This indicattes that the tem
mperature is d
decreasing tow
ward the
targe
et at an accep
ptable speed. Therefore,
T
no additional coo
oling is needed
d at this time.
3) The temperature is
i below the co
ontrol zone bu
ut the Rate of C
Change is gre
eater than the ((MAX
ROC
C+, #28) setpo
oint. This indic
cates that the ttemperature iss increasing tow
ward the targe
et.
Therefore, no redu
uction in coolin
ng is needed a
at this time.
This state ind
dicates that the
ere is no need
d to adjust the capacity of the
e chiller packa
age. This state
e will end
when more or
o less capacitty is required.
11.1.6.
UNIT UNL
LOADING (6
6) Only HVAC
C software
Every second a
an adjustmentt is made to th
he step
This state is entered when less capacity is required. E
delay. When
n the delay rea
aches zero, the
e counter steps wanted on
n is decreased
d by 1.
11.1.7.
UNIT UNL
LDNG-VANE
E (6) Only CE
ENT softwarre
This state is entered when less capacity is required an

nd the vanes a
are not comple
etely closed. T
The close
vane relay will
w be modulate
ed. The compressor speed w
will not be red
duced in this sttate. Control
temperature can be below the control zo
one, or in the zzone but the te
emperature is dropping too ffast.
11.1.8.
L
(7)) Only HVAC
C software
UNIT IS LOADING
y is required. Every second

d an adjustment is made to tthe step
This state is entered when more capacity
n the delay rea
aches zero, the
e counter steps wanted on is increased by 1.
delay. When
11.1.9.
UNIT IS LOADNG-VAN
L
NE (7) Only CENT softw
ware
This state is entered when more capacity

y is required (ccontrol temperature above ccontrol zone) a
and the
vanes are no
ot 100% open.. The open va
ane relay will b
be modulated. The compresssor speed will not be
changed in th
his state.
11.1.10
0. OFF-SMOKE ALARM (8)
(
This state is entered when a smoke alarrm has been detected. In the
e MCS-Config
guration file the
e Smoke
Alarm Indicator must be se
elected in the General
G
Info ssection under tthe MAG HVA
AC V8 screen. When
s trips, an error message O
OFF-SMOKE A
ALARM is gen
nerated and th
he unit state is
this sensor is
changed. In this
t state all ROs
R
except AL
LARM and OIL
L HEATER are
e turned OFF..
36
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
11.1.11
1. RUN/STOP SW OFF (9
9)
This state is entered when the run stop switch
s
is off, in
n the stop posiition. When the
e chiller is in th
his state,
the individual compressor states
s
if active
e are moved to
o the CMP IS O
OFF state thro
ough the norm
mal states.
One capacity
y STEP will be
e moved per se
econd.
11.1.12
2. SCHEDUL
LED OFF (10
0)
This state is entered when the schedule is calling for th
he package to
o be off. When
n the chiller is in this
state, the ind
dividual compre
essor states iff active are mo
oved to the CM
MP IS OFF sta
ate through the
e normal
states. One capacity
c
STEP
P will be move
ed per second..
11.1.13
3. OFF- NO FLOW
F
(11)
This state is entered when the evaporato
or flow switch is off. When th
he chiller is in this state, the
individual com
mpressor state
es if active are
e moved to the
e CMP IS OFF
F state through
h the normal sstates.
One capacity
y STEP will be
e moved per se
econd. If the N
NO FLOW setpoint is active and set to Locckout the
chiller will loc
ckout on no flo
ow.
11.1.14
4. AMBIENT
T OFF (13)
This state is entered when the ambient temperature
t
fa
alls below setp
point #24 LOW
W AMB OFF o
or is
above setpoiint #26 HIGH AMB OFF. The
T system willl remain in this state until th
he ambient tem
mperature
if low rises 5..0F (2.5C) deg
grees above th
he LOW AMB
B OFF setpoin
nt value or if high drops 5.0F
F (2.5C)
degrees belo
ow the HIGH AMB
A
OFF se
etpoint value. W
When the chille
er is in this sta
ate, the individual
compressor states
s
if active
e are moved to
o the CMP IS O
OFF state thro
ough the norm
mal staging fun
nction.
One capacity
y STEP will be
e moved per se
econd.
11.1.15
5. UNIT IS UNLOADED
U
(15)
(
This state is entered when all of the systtems available
e capacity step
ps are off. The
e package is p
providing
no cooling ca
apacity, as non
ne is required.. The system is ready to rea
act to cooling n
needs.
11.1.16
6. UNIT IS LOADED
L
(16))
This state is entered when all of the systtems available
e capacity step
ps are on and the package iis
e maximum am
mount of coolin
ng capacity.
providing the
11.1.17
7. OFF TMP--ICE MADE (17)
(
This state is entered when target temperrature has bee
en satisfied.
8. ECONOMIZER ONLY (18)
11.1.18
This state is entered when mechanical cooling
c
is off an
nd the econom
mizer has been specified in tthe MCSn setup and it is being used for cooling. Re
efer to section
n 15.43 about Economizers.
Configuration
37
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
11.1.19
9. SWITCHIN
NG MODES (19)
(
This state is entered when the unit is switching betwee
en cooling mo
ode and heating mode. Only heat
pump units or
o units with ele
ectric heat and
d a sensor inp
put selects eith
her the cooling
g or heating mo
ode will
enter this sta
ate. Select this information under the MAG
G HVAC V8 bu
utton.
0. VaneOpen
n-SpdHold (1
19) Only witth CENT Sofftware
11.1.20
This state is
s entered whe
en the control temperature is above the control zone or in the zone
e but the
control temp
perature is rising too fast but waiting forr an indication
n that the com
mpressor vane
es are
fully opened
d and it is befo
ore the comprressor speed can be increased. The co
ontrol tempera
ature is
above the co
ontrol zone.
11.1.21
1. UNIT SMO
OKE UNLDG
G (20)
This state is entered when the system is
s unloading be
ecause a smokke alarm senso
or has tripped. When
this sensor is
s on, an error message
m
OFF
F-SMOKE ALA
LARM is gene
erated and the unit state is changed.
See section 11.1.10.
2. UNIT OFF
F UNLDING (21)
(
11.1.22
This state is entered when the unit has been
b
disabled.. It will force a quick unload of the system..
3. UNIT DMD
D UNLDING (22)
11.1.23
This state is only entered when
w
the demand limiting input has been selected. The
e demand limit sensor
nder the MAG
must be sele
ected in the Ge
eneral Informa
ation section un
G HVAC V8 bu
utton and its tyype must
be 485 Dmd
d Step. This in
nput will indica
ate the maximu
um number off steps that the
e unit can run. If this
value is less than the numb
ber of steps th
hat are currenttly on, the unit will unload to meet this valu
ue.
4. UNIT HEA
AT UNLDING
G (23)
11.1.24
This state will
w be entered and will begiin unloading tthe system if it is in heating
g mode and tthe
control temp
perature is gre
eater than the
e control temp
perature setpoint plus setp
point #164 HP CTL
ZONE + an
nd the system is not already fully unload
ded.
38
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
11.1.25. UNIT UNLDNG-VFD (24) Only with CENT Software

This state is entered when it is necessary to unload a centrifugal compressor with a VFD and the
vanes are fully open. The VFD will be modulated down to minimum speed before the vane
positioning is changed.
11.1.26. UNIT LOADNG-VFD (25) Only with CENT Software
This state is entered when it is necessary to load a centrifugal compressor with a VFD and the
vanes are fully open. The vane positioning will remain the same as the VFD is modulated up to
maximum speed.
11.2. Compressor Control States (number)

All user logic points can now access the Compressor Control State. The value accessed is the number
listed in parenthesis in the following headings.
The action of the compressor control states may result in an increase or decrease in capacity. The Unit
Control States may affect or change the Compressor Control States or supersede them altogether.
11.2.1.
LOST IO LOCKED (0)
This state is entered when the Capacity Control State is NO RUN- I/O LOST. Resetting the lockout will
move the compressor to the CMP OFF/READY state.
11.2.2.
CMP LOCKED OUT (1)
This state is entered when the Capacity Control State is in UNIT IN LOCKOUT or a safety trip has
occurred for this compressor (Examples of safety setpoints include #77 LOW SUCTION and #81 HI
DISCH PSI). Lockouts can be reset without authorization from the keypad or MCS-Connect program,
however if the condition causing the lockout has not been corrected, the compressor will again be forced
into the LOCKOUT State.
11.2.3.
SWITCHED OFF (2)
This state is entered when the compressor is off due to the pump down switch being on or the
compressor flow switch being off. In this state the compressor and all related points, including the liquid
line solenoid are off. The compressor will not leave this state unless the pump down switch is turned off.
If the pump down switch is turned off, the compressor state will be changed to the CMP OFF/READY
state.
11.2.4.
UNLD and PMPDWN (3)
This state is entered when the pump down switch has been turned on or if this compressor is no longer
Wanted On. The compressor remains on while the liquid line solenoid is closed. This state is active until
the suction pressure reaches setpoint #61 PMP DWN OFF or the time has exceeded setpoint #62
PMP DWN DELY. The compressor will then move to the CMP ANTICYCE state.
11.2.5.
CMP ANTICYCE (4)
This state is entered when the UNLD and PMPDWN state has been completed. The compressor will
stay in this state with all compressor points off for the period of time contained in setpoint #59 ACYC
OFF-> ON or setpoint #63 ACYC ON -> ON, whichever is longer. The compressor will then move to
the OFF state. NOTE: ACYC ON -> ON can be used to set the maximum number of compressor starts
per hour.
39
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
11.2.6.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
CMP OFF//READY (5)
This state is entered when no capacity is

s required from
m this compresssor, or the lasst state was C
CMP
ANTICYCE, LOST I/O LOC
CKED, or SW
WITCHED OFF
F. In this state tthe compresso
or is ready to p
provide
capacity if ne
eeded. The co
ompressor will remain in this state for a min
nimum of 60 sseconds.
11.2.7.
OIL PMP LUBING

L
(6)
Screw, centrrifugal, and com

mpressors with external oil p
pumps all use this state. Thiis state is used
d to
ensure prope
er oil flow priorr to compresso
or startup. Opttions that affecct this state are
e setup in Com
mpressor
Info button under the MAG
G HVAC V8 screen and in th
he Setpoints sccreen:
t following re
elay outputs, iff they exist, arre set as follow
ws:
In this state the
1. Com
mpressor relay
y(s) are OFF.
2. Oil pump
p
is ON.
3. If su
uction group ru
unning is either 1 or 2 the ho
ot gas solenoid
d is OFF.
4. Fastt unloader is ON.
O
5. Firstt 120 seconds
s or until the un
nload switch iss ON the unloa
ader is ON elsse it is OFF.
6. Load
der is OFF.
7. VI in
ncrease and de
ecrease are OFF.
O
8. Starrt unloader is OFF.
O
9. Low
w discharge superheat relay is OFF.
10. All liquid line solen
noids are OFF
F.
11. Oil equalization
e
re
elay is ON.
12. All unloaders
u
are OFF
O if they are load type elsse they are ON
N.
13. All tu
urbo ice relays
s are off.
14. Oil heater
h
is contro
olled to mainta
ain oil tempera
ature.
All of the follo
owing conditio
ons must be met within the tiime allowed in
n setpoint #41 LUBE DELAY
Y. If the
compressor type
t
is centrifu
ugal an additio
onal 10 second
ds will be allow
wed for these cconditions to b
be met.
1. Oil differential
d
mus
st be equal to or greater tha
an the value in setpoint #40 LUBE OIL PS
SI. If this
setp
point is not actiive this test is bypassed.
2. Oil temperature must
m be equal to
t or greater th
han the calcula
ated oil tempe
erature target. If
setp
point #39 LUB
BE OIL TEMP is not active tthis test is byp
passed. If the ccompressor tyype is
centtrifugal and the
e option to use
e the saturated
d temperature
e is indicated, tthen the value of the
satu
urated tempera
ature will be ad
dded to setpoiint #39 LUBE
E OIL TEMP, e
else the value of
setp
point #39 will be
b used by itse
elf as the calcu
ulated oil temp
perature targett.
3. The compressor must
m be unload
ded. If there iss an unloaded indicator it mu
ust be on. If itt is a
centtrifugal compre
essor, it is forc
ced to stay in tthis state for m
minimum of 15 seconds. If th
he
40
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
compressor has no unloaded indicator it must stay in this state for a minimum of 10 seconds
less than setpoint #41 LUBE DELAY.
If all of these conditions are met within the allotted time, the compressor will move to another state.
If a fixed step compressor with an external oil pump the state will either be UNLOADED or
LOADED, depending if there are multiple compressor steps.
If a variable step compressor the percentage wanted on will be checked. If it is less than
setpoint #31 MIN SLIDE %, or option Use Min FLA has been selected, the percentage
wanted will be set to the value in setpoint #31 MIN SLIDE % and the state will be set to
HOLDING.
Any associated EXV will be adjusted to allow for additional capacity.
If the compressor does not meet all of the conditions it will be LOCKED OUT and an error message will
be generated indicating the reason for the failure: pressure, temperature or time.
11.2.8.
CMP UNLOADED (8)
For infinite step compressors, this state occurs when the slide is fully unloaded (indicated by unloaded
input or after the unloader is pulsed for 30 seconds with no change). For fixed step compressors, this
state occurs when the compressor is on and fully unloaded. In this state the compressor is supplying its
minimum cooling capacity.
11.2.9.
CMP UNLD STEP1 (9) Only HVAC Software
This state only applies for fixed step capacity compressors with a Hot Gas Bypass solenoid. In this state
the Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is off and all unloaders in the compressor are on.
11.2.10. CMP DECR SPEED (9) Only CENT Software
In this state the compressor speed will be decreased.
11.2.11. CMP UNLD STEP2 (10) Only HVAC Software
This state only applies for fixed step compressors with two unloaders. This state occurs when the Hot
Gas Bypass solenoid, if it exists, is off, the first unloader solenoid is off, and the second unloader
solenoid is on.
11.2.12. CMP INCR SPEED (10) Only CENT Software
In this state the compressor speed will be increased.
11.2.13. CMP IS HOLDING (11)
This state only applies for infinite step compressors. In this state, the required refrigeration capacity of
system is being met; no movement of the slide valve is required.
11.2.14. CMP IS LOADING (12) Only HVAC Software
For infinite step compressors, this state occurs when the load solenoid is being pulsed to increase the
capacity of the compressor. The duration of the pulse is specified in the setpoint #37 LOAD PULSE
and the frequency of the pulse is determined by setpoint #56 PULSE DELAY. The setpoint PULSE
DELAY should be a value of between 3 and 5 seconds to allow the amp sensor to reflect the change.
11.2.15. CMP OPEN VANES (12) Only CENT Software
In this state the vanes are being opened because more capacity is required.
41
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
11.2.16
6. CMP IS UNLDING (13
3) Only HVAC
C Software
For infinite sttep compresso
ors, this state is
i when the un
nload solenoid
d is being pulse
ed to reduce tthe
capacity of th
he compressor. The duration
n of the pulse is specified in setpoint #38 UNLOAD PU
ULSE
and the frequ
uency of the pulse is determ
mined by setpo
oint #56 PULS
SE DELAY. T
The setpoint P
PULSE
DELAY should be a value
e of between 3 and 5 second
ds to allow the
e refrigerant to
o enter the cha
amber
slowly enoug
gh to not cause
e oil foaming.
11.2.17
7. CMP CLO
OSE VANES (13)
(
Only CE
ENT Softwarre
In this state the
t vanes are being closed because
b
less ccapacity is req
quired.
11.2.18
8. CMP IS RU
UNNING (14
4)
For fixed cap
pacity compres
ssors only, this
s state occurs when the com
mpressor is fullly loaded. In th
his state,
the compress
sor is providing the maximum amount of ccooling capaciity.
11.2.19
9. FAST UNL
LOADING (15)
For screw co
ompressors on
nly, this state is
s entered whe
en the compresssor is turned on. All load ssolenoids
will be turned
d off and all un
nload solenoids will be turne
ed on to ensure
e the screw is fully unloaded
d. The
time in this sttate is set in th
he Fast Unloa
ad Delay cell u
under the Com
mpressor Info button in the M
MAG
HVAC V8 sc
creen.
11.2.20
0. LO SUCT UNLOAD (16)
Refer to setp
points #77 LO
OW SUCTION; #78 LO SUCT UNLD; an
nd #79 LO SU
UCT RELD.
For infinite sttep compresso
ors only. The capacity
c
is being unloaded d
due to low sucction pressure.. The
compressor will
w stay in this
s state until the
e suction presssure is above setpoint #79 LO SUCT RE
ELD. The
system will th
hen move to th
he LO SUCT HOLD
H
state.
11.2.21
1. LO SUCT HOLD (17)
Refer to setp
points #77 LO
OW SUCTION; #78 LO SUCT UNLD; an
nd #79 LO SU
UCT RELD.
Fixed step compressors
c
- This state is
s entered when
n a fully loaded
d compressorr that has more
e than
one step is unloading
u
due to low suction pressure. On
ne step of capa
acity is turned off. The comp
pressor
will remain in
n this state for a minimum off five minutes b
before returnin
ng to the LOAD
DED state if th
he low
suction condition has been
n corrected.
Infinite Step
p Compressorrs - Capacity is
i being held d
due to low sucction pressure. Once the sucction
pressure retu
urns to a norm
mal operating le
evel the compressor will retu
urn to its norm
mal running sta
ate.
42
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
11.2.22. HI DISC UNLOAD (18)

Refer to setpoints #81 HI DISCH PSI; #82 HI DISC UNLD; #83 HI DISC RELD; #87 HI DISCH
TMP; #88 HI DISCH UNLD; and #89 HI DISCH RELD.
For infinite step compressors only. The capacity is being unloaded due to a high discharge pressure or
high discharge temperature. The compressor will stay in this state until the pressure or temperature has
dropped below the corresponding setpoint. The system will then move to the HI DISC HOLD state.
11.2.23. HI DISC HOLD (19)
Refer to setpoints #81 HI DISCH PSI; #82 HI DISC UNLD; #83 HI DISC RELD; #87 HI DISCH
TMP; #88 HI DISCH UNLD; and #89 HI DISCH RELD.
Fixed Step Compressors - This state is entered when a fully loaded compressor that has more than
one step is unloading due to high discharge pressure or temperature. One step of capacity will be turned
off. The compressor will remain in this state for a minimum of five minutes before returning to the
LOADED state if the high discharge condition has been corrected.
Infinite Step Compressors - Capacity is being held due to high discharge temperature or pressure.
Once the discharge returns to normal operating levels the compressor will return to its normal running
state.
11.2.24. SAFETY TRIPPED (20)
This state is entered when a safety trip occurs but a lockout is not generated. An alarm is generated but
the system will automatically restart after the delay specified in the corresponding setpoint. If a second
trip occurs within the time specified in the setpoint, the compressor will be placed in the CMP LOCKED
OUT state.
11.2.25. LO TMP UNLOAD (21)
The following two conditions can cause this state to be entered and the system to begin unloading:
1) The leaving liquid temperature is within 1.5 degrees F of the setpoint #111 FREEZE
2) The refrigerant temperature is less than setpoint #155 LO REF TMP if this setpoint is active.
11.2.26. LO TMP HOLD (22)
Reload from the LO TMP UNLOAD occurs when the leaving liquid temperature is 3.0 degrees F above
setpoint #111 FREEZE and the refrigerant temperature sensor, if one exists, is greater than setpoint
#155 LO REF TMP plus twice the value of setpoint #156 LO REF TMP. Until this temperature is
reached the system will remain in the LO TMP HOLD State.
11.2.27. HI AMP HOLD (23)
Fixed step compressors - This state occrus when a fully loaded compressor experiences an
abnormally high amp draw. Refer to setpoints #171-190 for FLA per compressor (compressors 1-20
respectively) and #75 HI AMPS %. In this state, one step of capacity will be turned off. The
compressor will remain in this state for a minimum of five minutes before returning to the LOADED state
if the high amp draw condition has been corrected.
Infinite Step Compressors - This state occurs after HI AMP UNLDING. It will remain in this state for
the time specified in setpoint #101 SAFETY HOLD DELAY. If the amp draw is less than the FLA
setpoint for this compressor, it will return to the normal operating state and the compressor will be able
to load if necessary. In this state the compressor will not load but it can be unloaded if needed.
11.2.28. HI DIS TMP HLD (24)
Refer to setpoints #87 HI DISCH TMP; #88 HI DISCH UNLD; and #89 HI DISCH RELD.
43
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
This state is entered when a fully loaded compressor that has more than one step encounters a high
discharge temperature. One step of capacity will be turned off. The compressor will then remain in this
state for a minimum of five minutes before returning to the LOADED state if the high discharge
temperature has returned to normal.
11.2.29. CMP IS AT 40% (25) Only HVAC Software
For Mitsubishi Screw compressors only. This compressor does not provide infinite capacity but has two
solenoids used to regulate the compressor capacity. This state occurs when the compressor is providing
40% capacity. In this state, the relay output to activate the 40% valve is turned on.
11.2.30. SURGE SPD/VANE (25) Only CENT Software
This state is entered when the number of surges has exceeded setpoint #212 SurgingCount. The
system will take preventive action to attempt to avoid a safety trip due to excess surges. The
compressor speed will increase and the vanes closed.
11.2.31. CMP IS AT 70% (26) Only HVAC Software
solenoids used to regulate the compressor capacity. This state occurs when the compressor is providing
70% capacity. In this state, the relay output to activate the 70% valve is turned on.
11.2.32. HI WATER HOLD (27)
When the compressor is running and setpoint #86 HI RETURN TEMP is active, the system will check
for high water temperature. If the control temperature is greater than setpoint #86 for the time specified
the system will place the compressor in this state. The system will be unable to load when in this state.
11.2.33. EXTRA 70% STEP (28) Only HVAC Software
solenoids used to regulate the compressor capacity. This will move an extra step for this type of screw
compressor.
11.2.34. OFF-LO OIL TMP (29)
In this state the compressor is disabled. The oil temperature will be checked only if the compressor type
is a centrifugal or screw.
Centrifugal compressors - If the temperature is greater than the Saturated Suction Temperature plus
setpoint #39 LUBE OIL TEMP this state will be entered.
Screw compressors If the temperature is greater than the value in setpoint #39 LUBE OIL TEMP
this state will be entered.
11.2.35. HI AMP UNLDING (30)
For infinite step compressors this state is entered when the amp draw is greater than the respective FLA
setpoint plus half the value in setpoint #75, HI AMPS. This action is to prevent a high amps safety trip
from occurring. Once the amp draw has been reduced the system state will change to HI AMP HOLD.
11.2.36. DEF PREPMP OUT (31) Only HVAC Software
This state is only entered if the defrost type is any condition other than NONE. Hot gas will be used to
perform the defrosting. This is selected in Compressor Info button under the MAG HVAC V8 screen.
When a defrost cycle begins this state is entered and an alarm message is generated. The liquid line
solenoid will be closed and the compressor will remain in this state and continue running until the
suction pressure is less than setpoint #61PMP DWN OFF or the time in this state is greater than
setpoint #62 PMP DWN DELY. The compressor will then move to the DEFROSTING state.
44
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
11.2.37. DEFROSTING (32) Only HVAC Software

Refer to DEF PREPMP OUT state. In this state the hot gas solenoid is opened. The compressor will
remain in this state until both coil temperatures are greater than setpoint #161 DEF TERM TMP or the
time in this state is greater than the value in setpoint #162 DEF TERM DEL. The compressor will then
move to the DEF PUMP DOWN state.
11.2.38. DEF PUMP DOWN (33) Only HVAC Software
Refer to DEFROSTING state. In this state the hot gas solenoid is closed. The compressor will remain in
this state until the suction pressure is less than setpoint #61PMP DWN OFF or the time in this state is
greater than setpoint #62 PMP DWN DELY. The compressor will then move to the CMP IS HOLDING
state.
11.2.39. HI TEMP UNLOAD (34) Only with HVAC Software
This state is only used when in Heating Mode. The system will unload if setpoint #152 HP OVERHEAT
is active and the leaving temperature is greater than the value in setpoint #152 minus 15F (8C). The
compressor will then move to the HI TEMP HOLD state when the temperature drops below the value in
setpoint #152 minus 30F (16C).
11.2.40. HI TEMP HOLD (35) Only with HVAC Software
Refer to HI TEMP UNLOAD state. When the temperature drops below setpoint #152 minus 45F
(24C) the compressor will return to a normal state.
11.2.41. SCROLL STEP 1 (36) Only with HVAC Software
Only used with special patterns for Trane Trio and Quad compressors. These compressors provide
special staging as follows:
If Trane Trio then COMP C is on and COMP A and B are off.
If Trane Quad then COMP A is on and COMP B, C, and D are off.
If Trane Trio then COMP A and B are on and COMP C is off.
If Trane Quad then COMP C and D are on and COMP A and B are off.
If Trane Trio then COMP A, B, and C are on.
If Trane Quad then COMP B, C, and D are on and COMP A is off.
Only used with special patterns for Trane Quad compressors. These compressors provide special
staging as follows:
If Trane Quad then COMP A, B, C, and D are on.
45
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
12. Se
etpoint Definition
D
ns
12.1. Setpoin
nt elements
s that are set
s up in the
e MCS-Conffig program
m:
# (Number) - From 1 to 23
30 (maximum number of settpoints supporrted). Only active setpoints w
will be
displayed in MCS-Connect and on the keypad displayy.
Name - The setpoints nam
me consists off up to 12 charracters. The na
ame is displayyed following th
he
number on th
he LCD display. The setpoin
nt name can b
be changed to make it more meaningful to
o the
current applic
cation, however the function
n of the setpoin
nt will remain tthe same.
Value - The value or target of the setpoin
nt. With prope
er authorization
n this value ca
an be changed
d, within
limits that have been estab
blished in MCS
S-Config.
Min - The miinimum value that can be se
et. This field is not displayed
d and cannot b
be changed in MCSConnect or in
n the keypad display.
d
Max - The maximum
m
value
e that can be set.
s This field iss not displaye
ed and cannot be changed in
n MCSConnect or in
n the keypad display.
d
Adjust Value
e - The interva
al that the valu
ue field can be
e changed by. This field is no
ot displayed an
nd
cannot be ch
hanged in MCS
S-Connect or in the keypad display.
Time (Sec) this field has
s two purposes
s: 1) In either a LOCKOUT o
or ALARM type; this is the le
ength of
time the setp
point must be true
t
before it will
w trip. This tim
me is always in
n seconds and
d it is displayed on the
keypad display and MCS-C
Connect if the setpoint is eith
her a LOCKO
OUT or ALARM
M type. This fie
eld can be
changed in MCS-Connect
and through the
M
t keypad. 2)) In a non-safe
ety type setpoint this field can be
n if it is used.
used as an extra
e
timer. This will be spec
cified in the settpoint definition
Lockout Dellay Hrs. If a second safety
y occurs within
n this time, the
e unit or comprressor will be locked
out. This field
d is not display
yed and canno
ot be changed
d through MCS
S-Connect or in the keypad d
display.
Safety Down
n Time (min.) After the firs
st safety occurs the system will wait this n
number of minutes
before the un
nit or associate
ed compresso
or is allowed to
o run again.
Active or No
on-Active Only
O active setp
points will be d
displayed in M
MCS-Connect o
or on the keyp
pad
display, but only
o if the need
ded authorizattion level has b
been acheived
d.
Select Value
e: # decimals and print cha
ar This indiccates the number of decimal places and th
he unit
number of deccimal places iss crucial when
character tha
at accompanie
es the value displayed. The n
n the
Value, Minim
mum, and Maximum data is entered
e
in MC
CS-Config.
Level of Autth. To Display
y This colum
mn indicates w
what authorizattion level a use
er must have in order to
view the setp
point from MCS
S-Connect or the keypad dissplay.
Comments This column
n allows the us
ser to add com
mments about tthe function off the setpoint.
Sec. to igno
ore safety - If this
t value is no
ot zero, at com
mpressor startu
up this safety w
will be ignored
d for the
time in this fie
eld.
Window to extend
e
Safety
y Time (Sec) If this value iis not zero, at compressor sstartup the norrmal
Safety Time will be increas
sed by the valu
ue in Safety Time Extension
n field for the tiime specified in this
field.
Safety Time
e Extension (S
Sec) This is the value that will be added to the Safety Time during th
he
Window to ex
xtend Safety Time
T
period.
12.2. Setpoin
nt Types
There are thrree different ty
ypes of setpoin
nts. The Magn
num software d
determines if a setpoint conttains a
target value or
o is a safety. If it is a safety then its type d
determines wh
hat action the system will takke when
the safety oc
ccurs (either lo
ocking out the unit
u or genera
ating an alarm only).
46
12.2.1.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
SETPOINT
This type of setpoint contains a target or provides information for some action. The time element in this
type can be used for an additional counter if specified. This time is displayed and can be changed
through MCS-Connect, MCS-Config or from the keypad display.
12.2.2.
LOCKOUT
This type of setpoint contains a safety value and the time that the safety must be violated before the
safety will trip. Once a safety has tripped the system will take the appropriate action, shutting down the
entire package or an individual compressor depending on the purpose of the safety. The system will
then wait the Safety Down Time contained in that setpoint before trying to return the normal. If
successful, the system will continue to operate. If a second trip occurs on the same setpoint with in the
Lock Out Delay Time that is contained in that setpoint the system will move to a LOCKOUT state. If the
lockout delay time is set to zero the lockout will occur on the first trip. This requires manual
intervention to reset the system. With each safety trip, the system will generate an alarm; refer to section
16 Magnum Alarms and Safeties.
The Safety Down Time and the Lock Out Delay Time are unique for each setpoint. They cannot be
viewed or adjusted in a live unit; only through MCS-Config.
12.2.3.
ALARM
This type of setpoint has two uses:

1) When it is used as a safety, it will be similar to the LOCKOUT setpoint except it will never cause a
lock out. The system will continue to try returning to normal operation after waiting the safety down time.
An ALARM setpoint type will never require manual intervention to reset the system.
2) When the setpoint is being used as a second timer it will be available to change in a live unit. If the
type is not changed to ALARM then the time field cannot be viewed or changed from a live unit.
47
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
13. Setpoints for Magnum HVAC and CENT V8 Software

If any setpoint is only active in HVAC or CENT software it will be indicated with (Only HVAC) or (Only CENT).
Name
CTL TARGET
2
3
4
CTL ZONE +
CTL ZONE HGS TEMP ON
HGS TEMP OFF
HGS PSI ON
HGS PSI OFF
L.INJECT.ON
SPRHT TARGET
or
LEVEL TARGET
10
SPRHT ZONE +-
11
12
EXV LOAD ADJ

EXV FINE ADJ
Description
Control target. This value is used as the base to develop the Control Zone. Refer to
setpoints # 2 and #3.
The control target is used with the control zone and rate of change of the controlling
sensor to determine required action for the system. The controlling sensor is usually
one of the following:
Leaving Temperature Most common used as a target, fitting for most applications.
Return Temperature Used in sites with large air masses, ice rinks, common areas, etc.
Suction Pressure Used in continuously running process systems.
Added to the CTL TARGET to create the upper limit of the control zone.
Subtracted from the CTL TARGET to create the lower limit of the control zone.
This setpoint is used with screw compressors with a hot gas bypass solenoid. When this
setpoint is active and the control temperature is less than the CTL TARGET plus the
value in this setpoint and the FLA % is within 25% of setpoint #31 MIN SLIDE%,
the hot gas bypass solenoid for the compressor will be turned on.
Safety Time Field: If this field is not zero, it is added to setpoint #31 to determine when
the hot gas solenoid is to be turned on. If zero, then the value of 2.5 is added.
setpoint is active and the control temperature is greater than the CTL TARGET plus
the value in this setpoint or the FLA % is not within 25% of setpoint #31 MIN
SLIDE%, the hot gas bypass solenoid for the compressor will be turned off.
Safety Time Field: If this field is not zero, it is added to setpoint #31 to determine when
the hot gas solenoid is to be turned off. If zero, then the value of 3.0 is added.
setpoint is active and the suction pressure is less than the value of this setpoint and
the FLA % is within 25% of the setpoint #31 MIN SLIDE%, the hot gas bypass
solenoid for the compressor will be turned on.
setpoint is active and the suction pressure is greater than the value of this setpoint or
the FLA % is not within 25% of the setpoint #31 MIN SLIDE%, the hot gas bypass
solenoid for the compressor will be turned off.
This setpoint can be used for both liquid injection solenoids.
Value: Liquid injection is turned on when the discharge temperature is greater than or
equal to this setpoint, and is turned off when the discharge temperature is less than
this setpoint minus 10.0F (5.5C).
Safety Time Field: If the first liquid injection solenoid has been on for a time greater than
this value, then turn on the second liquid injection solenoid.
If EXV control is based upon superheat, this is the Superheat target that the system will
control from.
If EXV control is based upon refrigerant level, this is the refrigerant level target that the
system will control from.
Safety Time Field: Time interval when developing superheat sample index.
The value in this setpoint is added and subtracted to setpoint #9 to determine the upper
and lower limits of the control zone respectively.
Safety Time Field: If non-zero, skip ROC adjustment logic in the control zone.
This EXV adjustment is made in response to a load or unload slide adjustment.
The adjustment is made when in the 1st zone above or below the control zone.
48
#
13
Name
EXV COURSE
14
EXV LOAD DIV
15
EXV MIN %
16
EXV MAX %
17
LO SUPERHEAT
18
LOWSUCPSI DLY
19
EXV DELAY
20
EXV STRT TIME
21
MAX TRG RESET
22
LOW AMBIENT
23
POWERUP DELAY
24
HI AMBIENT
25
STEP SENSTIY
26
STEP DELAY
27
MAX ROC -
28
MAX ROC +
29
ROC INTERV
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
This adjustment is made when in the 2nd zone above or below the control zone and the
adjustments are made in 1/2 the time. When above or below the 2nd control zone the
adjustments are made in 1/4 the time.
As the Amp draw % changes this divides the EXV % change. It is calculated as follows:
[(Max slide% min slide%) / (Max vlv% - min vlv%)] +1
This is the minimum valve position allowed when modulating the expansion valve. This
value should be set so when hot gas is applied the valve opening is adequate.
This is the maximum position allowed when modulating the expansion valve to maintain
the superheat target. This value should be the valve % opening at full capacity plus a
10 to 15 % margin.
If the calculated superheat remains below this value for the time specified, the system
will generate a LOW SUPERHEAT alarm.
Delay in seconds when in Low Suction PSI Opening between adjustments to the EXV
valve.
Delay in seconds between valve adjustments. Should not be less than 48. (When
adjusting at 4x this will allow 12 seconds for the controller to process the results of
the last action before making the next adjustment)
This is the time in seconds to hold the valve at the start % setpoint when the compressor
starts. Since the superheat calculation is not valid when the compressor is not
running the EXV logic sets the valve to a given position for a set time to allow the
system to develop a valid superheat.
Safety Time Field: If zero, then there is no delay when a compressor is ready to start. If
non-zero, this is the time delay before the EXV valve is allowed to open.
This value is used to adjust setpoint #1 CTL TARGET. The sensor input value will vary
between 0 and 5 volts and the adjustment to the control target will be modulated
from negative MAX TRG RESET to the positive MAX TRG RESET value.
If the ambient temperature is below this value the system will be disabled and the unit
state will be AMBIENT OFF. The unit will remain off until the ambient temperature
rises above this setpoint value by 5.0F (2.5C).
The time in seconds that the system will remain in the START UP state before moving to
the next state.
If the ambient temperature is above this value the system will be disabled and the unit
state will be AMBIENT OFF. The unit will remain off until the ambient temperature
drops below this setpoint value by 5.0F (2.5C).
This value is used to adjust the rate of response to changes in the control algorithm. 1 is
the fastest response, whereas higher numbers will mean a more gradual response.
Used only with the Magnum Control Zone control method.
Value: This is the time delay before making adjustments to the system capacity. Used
only with the Magnum Control Zone control method.
Safety Time Field: If used, this will force a minimum time delay between any two
compressor starts. This time delay is specified in the Minimum Delay Between
Compressor Starts box in the Compressor Info section under the MAG HVAC V8
tab.
Maximum negative Rate of Change allowed before preventing the unit from loading. If
the ROC is less than this value the capacity control state is set to HOLDING. Used
only with the Magnum Control Zone control method.
Maximum positive Rate of Change allowed before preventing the unit from unloading. If
the ROC is greater than this value the capacity control state is set to HOLDING.
Used only with the Magnum Control Zone control method.
Seconds between samples used for calculating the Rate of Change. Used only with the
magnum Control Zone control method. (Maximum 60 seconds)
49
#
30
Name
MAX FLA %
or
MAX VFD %
31
MIN FLA %
or
MIN VFD %
32
MAX ADJUST %
33
MIN ADJUST %
34
SLIDE SENSITY
35
AMP DB HI
36
AMP DB LO
37
LOAD PULSE
38
UNLOAD PULSE
39
LUBE OIL TMP
40
41
LUBE OIL PSI

LUBE DELAY
42
HI WATER TMP
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
Indicates the maximum amp draw or speed allowed. Usually set to 100%, else
compressors will load to the value of this setpoint until all steps are on, then the
system will load to 100%.
Safety Time Field: If non-zero, then force individual compressors to stay at maximum
capacity when another compressor starts. This option is selected in in the Keep
Running Comp at 100% when starting next? box in the Compressor Info section
under the MAG HVAC V8 tab.
Value: Indicates the minimum amp draw or speed allowed (usually 40%). This is where
the slide valve or VFD will be set when the compressor is turned on. This % is a
function of actual amp draw relative to the FLA.
Safety Time Field: If used, this forces a time delay before unloading all running
compressors before the next compressor is started. This time delay is specified in
the Unload Compressor Before Starting Next box in the Compressor Info section
Indicates the maximum percentage change that can be made to the slide valve or VFD.
Safety Time Field: A zero indicates that the calculated FLA will be used, else the value in
setpoint #31 will be used when starting the next compressor. This value is specified
in the Wanted FLA starting next Compressor box in the Compressor Info section
Indicates the minimum percentage change that can be made to the slide valve or the
VFD.
This controls the sensitivity of the adjustment made to the Wanted Percentage
(adjustments are relative to the difference between the current control sensor and
target). The larger the value the larger the adjustment (usually 1).
Used only with screw compressors. This value is the upper dead band limit of the FLA. If
the amps are within the dead band, the slide valve will not be moved.
Used only with screw compressors. This value is the lower dead band limit of the FLA. If
the amps are within the dead band, the slide valve will not be moved.
Length of time to engage the slide valve load solenoid in tenths of a second (usually
between 1 and 9).
Length of time to engage the slide valve unload solenoid in tenths of a second (usually
between 1 and 9).
The oil must reach this temperature before the system will move out of the LUBE state. If
the oil temperature is below this value before the compressor begins its startup
sequence, the circuit will be placed in the OFF-LO OIL TMP state.
Safety Time Field: If in LUBE state, the compressor type is centrifugal, and this field is
equal to 0 then the calculated oil temperature shut down is the saturated suction
temperature plus the value of this setpoint, else it is simply the value of this setpoint.
This option is selected in in the Lube State Oil Setpoint box in the Compressor Info
section under the MAG HVAC V8 tab.
The oil must reach this pressure before the circuit will move out of the LUBE state.
This is the maximum time that a compressor can be in the LUBE state. When this time is
exceeded, an alarm is generated and the compressor is locked out. Both the oil
temperature and pressure must be satisfied before the LUBE state will be exited.
Refer to the OIL PMP LUBING state.
If active, the control sensors value will be compared to the value of this setpoint. If it
exceeds this temperature for the time specified in the Safety Time Field a HI
WATER TMP alarm will be generated. No lockouts will occur. This alarm will repeat
if the control value drops .5 below this setpoint and then rises above it again.
Safety Time Field: Length of time until safety trip occurs.
50
#
43
Name
CENT P-DWN FLA
44
CENT P-DWN TMR
45
CND STG1 ON
(Air cooled)
46
CND STG1 OFF

(Air cooled)
CND DIFF ON
(Air cooled)
CND DIFF OFF
(Air cooled)
CND DELAY
(Water cooled)
DUAL PSI DELTA
(Dual V8)
CND MIN RUN
(Air cooled)
DUAL TIME DELAY
(Dual V8)
CND MIN RUN
(Air cooled)
CND VLV START
(Water cooled)
47
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
50
51
51
CND VLV TARG

(Water cooled)
CND VLV DIV
(Water cooled)
CND VFD MIN
52
CND VLV MIN

(Water cooled)
53
CND VLV ROC(Water cooled)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
If active and the compressor type is centrifugal, this value will be multiplied times the FLA
setpoint for that compressor and used when the compressor is in the pump down
state. If the setpoint is inactive then the FLA setpoint for that compressor will be
used.
If the compressor type is centrifugal, this will be the maximum time allowed in the pump
down state. NOTE: This value is used whether the setpoint is active or inactive.
When the discharge pressure is above this value, turn on the first stage of the condenser
fans.
Safety Time Field: (Applies to compressors with shared condensers) If non-zero, then
the compressor in startup state will not be in sole control of the condenser fans, it will
control off of highest discharge pressure. If zero, then compressor in startup will
have sole condenser control for 5 minutes. This option is selected in in the Newly
started Comp Controls Common Fan Bank box in the Condenser Info section
If stage 1 of condenser capacity is on and the discharge pressure drops below this value,
then turn this stage off.
Differential pressure added to setpoint #45 to set the threshold at which each additional
stage of condenser capacity will turn on.
Differential pressure added to setpoint #46 to set the threshold at which each additional
stage of condenser capacity will turn off.
If active, this is the time in seconds between adjustments to the water valve. If inactive,
then 30 seconds will be used as the delay.
Difference in pressure before stage 2 can be entered.
Once a condenser fan stage has been turned on; it will remain on for at least the amount
of minutes specified in this setpoint.
Time delay once the pressure difference as been reached before stage 2 can be
entered.
Once a condenser fan stage has been turned on; it will remain on for at least the amount
of minutes specified in this setpoint.
If the valve opening is less than setpoint 52 and this setpoint is active; make the valve
opening equal to this setpoint. This enables minimum opening to be set at larger
opening percentage.
Target discharge pressure to maintain by integration and Rate of Change logic.
Usually 1. Allows scaling of the amount the valve is adjusted. The larger the number the
smaller the valve adjustment as the adjustment will be divided by this value.
If there is a VFD associated with the condenser, this is the starting and the minimum
speed.
Safety Time Field: This field contains the condenser stage that must be on before the
VFD is modulated.
Minimum valve opening percentage allowed.
If the compressor is off then check the Safety Time Field:
= 0, then set the VFD to the value of this setpoint;
= 2 and the run/stop is run, then set the VFD to 100%;
else set the VFD to 0%. Set up in the Compressor Information under the MAG
HVAC V8 button option Default Valve Opening % when Comp is off.
Maximum negative discharge pressure Rate of Change allowed. If the actual rate of
change is less than this setpoint then stop opening the valve. The absolute value of
this setpoint also severs as the maximum positive rate of change allowed. If the
actual rate of changes is greater than the absolute value of this setpoint then stop
closing the valve.
51
#
54
56
Name
CND MIN SPD
(Air cooled)
CND VLV MULT
(Water cooled)
CND MAX SPD
(Air cooled)
PULSE DELAY
57
LO AMB PROC
58
CFG TESTING
59
ACYC OFF->ON
60
MITSI P-DWN
CUTIN
61
PMP DWN OFF
62
PMP DWN DELY
63
ACYC ON->ON
64
COMP MIN RUN
65
EXV ZONE1
66
EXV ZONE2
67
EXV ROC ZONE
68
EXV ROC ZONE1
54
55
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
Minimum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
Allows scaling of the amount the valve is adjusted. The larger the number the larger the
valve adjustment as the adjustment will be multiplied by this value.
Maximum speed percentage for variable speed condenser control.
Both the value and safety time fields can be used.
Value: Used with infinite capacity screws. The number of seconds between load or
unload pulses. (Should be between 3 and 5. Allows load change to be checked
before next pulse. Eliminates oil foaming when unloading too fast.)
Safety Time Field: If used, this is the fast unloading state time delay (previous was a
fixed value now it is adjustable). Set up in the Compressor Information under the
MAG HVAC V8 button option Fast Unload Delay.
When this setpoint is active and there is a process pump, when the ambient temperature
is less than the value of this setpoint the process pump will be turned on. The
process pump will be turned off when the ambient temperature is greater than the
value of this setpoint 5.0 degrees Fahrenheit.
This MUST be setup as Not Used or be set to 1, in a configuration running in the field,
or the micro will not stop when an I/O communications signal is lost. This setpoint
should NOT be active in a live unit.
This is the anti-cycle time delay (in seconds) based on when the compressor was turned
off. This value is used in a calculation to determine how long a compressor should
be in the anti-cycle state. Refer to the Standard Control Options section,
Compressor Anti-Cycle Logic. (OFF to ON)
If the compressor type is Mitsubishi and a compressor is being unload, if the suction
pressure is greater than this setpoint; the compressor state will be forced to pump
down. NOTE this value is used whether the setpoint is active or inactive.
This is the suction pressure value for turning off the compressor when in the PUMP
DOWN or PRE-PUMP down state.
Safety Time Field: If this test is non-zero the system will bypass the pre-pump down
state.
Maximum time delay (in seconds) that a compressor can remain in the PUMP DOWN
state.
This is the anti-cycle time delay (in seconds) based on when the compressor was turned
on. This value is used in a calculation to determine how long a compressor should
be in the anti-cycle state. Refer to the Standard Control Options section,
Compressor Anti-Cycle Logic. (ON to ON)
This is the minimum run time (in minutes) for a compressor once it is turned on. This
minimum run time is bypass only for the safeties.
Temperature differential that is used to build the EXV Zone 1 both plus and minus.
Previously was hard coded as 2 times the value of setpoint #10, SPRHT ZONE +-.
Temperature differential that is used to build the EXV Zone 2 both plus and minus.
Previously was hard coded as 3 times the value of setpoint #10, SPRHT ZONE +-.
Note temperature above this zone is considered in zone 3.
The EXV control logic will compare the value of this setpoint to the temperature rate of
change to determine the valve adjustment when the temperature is within the EXV
control zone. Previously was hard coded as 0.
change to determine the valve adjustment when the temperature is within the zone
1. Previously was hard coded as 0.4.
Safety Time Field: This is the minimum time delay between EXV adjustments in zone 1.
If inactive then the minimum time is set to 15 seconds.
52
#
69
Name
EXV ROC ZONE2
70
EXV ROC ZONE3
71
EXV TOO FAST
72
EXV CHANGING
73
STARTER DLAY
74
OIL PUMP OFF
75
HI AMPS
76
LO AMPS
77
LOW SUCTION
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
Safety Time Field: This is the minimum time delay between EXV adjustments in zone 2.
If inactive then the minimum time is set to 15 seconds.
Safety Time Field: The minimum time delay between EXV adjustments in zone 3. If
inactive then the minimum time is set to 15 seconds.
When the superheat is with the control zone, the EXV control logic will compare the
value of this setpoint to the temperature rate of change to determine the valve
adjustment when the temperature is within the zone and rising too fast. Previously
was hard coded as 1.0
Safety Time Field: The minimum time delay between EXV adjustments if the rate of
change is too rapid in zones 1 and 2. If inactive then minimum time is set to 15
seconds.
When the superheat is with the control zone, the EXV control logic will compare the
value of this setpoint to the temperature rate of change to determine the valve
adjustment when the temperature is within the zone and rising. Previously was hard
coded as 3.0
This setpoint controls the timing of turning on the compressors second relay.
If the # of decimal and print char cell is set to HUMD or % then logic is:
If the slide % is less than the value of this setpoint and the first relay has been on for
2 seconds or it has been on longer than the value in the safety time of this
setpoint turn on the second relay. Else it is off.
Else this set contains a time delay (in seconds) between the first and second relay being
turned on. Used for part wind (typical value of 1) and star delta (typical value of 5)
starter.
If oil pump is always on (specified in the MCS-Config program), this setpoint is not used.
If oil pump is not always on then this setpoint contains the PSI value when the oil
pump is to be turned off.
This setpoint is a percentage of the FLA; it is used to create the high amp draw limit.
Depending on the compressor that is being tested: the value of this setpoint is
multiplied by either the value in setpoints 171 through 190 to obtain the
compressors high limit. This value is tested in the high amp safety, if the amps
exceed this value for the time specified in this setpoint the safety is tripped.
This setpoint is a percentage of the FLA; it is used to create the low amp draw limit.
Depending on the compressor that is being tested: the value of this setpoint is
multiplied by either the value in setpoints 171 through 190 to obtain the
compressors low limit. This value is tested in the low amp draw safety, if the amps
are below this value for the time specified in this setpoint the safety is tripped.
If active, the system checks for low suction pressure for each running compressor. The
system will compare the suction pressure sensor reading to this value. It must be
less than the value for the period of time specified in the setpoint before this setpoint
will trip. This also indicates a freeze condition.
Digital or analog Refers to Suction Pressure column under Compressor SI
53
#
78
Name
LO SUCT UNLD
79
80
LOW SUCT RELD

UNSAFE SUCT
81
HI DISCH PSI
82
HI DISC UNLD
83
84
HI DISC RELD
LO DISC SHEAT
85
LO DISC PSI
86
HI RETURN TEMP
87
HI DISCH TMP
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
The purpose of this setpoint is to take corrective action before a low suction pressure
safety occurs. If a compressor has more than one step and it is fully loaded and if the
suction pressure is less than the value of the safety setpoint (LOW SUCTION) plus
the value of this setpoint, the system will turn off one step of capacity. An infinite step
compressor will be forced to unload until the suction pressure rise above the
calculated value. The compressor state will be changed to LO SUCT HOLD. The
compressor will remain in this state for a minimum of the time in the safety time field.
At that time, if the suction pressure has increased to a level greater than the value of
setpoint LOW SUCTION plus the value of setpoint LOW SUCT RELD the
compressor will return to normal control.
Safety Time Field: Low suction unload timer.
See setpoint 78 description
If active, the system checks for low suction pressure that is in an unsafe condition for
each running compressor. The system will compare the suction pressure sensor
reading to this value. It must be less than the value for the period of time specified in
the setpoint before this setpoint will trip. Note the time period specified should be
very short, 2-5 seconds. This safety setpoint trips the compressor to the LOCKOUT
state immediately, no retry.
If active, the system checks for high discharge pressure condition for each running
compressor. The system will compare the discharge pressure sensor reading to this
value. It must be greater for the period of time specified in the setpoint before this
safety will trip.
Digital or analog Refers to Discharge Pressure column under Compressor SI
The purpose of this setpoint is to take corrective action before a high discharge pressure
safety occurs. If a compressor has more than one step and it is fully loaded and its
discharge pressure exceeds the value of the safety setpoint HI DISCH PSI (setpoint
81) minus this setpoint, the system will turn off one step of capacity. A screw
compressor will be forced to unload until the discharge pressure falls below the
calculated value. The compressor state will be changed to HI DISC HLD. The
compressor will remain in this state for a minimum of 5 minutes. At that time if the
discharge pressure has dropped below the value of the HI DISCH PSI minus the HI
DISC RELD (setpoint 83) the compressor will return to normal control.
This setpoint works in conjunction with setpoint 82. Refer to that setpoints description.
This setpoint contains the value that indicates a low discharge SUPERHEAT condition. If
the calculated discharge SUPERHEAT is less than this value, the low discharge
SUPERHEAT timer will be set to 120 seconds. This will keep the low discharge
SUPERHEAT RO on for that period of time. (This can be used as a warning only or
the user may wire through the low discharge superheat relay to solve the problem.)
Safety Time Field: This field is used to determine how long to stay in an unloading state
or to change the superheat target.
If active, the system checks for low discharge pressure. The system will compare the
sensor reading to this value. It must be less than the value for the period of time
specified in the setpoint before a safety trip occurs.
If active the system will check for high temperature of the entering liquid. If this
temperature is greater than the value in this setpoint, the system will move the
compressors state to HI WATER HOLD. This is similar to other holding states.
If active, the system checks for high discharge temperature condition for each
compressor that has at least one step on. The system will compare the discharge
temperature sensor reading to this value. It must be greater for the period of time
specified in the setpoint before this safety will trip.
Digital or analog Refers to Suction Temperature column under Compressor SI
54
#
88
Name
HDISCT UNLD
89
90
HDISC T RELD
COND FAULT
91
LOW OIL DIF
92
UNSAFE OIL
93
HI OIL SEAL
94
HI OIL TEMP
95
MOTOR FAULT
96
NO CMP PROOF
97
DIRTY FILTER
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
The purpose of this setpoint is to take corrective action before a high discharge
temperature safety occurs. If a compressor has more than one step and it is fully
loaded and its discharge temperature exceeds the value of the safety setpoint HI
DISCH TMP (setpoint 87) minus this setpoint, the system will turn off one step of
capacity. A screw compressor will be force to unload until the discharge temperature
falls below the calculated value. The compressor state will be changed to HI DISC
HLD. The compressor will remain in this state for a minimum of 5 minutes. At that
time if the discharge temperature has dropped below the value of the HI DISCH
TMP minus the HI DISC RELD (setpoint 89) the compressor will return to normal
control.
This setpoint works in conjunction with setpoint 88. Refer to that setpoints description.
This setpoint is used to determine the action when a system has condensers with fault
indicators and one indicates a fault.
If this setpoint is active and a condenser fault occurs, a setpoint alarm message will be
generated. If this setpoint type is LOCKOUT then all of the compressors associated
with this fault will be locked off.
Or
Time in seconds for the delay before the bypass can be used when a fault has occurred
for a condenser type of Common VFD Fan w/Bypass.
Safety Time Field: Contains the time that the fault must be on.
If active, the system checks for low differential oil pressure. The system will compare the
calculated differential oil pressure to this value. It must be less than the value for the
period of time specified in the setpoint before the safety will trip.
Digital or analog Refers to Oil Pressure column under Compressor SI
If active, the system checks for low differential oil pressure. The system will compare the
calculated differential oil pressure to this value. It must be less than the value for the
period of time specified in the setpoint before the safety will trip. The time delay for
this setpoint should be very short 2-5 seconds. This safety trips to a lockout no
retries are attempted. Manual intervention is required.
Only used with a screw or centrifugal compressor. If the oil seal / or oil cooler
temperature exceeds the value of this setpoint the system for the time specified, this
safety will trip.
If active, the system checks for high oil temperature. The system will compare the oil
temperature sensor reading to this value. It must be ON or greater for the period of
time specified in the setpoint before this setpoint will trip. The sensor can be either
an analog or digital input.
Digital or analog Refers to Oil Temp column under Compressor SI
If active, the system checks for high motor temperature. This can be either a digital input
or an analog input; the system will compare the sensor reading to this value. It must
be ON or greater for the period of time specified in the setpoint before this setpoint
will trip.
Digital or analog Refers to Motor Temp column under Compressor SI
If this setpoint is active and there is a digital input indicated for compressor proof, when
the compressor is on, the compressor proof will be checked for that compressor.
Only used for screw compressors. If the discharge pressure minus the oil filter pressure
is greater than this value for the time specified a safety trip would occur.
55
#
98
Name
LLS#2 ON
99
LLS#3 ON
100
HIGH SUMP TEMP
101
SAFETY HOLD
DELAY
102
PUMP FREEZE
PROTECTION
103
LEAD COMP
104
COMP ROTATION
105
PUMP FAILURE
(NO FLOW)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
The value, safety time and delay between trips fields can be used.
This setpoint is used to control a 2nd liquid line solenoid.
Value: When the chiller capacity wanted is greater than this value for number of seconds
contained in the Safety Time Field the 2nd liquid line solenoid will open. When the
compressor capacity is below the value in Delay Between Trips Field the value will
be turned off.
Safety Time Field: This field contains a forced delay before the solenoid will be turned
on. If it is zero then there will be no delay.
Delay Between Trips Field: This field contains the cut off offset for turning this solenoid
off. If it is zero then an offset of 20 will be used.
The value, safety time and delay between trips fields can be used.
This setpoint is used to control a 3nd liquid line solenoid.
Value: When the chiller capacity wanted is greater than this value for number of seconds
contained in the Safety Time Field the 3nd liquid line solenoid will open. When the
compressor capacity is below the value in Delay Between Trips Field the value will
be turned off.
Safety Time Field: This field contains a forced delay before the solenoid will be turned
on. If it is zero then there will be no delay.
Delay Between Trips Field: This field contains the cut off offset for turning this solenoid
off. If it is zero then an offset of 20 will be used.
If this setpoint is active and there is a sump temperature sensor, then if the sump
temperature is above the value of this setpoint for the time specified in this setpoint a
HIGH SUMP TEMP alarm is generated and the unit is locked out.
Safety Time Field: Time that the condition must true.
Time in seconds that the state of the compressor will remain in holding after the condition
that caused the holding state has returned to normal before the state of the
compressor is changed. Purpose is to avoid a safety condition whenever possible.
The compressor state can be in holding for the following reasons:
- Low leaving temperature,
- Low suction pressure,
- High discharge pressure or temperature, or
- High ampere.
If this setpoint is active and the leaving temperature sensor is below the value of this
setpoint a pump will be forced on for freeze protection. The leaving temperature
must rise above this setpoint plus the value of setpoint #192.
Enables the user to specify the lead compressor. If a value is less than the maximum
number of compressor the lead indicator is set to this value. If the value is zero then
auto rotation is enabled.
Specifies the number of days between rotations (setpoint #103 must be set to zero to
enable auto rotation). If the value is zero then rotation will occur with every capacity
cycle.
If active and flow is lost and only one pump is present the system will move to a LOCK
OUT state. If the system has two pumps and flow is lost the backup pump will start
and the lead pump will be locked out. If the second pump is running and flow is lost
then the entire system will be locked out. A lock out reset will be required to restart
the system or to reactive a locked out pump.
If inactive and the flow is lost, the system will move to the OFF- NO EVAP FLOW state.
When flow is returned the system will automatically restart, no reset is required.
This setpoint had been referred to as the NO FLOW.
56
#
106
Name
LEAD PUMP
107
EcoDelayMech
108
PUMP DELAY
109
HiRefLevel
110
LoRefLvlTarg
111
FREEZE
112
NO STOP
113
OIL INJ TEMP DIFF
114
OIL TEMP DIFF
115
EcoVFDfanDely
119
EcoOffsetON
120
Eco Stg Dely
120
H-PMP SW TIME
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
Indicates whether the rotation option is active or which pump is the lead pump. If the
value is zero, then rotation of the pumps will occur whenever the lead pump is turned
off. If no rotation has occurred during the current day, a forced rotation at midnight
will occur. This forces at least one rotation per day. Else if value is non-zero, then
rotation of the pumps is inactive and the value will specify the lead pump. This
setpoint can be changed in a live unit and the appropriate action will be taken.
Value in seconds is the delay after the economizer is fully loaded, valve opened to its
maximum and all associated fans are on, before the mechanical cooling is enabled. .
If this setpoint is inactive then the value of setpoint #125 will be used for this delay.
Time delay in seconds to keep the chilled water pump running after the last compressor
has been turned off. This will help insure that a chiller barrel does not freeze up.
This setpoint has two functions.
If active, the system checks for high refrigeration level. The system will compare the
sensor reading of the refrigeration level sensor to this value. It must be greater than
the value for the period of time specified in the setpoint before a safety trip occurs.
If active, and the system has EXV valve control is based upon the refrigerant level, if the
level for a compressor is greater than this value the EXV valve adjustment will be set
to the value in setpoint #13, EXV COURSE, times 3.
If the low super heat safety timer has reached one third of the safety time in setpoint #84,
LO DiscSPRHT and it is active then setpoint #9, REF LVL TARG value will be set to
the value of this setpoint,
If active, the system checks for freeze protection. The system will compare the chilled
water out temperature to this value. It must be less than the value for the period of
time specified in the setpoint before this safety will trip.
This setpoint is used to insure that a compressor is actually off when the system has
called for it to be off. The value of the setpoint contains a percentage of the FLA
COMP setpoints 65-72. If the compressor ampere is greater than this percentage of
the FLA setpoint for the period specified the compressor is still running and the entire
unit is locked out and a NO STOP alarm is generated. If a Control power relay is
setup then it will be turned off when this safety trips.
Safety Time Field: Contains the time.
This is a temperature differential that is used to control the oil injection relay. It was
previous set to 10.0F.
This is a temperature differential and it used in controlling the oil heater and second liquid
line solenoid if they exist. It was previous set to 5.0F.
If the fluid cooler has a condenser VFD fan associated with it, this setpoint will be the
time delay in seconds between adjustments to the VFD. If this setpoint is inactive
then the value of setpoint #124 will be used for this delay timer.
Temperature off set used to determine if the economizer function could be started. The
ambient temperature must be less than target temperature minus the value of this
setpoint. For example if the target is 45.0F and this value is 10.0F then the ambient
temperature must be less than 35.0F to enable the economizer to begin.
Once the economizer valve has been opened to its maximum and all fans associated
only with the economizer if any have been turned on; the economizer function will
wait this time, expressed in seconds, before the first condenser fan is turned on or if
a VFD it will be set to its minimum position. The minimum setting of the VFD is the
value of setpoint #54.
Value contains the time delay between switching between heating and cooling modes for
heat pumps.
57
#
121
Name
Eco MIN VLV%
122
Eco MAX VLV%
123
Eco MAX ADJ
124
125
EcoVlvAdjDly
Eco StageDly
126
Eco MULTI
127
Eco DIVIDE
128
Lost Leg Alm

(Only HVAC)
128
CmpMinSpeed%
(Only CENT)
129
RH CUTIN
(Only HVAC)
CmpMaxSpeed%
(Only CENT)
RH CUTOUT ADJ
(Only HVAC)
CmpSpdUnld%
(Only CENT)
129
130
130
131
131
132
132
133
133
134
135
136
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
Economizer minimum Analog Output valve %. When the economizer function begins the
valve is opened to this value. When closing the valve this will be the minimum
setting. This setpoint must be active to indicate that the Economizer AO option is
active.
Economizer maximum Analog Output valve %. This is the maximum that the valve can
be opened.
Economizer maximum adjustment to the Analog Output valve % with each calculation.
Example: {abs(Target current) * Multiplier} / Divisor
Economizer delay between output valve adjustments.
Time delay once the valve has been opened to its maximum and turning on the
associated condenser fans.
Economizer multiplier to scale adjustment to Analog Output valve %. The difference
between the control temperature and its target will be multiplied by this value.
Economizer divisor to scale adjustment Analog Output valve %. The difference between
the control temperature and its target will be divided by this value.
If active, check for lost leg on split winding. Added check to handle part winding. CT
will be placed on only one of the legs. The CT type must be X 2 to force a
multiple by 2. If the leg with the CT is lost a low amp alarm will be generated. If
the CT is drawing more than the wanted FLA times the value of this setpoint for
safety time generate an alarm
This is the minimum speed that the compressor can run. In a live unit this setpoint will be
varied based upon the compressor speed range (#129 - #128) divided by the lift
temperature range (#133 - #132) times how far the saturated temperature is from the
minimum lift temperature (#132). This value will never be allowed to be less than its
original value.
Used with the Hot Gas Reheat option. If the reheat sensor input temperature is less
than this value the hot gas reheat function will be activated.
This is the maximum speed that the compressor can run.
Reheat cutout temperature is developed by adding this value to setpoint #129
This is the amount by which the speed of the compressor is to be decreased when less
capacity is needed. Compressor state will be CMP DECR SPEED.
RH START DLY
(Only HVAC)
CmpSpdLoad%
(Only CENT)
Delay in seconds that the hot gas reheat function will remain in a startup mode.
RH BLEED DLY
(Only HVAC)
MinLiftTemp
(Only CENT)
RH STAGE DLY
(Only HVAC)
MaxLiftTemp
(Only CENT)
BARREL HEATER
REFRIG LEAK
VI PULSE
Delay in seconds that the hot gas reheat function will keep the bleed solenoid on before
exiting the reheat mode.
This is the minimum lift temperature. Refer to setpoint #128.
This is the amount by which the speed of the compressor is to be increased when more
capacity is needed. Compressor state will be CMP INCR SPEED.
Delay in seconds before the hot gas reheat function starts once all criteria has been
meet.
This is the maximum lift temperature. Refer to setpoint #128.
Setpoint at which barrel heater will be turned on when ambient drops below.
A digital signal from a refrigerant leak detector
Used with an adjustable VI, volume ratio. This is the pulse time expressed in tenths of
second to move the VI.
58
#
137
Name
VI DEADBAND
138
139
VI DELAY
OIL FLOAT
140
142
LOW SI
COMPRESSO
R OFF
HI SI
COMPRESSO
R OFF
SERVICE MODE
143
UNLOADED %
144
OIL HEATER ON
145
OIL COOLER ON
146
PROC TARG
147
PROC ZONE
148
149
PROC DELY
PROC MAX ROC
150
PROC MIN SPD%
151
UNLOADED OFF
152
HP OVERHEAT
153
SftyUnld Del
141
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
Used with an adjustable VI, volume ratio. If the VI reading is greater than the vi wanted
ratio plus the value of this setpoint then the increase RO is off and the decrease RO is
pulsed. . If the VI reading is less than the vi wanted ratio minus the value of this setpoint
then the increase RO is pulsed and the decrease RO is off.
Used with an adjustable VI, this is the time delay between calculating the vi wanted ratio.
If active, the system checks for low oil. The system will check the oil float digital input. It
must be ON for the period of time specified in the setpoint before this setpoint will
trip.
Compressors with low SI Off sensor will be disabled when sensor is below this setpoint.
Compressors with hi SI Off sensor will be disabled when sensor is above this setpoint.
This setpoint if not zero indicates that a compressor that is disabled with its pump down
switch being on is to be continually pumped down until its suction pressure is zero.
The compressor will be turned on to perform the pump down the number of times
indicated in this setpoint. This is to enable service to be performed on the
compressor.
Used if a slide percentage open sensor exists, when this sensors value is less than the
value of this setpoint the slide is considered closed.
This setpoint is used with a compressor that has an oil heater. The oil heater is turned on
if the oil temperature is less than the value of this setpoint. It will be turned off if the
oil temperature is greater than the value of this setpoint plus 5.0 degrees Fahrenheit.
Safety Time Field is zero then the calculated oil temp will be the saturated suction
temperature plus the value of the setpoint else it will be the value of this setpoint.
This setpoint is used with a compressor that has an oil cooler. The oil cooler is turned on
if the oil seal temperature is greater than the value of this setpoint. It will be turned off
if the oil seal temperature is less than the value of this setpoint minus 5.0 degrees
Fahrenheit.
Process pump target. If temperature-control then this must be temperature target that the
process temperature will be compared against. If pressure then this must contain the
target pressure.
Process pump control zone. This is used to develop a control zone, either temperature or
pressure, that the process pumps VFD will be modulated to maintain.
Process pump delay, in seconds, before next change.
Process pump slope, rate of change. If the slope exceeds this value no change is
required.
Process pump minimum speed if the Modulating (AO) option.
Number of relay outputs that will be staged it the Staging (RO) option.
When this setpoint is active and the system is fully unloaded with only one step on and
the control temperature is greater than this value the capacity state will be set to
holding.
This setpoint is only used when the heat pump option has been selected.
This setpoint is to protect against overheating of a heat pump with unloaders or variable
speed. When this setpoint is active and there is a leaving temperature sensor and it
valve is greater than this setpoint minus 3.0 degrees Fahrenheit the compressor will
enter the high temp unload state. The temperature must drop to less than this
setpoint minus 4.5 degrees Fahrenheit before the system will move to the holding
state.
Safety Time Field: Time that this condition must be true.
This setpoint contains the time delay in seconds between compressor capacity
adjustment when safety unloading.
59
#
154
Name
VFD Sfty Adj
155
LO REF TMP
156
LO REF UNLD
157
HP LoSuctAdj
(Only HVAC)
HI Sat Temp
(Only CENT)
DEF TRIG TMP
(Only HVAC)
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
163
164
164
165
DEF TRIG DEL

(Only HVAC)
DEF REV DEL
(Only HVAC)
DEF TERM TMP
(Only HVAC)
DEF TERM DEL
(Only HVAC)
HP HEAT TARG
(Only HVAC)
Purge Target
(Only CENT)
HP CTL ZONE +
(Only HVAC)
Purge Fault
(Only CENT)
166
HP CTL ZONE
(Only HVAC)
Purge ExTime
(Only CENT)
PHASE LOSS
167
DYN PURGE CT
168
PURGE COUNT
165
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
This setpoint contains the percentage of VFD adjustment when in safety unloading amount to adjust every time delay.
This setpoint is only used with CENTRIFUGAL compressors.
If active, the system checks for low refrigerate temperature. The refrigeration
temperature must be less than the value of this setpoint for the period of time
specified in the setpoint before this setpoint will trip.
This setpoint is only used with CENTRIFUGAL compressors.
The purpose of this setpoint is to take corrective action before a low refrigerate
temperature safety occurs. The slide will unload when the refrigerate temperature is less
than the value of the safety setpoint LO REF TMP (setpoint 155) plus this setpoint. The
compressor state will be changed indicate temperature unloading. The compressor will
remain in this state until the refrigerate temperature is above the value of the LO REF
TMP plus twice the value of this setpoint the compressor state will be temperature hold.
This setpoint is only used when the heat pump option has been selected.
When in the heating mode, the low suction value is reduced by the value of this setpoint.
Used when testing for the circuit with the greatest saturated temperature difference, the
saturated temperature must be greater than this value.
If a defrost option has been specified and either coil #1 or coil #2 temperature if they exist
is less than or equal to the value of this setpoint a defrost cycle will be started if
sufficient time has elapsed since the last defrost.
This setpoint contains the time expressed in minutes between defrost cycles.
If there is a reversing valve, this is the delay expressed in minutes that the system must
wait once the valve has been turned on before the defrost cycle can continue.
Once a defrost cycle begins it can be terminated when both coil #1 and coil #2
temperature if they exist are greater than the value of this setpoint.
Once a defrost cycle begins it will be terminated when the time this value expressed in
minutes.
If the HP HEAT TARG then the value of this setpoint will become the target temperature.
Similar to setpoint #1 when cooling option selected.
When this setpoint is active it indicates that a TRANE external purge system.
When purge suction temperature is less than this value, purge action may be required.
The safety time of this setpoint
Added to the HP HEAT TARG to create the top of the control zone when the HP HEAT
TARG. Similar to setpoint #2 when cooling option selected.
If this setpoint is active and there is a purge safety switch, the value of this setpoint will
contain the number of seconds that the switch must be on before a purge error
alarm occurs.
Subtracted from the HP HEAT TARG to create the bottom of the control zone when the
HP HEAT TARG. Similar to setpoint #3 when cooling option selected.
If the time of purging for the last 24 hours is greater than the value of this setpoint a
setpoint alarm will be generated.
If this setpoint is active and the phase loss digital input is on, when a phase loss occurs
the system will wait the number of seconds contained in this setpoint before
generating a phase loss condition. Also after a phase loss has occurred, the system
will attempt to restart after waiting the number of minutes contained in the Time in
Safety field of this setpoint. Enter number of minutes to wait in Time in Safety
For information only to show the total number of purges that occurred during the last
three purge cycles.
If the total number of purges that occurred during the last three purge cycles exceed this
count reset all counters and generate a Maximum Purges Exceeded alarm.
60
#
169
Name
PURGE PSI ST
170
EXCESS PURGE
171
FLA COMP#1
172
FLA COMP#2
173
FLA COMP#3
174
FLA COMP#4
175
FLA COMP#5
176
FLA COMP#6
177
FLA COMP#7
178
FLA COMP#8
179
FLA COMP#9
180
FLA COMP#10
181
FLA COMP#11
182
FLA COMP#12
183
FLA COMP#13
184
FLA COMP#14
185
FLA COMP#15
186
FLA COMP#16
187
FLA COMP#17
188
FLA COMP#18
189
FLA COMP#19
190
FLA COMP#20
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
When the purge pressure sensor reading is equal or greater than the value of this
setpoint a purge cycle will be initiated. The cycle will be terminated when the purge
pressure sensor reading is less than the value of this setpoint minus 5.0 degree
Fahrenheit.
If the time in a purge cycle exceeds the time expressed in seconds the cycle will be
terminated and an Excessive Purge Time alarm will be generated.
Full Load Amps for the compressor on compressor 1.
For screw compressors, the ampere when the compressor is fully loaded. This value is
used to calculate the compressor current FLA %, which is used to control the loading
and unloading of the slide valve (must hold amps).
This value is used to calculate the high and the low ampere safeties limits. Refer to
setpoints 75 and 76.
Note: This is the amps at design suction and discharge pressures referenced in
MCS-Configs RO screen.
Refer in setpoint 171 for definition.
61
#
191
Name
TEMP DIFF
192
FRZ TEMP DIFF
193
PSI DIFF
194
PSI1 DIFF
195
LOW VOLTAGE
196
HI VOLTAGE
197
LEAD Procom
(Only HVAC)
197
COND LOW AMB

(Only CENT)
198
PROC PUMP FLT.

(Only HVAC)
MOP TARG PSI
(Only HVAC)
MOP PSI ZONE
(Only HVAC)
199
200
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
This is a temperature differential and it used in conjunction with other setpoints to
determine if the temperature being tested has risen or fallen above or below the
value of that setpoint plus the value of this setpoint. It is used with the following:
Testing discharge temperature,
Testing low oil seal temperature,
Testing low/high ambient cutoffs and
Testing compressor discharge superheat.
It was previous set to 5.0F.
This value is a differential. The value of this setpoint is added to setpoint #102 to
determine if the leaving temperature is above the freeze protection zone. It was
previous set to 1.5F.
This is a pressure differential and it used in conjunction with other setpoints to determine
if the pressure being tested has risen or fallen above or below the value of that
setpoint plus the value of this setpoint. It is used with the following:
Turning on or off the purge valve,
Water condenser calculating discharge PSI adjustment,
Water condenser used to establish control zone range,
Mod motor control to establish control zone range.
It was previous set to 5.0F.
This is a pressure differential and it used in water condenser logic when the discharge
pressure is out of the zone (see setpoint #193) to determine if the discharge
pressure is moving too fast and it is out beyond range of the control setpoint #50
plus the value of this setpoint. It was previous set to 20.0F.
If voltage sensors have been specified in the General Information section under the
button MAGV11 CHL, if the value of any one of these sensors is less than the value
of this setpoint a LOW VOLTAGE alarm will be generated and the unit will be locked
out.
If voltage sensors have been specified in the General Information section under the
button MAG V11 CHL, if the value of any one of these sensors is greater than the
value of this setpoint a HI VOLTAGE alarm will be generated and the unit will be
locked out.
Indicates whether the rotation option is active or which process pump is the lead pump. If
the value is zero, then rotation of the process pumps will occur whenever the lead
process pump is turned off. If no rotation has occurred during the current day, a
forced rotation at midnight will occur. This forces at least one rotation per day. Else if
value is non-zero, then rotation of the process pumps is inactive and the value will
specify the lead process pump. This setpoint can be changed in a live unit and the
appropriate action will be taken.
When a compressor is started its discharge pressure will be used as the controlling
pressure for five minutes. This will enable that compressor to build head pressure. If
this setpoint is active and there is an ambient temperature sensor and the ambient
temperature is less than this setpoint; this compressors discharge pressure will
remain in control for an additional time as specified in the safety time.
Safety Time Field: Time specified.
The safety time of this setpoint is used to determine if a process pump has failed.
Safety Time Field: Time that this condition must be true.
If this setpoint is active, maximum operating pressure (MOP) control will be added to the
EXV control logic.
Used to develop the control zone around setpoint #199
62
#
201
Name
MOP ADJ % TME
(Only HVAC)
201
LOW SI OFF
(Only CENT)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
This setpoint is used if MOP is active.
The amount of EXV valve close adjustment that will be made with each valve adjustment
when the MOP is forcing the EXV value closed.
Safety Time Field: The time delay between making adjustments to the EXV valves when
in MOP control is the safety time of this setpoint.
Presently there is Low SI Off cell in the circuit sensor input grid. This has been
expanded to be either a digital input or an analog input.
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is a digital input, when it is on this
circuit will be disabled. The circuit will be enabled when the digital is off.
202
DELTA TEMP EVP

(Only HVAC)
202
HI SI OFF
(Only CENT)
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is an analog input, when its value is less
than the value of this setpoint the circuit will be disabled. The circuit will be enabled
when the sensor reading is greater than this value plus the value in the safety time.
The value in the safety time cell will be scaled based upon the number of decimals in
this setpoint
Safety Time Field: Time delay between adjustments to the EXV when in EXV is MDP
CLS state.
If this setpoint is active, a test will be made before additional capacity can be added to
the system. If the difference between the entering and leaving temperature is greater
than the value of this setpoint for time in safety time do not request additional
capacity to the system.
Safety Time Field: Time that this condition will be true.
Presently there is High SI Off cell in the circuit sensor input grid. This has been
203
HiSuctSheat
(Only HVAC)
204
COND LOW AMB

(Only HVAC)
204
SurgeHldDlay
{Only CENT)
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is an analog input, when its value is greater
when the sensor reading is less than this value minus the value in the safety time.
this setpoint.
To add a high suction superheat safety, activate setpoint #203. If the suction
superheat is greater than the value of this setpoint for the safety time, an alarm will
be generated and the compressor will be shut down with a safety or lock out state.
When a compressor is started its discharge pressure will be used as the controlling
pressure for five minutes. This will enable that compressor to build head pressure. If
this setpoint is active and there is an ambient temperature sensor and the ambient
temperature is less than this setpoint; this compressors discharge pressure will
remain in control for an additional time as specified in the safety time.
Safety Time Field: Time specified.
The value of this setpoint, expressed in minutes, indicates the time to wait in an
unloading state due to the occurrence of a surge. The surge counter will be reset
with each new surge. When the surge counter exceeds this value the compressor
state will move to CMP IS HOLDING state.
63
#
205
206
Name
MDP MIN OIL DIFF
COND HI AMB
207
UNBAL VOLTS
208
LOW SI OFF
(Only HVAC)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
If this setpoint is active the MDP function will be add to the EXV control.
Then the oil differential pressure is less than the value of this setpoint following
compressor start up, the MDP function will be active. The system will close the EXV
valve to restore the oil differential pressure.
The Sec to Ignore Safety cell will contain the time that the MDP will be active after
a compressor is started. The time (SEC) cell will contain the offset to exit the MDP
control. The Safety Down Time will contain the percentage to close the EXV valve.
The purpose of this setpoint is to bypass the condenser logic when an additional
compressor starts during a high ambient condition.
If this setpoint is active and the condenser type is common and the ambient
temperature is above the value of this setpoint when an additional compressor is
started its discharge pressure will not be the control pressure.
If this setpoint is active, the average of the voltage sensors is developed. Each
individual voltage sensors is compared to this average, if the difference is
greater than the value of this setpoint an alarm message is generated and the
unit is locked out.
Presently there is Low SI Off cell in the circuit sensor input grid. This has been
209
HI SI OFF
(Only HVAC)
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is an analog input, when its value is less
when the sensor reading is greater than this value plus the value in the safety time.
this setpoint
Presently there is High SI Off cell in the circuit sensor input grid. This has been
209
COMP SURGING
{Only CENT)
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is an analog input, when its value is greater
when the sensor reading is less than this value minus the value in the safety time.
this setpoint.
This value contains the number surges that when exceeded the compressor will be
placed in a safety condition. A surge can be the result of a change in amp draw rate
of change or a change in the lift rate of change pressure.
The amp draw rate of change difference of the amp draw for the compressor captured
over a period of time, not to exceed 60 seconds. When change exceeds the value in
setpoint #210 AMP SurgeROC a surge is recorded. This rate of change difference
can be either positive or negative.
The lift rate of change pressure is difference between discharge and suction pressure for
the compressor captured over a period of time, not to exceed 60 seconds. When
change exceeds the value in setpoint #211 LiftSurgeROC a surge is recorded. This
rate of change difference can be either positive or negative.
64
#
210
210
211
Name
ECO LL3 D-SHT
(Only HVAC)
AMP SurgeROC
{Only CENT)
NO OIL FLOW
(Only HVAC)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Description
If the economizer liquid line solenoid exists and it is controlled on %, not last step,
add a low discharge superheat test before checking whether the solenoid should be
turned on or not.
If the discharge super heat is less than the value of this setpoint plus
SP_LO_DISCH_SUPERHEAT, #84,
do not test whether the solenoid should be turned on or not, turn it off.
Refer to setpoint #209
If this setpoint is active and there is a sensor in the Oil Flow Switch cell of the circuit
grid a test will be made for no oil flow.
If the sensor is a digital input, when on indicates that there is no oil flow.
If the sensor is an analog input, then a low condition indicates that there is no oil
flow
211
212
212
213
213
214
214
LiftSurgeROC
{Only CENT)
SPARE 212
(Only HVAC)
SurgingCount
{Only CENT)
SPARE 213
(Only HVAC)
SurgingTime
{Only CENT)
SPARE 213
(Only HVAC)
NO OIL FLOW
(Only CENT)
Normal type of lock out safety.

Refer to setpoint #209
Not used at this time.
This setpoint is used to take preventive action to attempt to avoid a safety condition
because of excess surges. If the either number of amp or lift surges exceed the
value in this setpoint with in the time of the value in setpoint #213, SurgingTime,
take corrective action. The compressor state will be UNIT LOADING-VFD, the
compressor speed will be increased and the vain will be closed.
Refer to setpoint #212.
If this setpoint is active and there is a sensor in the Oil Flow Switch cell of the circuit
grid a test will be made for no oil flow.
If the sensor is an analog input, then a low condition indicates that there is no oil
flow
215
216
SPARE 215
RESERVED 216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
RESERVED 217
RESERVED 218
RESERVED 219
RESERVED 220
RESERVED 221
RESERVED 222
RESERVED 223
RESERVED 224

Setpoint 216 to 230 are reserved for use in user defined points. They will not be used in
the future by the Magnum software.
65
#
225
226
227
228
229
230
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Name
RESERVED 225
RESERVED 226
RESERVED 227
RESERVED 228
RESERVED 229
RESERVED 230
Description
66
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
14. AUTHORIZATION FUNCTION

The authorization code is a special four-character code that enables access in to the MAGNUM system.
The code must be numeric with values between 1 and 8 if it is to be entered from the Keypad/Display. If
the system is being accessed via MCS-Connect program, the code may consist of any valid
alpha/numeric characters. Each system can have up to 15 different authorization codes. This provides
the capability of issuing different codes to different people if desired. There are four levels of
authorization, which provide different capabilities within the system. The authorization code and the
associated level cannot be displayed or viewed in an MAGNUM system. These are established when
building the configuration file in the MCS-Config program. The authorization codes must be protected
and remain confidential, if they are compromised unauthorized personnel can gain access to the
system.
From the Keypad/Display the following changes can be made based upon the authorization level:
FUNCTION
VIEW
USER
SERVICE
FACTORY
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
SUPERVI
-SORY
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
SENSOR OFFSETS
SENSOR DIAGOSTICS
CLEAR ALARM HISTORY
CLEAR POINT INFORMATION
DATE and TIME SET
DAY OF WEEK SET
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
CHANGE NO FLOW LOCKOUT OR SHUT

DOWN
CHANGE ROTATE YES OR NO
CHANGE MANUAL/AUTO SETTINGS
CHANGE SETPOINT VALUES
CHANGE OPERATING SCHEDULES
CHANGE HOLIDAY DATES
LOCK OUT RESET
CHANGE RS485 NETWORK SETTINGS
CHANGE ETHERNET NETWORK SETTINGS
ADJUST KEYPAD DISPLAY CONTRAST
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
*
NO
NO
**
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
*
NO
NO
**
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
*
YES
YES
**
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
*
YES
YES
**
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
* Note - before a setpoint can be changed the setpoint must be able to be viewed. See setpoint level for
each individual setpoint.
**See configuration for authorization levels that are allowed unlimited resets per day. Authorization
levels below Auth Level Bypass are allowed a limited number of resets. Authorization levels at and
above Auth Level Bypass are allowed unlimited lockout resets.
To get authorized on Magnum do the following:

1. Press Menu
2. Using , , , or position curser to Passwords
3. Press key.
4. Enter 4 digit password and press.
5. The authorization will be displayed.
6. Press Menu to make next selection.
67
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
15. Sttandard Control

C
Options
O
The following
g options are specified
s
in the
e MCS-Config
g program whe
en building the
e configuration
n. These
options are used
u
to person
nalize the syste
em to meet the individual co
ontrol requirem
ments.
15.1. Genera
al Options
Control method
m
can be
e based upon the control zo
one strategy orr upon a voltag
ge input that in
ndicates
the number of stages to
t be on.
ure can specify
y either the retturn or leaving sensor.
The conttrol temperatu
Electronic expansion valves
v
with dyn
namic movem
ment based on capacity chan
nges
w
reset from the BMS.
Chilled water
Condens
ser control allo
owing correct discharge
d
sup
perheat for goo
od oil separatio
on.
Evapora
ator pump conttrol.
Anti-cyclle timers allow
w off to on and on to on. (All ccompressors))
Number of compresso
ors, maximum of eight with sselectable com
mpressor rotatiion.
g RO, this poin
nt will be turned
d on for low su
uction unload, high discharg
ge unload, etc.
Warning
Alarm RO, this point will
w be turned on
o whenever a
an alarm is gen
nerated.
a
rotation fo
or compressorrs.
Specify auto
Low and
d/or high ambie
ent shut down.
15.2. Comprressor Type

es
The compres
ssor type is se
elected from a drop down listt in the Comprressor Informa
ation section u
under the
MAG CHL bu
utton.
omp w/Oil
Recip Co
Recip Co
omp w/o Oil
Screw Comp
C
w/ Oil
Scroll Co
omp
Hitachi Screw
S
Bitzer Sc
crew
Hartford Screw
open)
Hanbell--Load NO (load solenoid wirred to normal o
Hanbell--Load NC (load
d solenoid wire
ed to normal cclose)
Hanbell-- 3 Solenoid (5
50-100%) (not variable but 3 fixed step scrrew)
Hanbell-- Step (fixed sttep)
68
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Centrifugal
Mitsubishi Screw
McQuay Frame 4
Fu Sheng
Trane Trio
Trane Quad
The type of compressor will determine the relay output sequence plus how the compressor is controlled.
15.3. Sequence of Compressor Related Relay Outputs

The sequence of relay outputs must be correct. Relays are required unless marked as optional. If a
relay is optional and it is not used then it position is skipped and the following relays will be moved up.
Compressor type selection from MCS-Config program is shown within brackets.
15.3.1.
Reciprocating Comp with Oil (Recip Comp w/Oil)
Compressor relay
Part winding compressor relay (OPTIONAL)
Liquid line solenoid
Unloader 1 (OPTIONAL)
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
Oil heater (OPTIONAL)
Hot gas bypass (OPTIONAL)
Common Hot gas bypass (OPTIONAL)
Liquid injection (OPTIONAL)
Fast unloader (OPTIONAL)
Second liquid line solenoid (OPTIONAL)
Oil equalization (OPTIONAL)
Oil seal cooler (OPTIONAL)
VI increase valve % (OPTIONAL)
VI decrease valve % (OPTIONAL)
Start unloader bypass (OPTIONAL)
Low disc super heat (OPTIONAL)
Hot gas reheat off (OPTIONAL) If hot gas reheat all 3 hot gas relays are required.
Hot gas reheat on (OPTIONAL)
Hot gas reheat bleed (OPTIONAL)
Third liquid line solenoid (OPTIONAL)
Reversing valve (heat pump) (OPTIONAL)
Liquid injection #2 (OPTIONAL)
Mod motor (OPTIONAL)
15.3.2.
Reciprocating Comp without Oil (Recip Comp w/o Oil)
Compressor relay
69
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.3.3.
Screw Comp with Oil (Screw Comp w/Oil)
Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Oil pump
Oil heater
Liquid line solenoid (OPTIONAL)
15.3.4.
Scroll Comp (Scroll Comp)
Compressor relay
Oil pump
Oil heater
70
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.3.5.
Hitachi Screw (Hitachi Screw Comp)
Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Fast unloader
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
15.3.6.
Bitzer Screw (Bitzer Screw Comp)
Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
71
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.3.7.
Hartford Screw (Hartford Screw Comp)
Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
15.3.8.
Carlyle Screw (Carlyle Screw)
Compressor relay
72
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.3.9.
Hanbell-Load NO (Hanbell-Load NO)
Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
15.3.10. Hanbell-Load NC (Hanbell-Load NC)

Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
73
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.3.11. Hanbell- 3 Solenoid (Hanbell- 3 Solenoid [50-100%])
Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Fast unloader
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
15.3.12. Hanbell Fixed Step (Hanbell Step)
Compressor relay
74
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
15.3.13. Centrifugal (Centrifugal Comp)

Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Oil pump
Oil heater
15.3.14. Mitsubishi Screw (Mitsubishi Screw)
Compressor relay
Fast unloader
40 % open
70 % open
75
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.3.15. McQuay Frame 4 (McQuay Frame 4)
Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
15.3.16. Fu Sheng (Fu Sheng)

Compressor relay
Loader
Unloader
Oil pump (OPTIONAL)
76
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.3.17. Trane Scroll with 3 Compressor Sets (Trane Trio)
(This requires specific operating sequence as the compressors are used in tandem sets.
Set up is as follows:
COMP A/ COMP B/COMP C <----Suction Gas Flow
Staging sequence will be:
Stage 1 COMP C on, COMP A and COMP B off.
Stage 2 COMP A and COMP B on, COMP c off.
Stage 3 COMP A and COMP B and COMP C on.)
Compressor relay for COMP A
Relay to turn on COMP B
Relay to turn on COMP C
15.3.18. Trane Scroll with 4 Compressor Sets (Trane Quad)
(This requires specific operating sequence as the compressors are used in tandem sets.
Set up is as follows:
Suction Gas Flow ---->COMP A/ COMP B/ COMP C/ COMP D
Staging sequence will be:
77
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Stage 1 COMP A on, COMP B and COMP C and COMP D off.

Stage 2 COMP C and COMP D on, COMP A and COMP B off.
Stage 3 COMP B and COMP C and COMP D on, COMP A off.
Stage 4 COMP A and COMP B and COMP C and COMP D on.)
Compressor relay for COMP A
Relay to turn on COMP B
Relay to turn on COMP C
Relay to turn on COMP D
15.4. Compressor Setup and Options

All setup information and option selection is completed in the MCS-Config program.
15.4.1.
General Information
Four compressor steps per compressor can be supported. Compressor plus three additional steps of
either compressors or unloaders and hot gas bypass points. Note, compressor safeties relate to a
compressor. If multiple compressors are on a compressor and a safety trips, all compressor on that
compressor will be turned off. If hot gas bypass refer to Hot Gas Bypass Option.
Specify that part winding, two RO points will be used with fixed step compressors, the first RO will be
turned on with the second RO being turn on the number of seconds later that is specified in setpoint
#73. If not part winding, only allocate one RO point for the compressor.
Pump down of the compressor will occur when the compressor is being turned off and started. Note,
when the compressor is started the liquid line solenoid is not opened until the suction pressure reaches
the value that is contained in the pump down setpoint or the Pump Down delay setpoint time is
exceeded. A liquid line solenoid is required for the pump down to be done.
None, or up to 3 liquid line solenoids may be specified plus 1 or 2, tandem, EXV valves.
78
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
15.4.2.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Compress
sor Informattion setup
In this sectio
on under the MAG
M
HVAC V8
8 button comp
pressor type iss selected from
m a drop down
n list. Additiona
al
information about the com
mpressor and how
h it will be controlled
c
is alsso provided in
n this section. R
Review all cellls and
provide the proper informa
ation about the
e compressor..
15.4.3.
Compress
sor Base settup
Compressor information is
s provided by compressor in
n this section u
under the Com
mpressor Base
e V8 button. R
Review all
cells and pro
ovide the prop
per information
n about the com
mpressor. Forr this compresssor there are ssix relay outpu
uts
beginning with
w COMP A, this
t was selec
cted from a dro
op down menu
u, with part win
nding and the Type of LLS iss LLS
only.
15.4.4.
Relay Outtput Informa

ation Screen
n setup
This screen relates to the above examp

ple. The comprressor is a varriable capacityy compressor; therefore, the
e slide
information must be provid
ded, this is use
ed in calculatin
ng the amp drraw of the com
mpressor. Note
e the Type co
olumn, for
the COMP A,
A first compre
essor point, fro
om a drop dow
wn menu the se
election of Scrrew NO EXV w
was selected.
To assist in developing this data MCS provides
p
two EXCEL
E
spread
d sheets that a
are available on our home w
web page.
Refer to the section on Sllide Data Inforrmation.
79
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
This screen is an example

e of a variable capacity, scre
ew, and comprressor with EX
XV valves. Notte the Type co
olumn
selection. Th
he EXV data must
m be provid
ded.
This informa
ation can be viiewed and cha
anged, with pro
oper authoriza
ation, from MC
CS Connect. B
By double clickking on
the name fie
eld the followin
ng will be displlayed.
15.4.5.
Slide Data
a Informatio
on
One is if
To assist in developing this information,, MCS provide
es two EXCEL
L spread sheetts on the MCS
S home page. O
the suction and
a discharge
e pressure is show in PSI the
e other is for B
BAR values.
Depending on the type an
nd model you use, the com
mpressor manu
ufacturer shou
uld have a sele
ection program
m or write
up giving yo
ou the FLAs fo
or a particular design suctio
on and discharrge. This inform
mation is ente
ered in cells B7
7, B8 and
B9. Then by
y adjusting the
e cells B4, B5 and B6 the va
alues in cells I1
11 through I19
9 will be chang
ged. Make adjjustments
until these values
v
match as
a closely as possible
p
to the values in I24 through I32.
80
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Then values
s in the cells B4
B through B6 and B8 and B9
B must be enttered into the R
Relay Output Information sccreen for
the first relay
y for the comp
pressor.
15.5. Full Lo
oad Amp (FL
LA) calculattion and slid
de position
ning
For variable
e capacity com
mpressors the system
s
will callculate a FLA ffor each comp
pressor and it will be stored in the
FLA setpoin
nts, setpoints #171
#
to #190 for
fo compressors 1 through 2
20 with every p
pass of the alg
gorithm. When
n
setpoints are
e display eithe
er by MCS Con
nnect or on the LCD of a Ma
agnum the callculate value iss displayed. T
This
calculation is
s designed to take into cons
sideration the actual
a
suction and discharge
e pressure of the compressor.
The calculattion is based upon
u
slide mulltiplier, divisor and offset and
d then adjuste
ed for the differrence between
n the
actual and design
d
pressurres for suction and discharge.
This calcula
ation is then us
sed to determin
ne where the slide
s
is positio
oned by taking the actual am
mp draw divide
ed the
calculated FLA
F value. The
e load and unlo
oad solenoids
s will be used tto match the ccompressor slid
de position witth the
wanted FLA
A of the unit.
For example
e for a compre
essor with the slide multiplierr of 95.0, divissor of 10.0 and
d offset of 10.0
0; the design ssuction of
70.0 and dis
scharge of 340
0.0; and the orriginal FLA settpoint value off 150.0 with acctual amp draw
w of 88.0:
Acttual suction PS
SI
Acttual suction PS
SI
Callculated FLA
Slid
de position
65.0
200.0
0
93.7
88%
65.0
300.0
132.8
66%
70.0
345.0
153.4
64%
If a FLA setp
point is to be changed
c
from MCS Connec
ct both the orig
ginal and calcu
ulated values a
are displayed iin the
following change screen:
81
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Note the orig

ginal value is changed
c
which will impact th
he calculated vvalue.
15.6. Condenser Contro

ol Logic
Controls of common
c
conde
enser, individu
ual condenserss per compresssor or conden
nsers that are shared
between com
mpressors are supported. Th
he type of condenser plus th
he number of ccondenser poiints (relay
outputs) are specified when building the configuration file.
In the Conde
enser Informattion section clic
ck on the cond
denser type to
o view the type
es of condense
ers that
are supporte
ed. Select the type.
t
s
the fo
ollowing option
ns:
The system supports
1. No Condenser
C
- No condenserr specified.
2. RO Step Commo
on - If RO Ste
ep Common ccondenser is specified, the h
highest discharrge
pres
ssure from any
y one of the co
ompressors on
n the system w
will be the conttrolling pressu
ure.
82
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
3. RO Step Individual - If RO Step Individual condenser is specified, each compressor will have
one or more condenser points that are associated with that compressor. The discharge
pressure on that compressor will be the controlling pressure.
4. RO Step Combined - If RO Step Combined condenser is specified, and then the highest
discharge pressure from any one of the compressors on the shared compressors will be the
controlling pressure (compressors 1 and 2 are shared; compressors 3 and 4 are shared,
compressors 5 and 6 are shared, and compressors 7 and 8 are shared).
5. Modulating Common
- If Modulating Common condenser is specified, the highest
discharge pressure from any one of the compressors on the system will be the controlling
pressure. A change to the modulating analog output position is calculated every 30 seconds
based on the Rate of Change of the controlling discharge pressure.
6. RO Shared
- Similar to RO Step Individual but two compressors: compressor 1 and 2
will share compressor ones fan and then 2 and 3 will share compressor twos fan.
7. Dual V8
8. Modulating Individual
- If Modulating Individual condenser is specified, each
compressor will have one or more condenser points that are associated with that compressor.
A change to the modulating analog output position is calculated every 30 seconds based on the
Rate of Change of the controlling discharge pressure.
9. Mod Common w/Bypass - If Mod Common w/Bypass is selected three consecutive relay
outputs, analog output, and a VFD fault indicator are required to control this type of condenser
fans.
1) VFD LOAD This relay will be on indicating that the fan can be used.
2) VDF BYPS This will be off unless a fault with the VFD has occurred.
3) VFD ENAB This relay will be on unless the VFD fault has occurred.
Normal operation, the VFD LOAD will be on, the VD BYPS will be off and the VFD ENAB will
be on. The fan will be modulated as required by the condenser logic or the economizer logic.
If a fault occurs, all relays will be turned off and the VFD will be set to 0. The system will wait for
the time specified in setpoint #90. This is a time delay before the fan will be run without VFD
control if it is needed by the condenser logic. Note: it will not be used by economizer logic in this
condition. Once this time has passed and the condenser logic needs the fan, the VD BYPS will
be turned on thus turning the fan on. This will NOT be modulated, once on it will stay on.
The system will also support a variable speed fan for all three of the air type of condensers. Each
compressor can support a variable speed fan. The variable speed must be on the first condenser point
associated with that compressor.
Note1: Condenser control is extremely important. The discharge temperature must achieve 117 F and the discharge
superheat needs to achieve about 20 F to guarantee good oil separation.
Note2: Condenser staging is critical if the Magnum is to function in different climates. The best option for air-cooled
chillers is to have each fan on its own contactor and a frequency drive on fan 1. This combination allows the
most optimum control in all weather. Also if a contactor is lost only 1 fan is lost.
15.7. RO Step Condenser Cut In Out Logic

The air condenser setpoints are as follows:
Setpoint #45 CND STG1 ON
- Condenser stage 1 cut in (ON).
Setpoint #46 CND STG1 OFF
- Condenser stage 1 cut out (OFF).
Setpoint #47 CND DIFF ON
- Differential between condenser stages for cut in (ON).
Setpoint #48 CND DIFF OFF
- Differential between condenser stages for cut out (OFF).
Setpoint #49 CND MIN RUN
- Minimum run time for a condenser stage
Condenser points, (i.e. pumps and or fans), will be turned on based upon the value in setpoint (COND
ST1 ON) #45, when the discharge pressure reaches this value the first condenser point is turned on. If
83
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
additional condenser points exist, they will be turned on when the pressure exceeds the previous cut in
value plus the value contained in (COND DIFF ON #47) setpoint. As the discharge pressure is reduced,
the condenser points will be turned off based upon the setpoint (COND ST1 OFF #46) value plus the
condenser step times the value contained in (COND DIFF OUT #48) setpoint. The first step will be
turned off based upon the valve in the setpoint (COND ST1 OFF).
Example
Setpoint #45 CND STG1 ON

Setpoint #46 CND STG1 OFF
Setpoint #47 CND DIFF ON
Setpoint #48 CND DIFF OFF
= 200.0P
= 170.0P
= 20.0P
= 5.0P
COND FAN1 ON @ 200.0P DISCHARGE

COND FAN 1 OFF @ 170.0 P
COND FAN2 ON @ 220.0p (200.0 + 20.0)
COND FAN2 OFF @ 175.0p (175.0 + 5.0)
COND FAN3 ON @ 240.0p (220.0 + 20.0)
COND FAN3 OFF @ 180.0p (170.0 + 10.0), etc.
15.8. RO Step Condenser with Variable Speed Fan

The setpoints for air condensers with for variable speed fan control are as follows:
Setpoint #54 CND MIN SPD
- Minimum variable speed allowed.
Setpoint #55 CND MAX SPD
- Maximum variable speed allowed.
The purpose of the variable speed fan is to reduce the cycling of the fans by adjusting the speed of the
variable fan point. This control works in conjunction with the cut in and cut out logic of each compressor.
The cut in and cut out logic turns on or off the various condenser fan points. When a fan is turned on,
the speed of the variable point for that compressor is set to maximum allowed percentage. As the
discharge PSI lowers the fan speed is adjusted proportionally. When the minimum is reached a fan is
turned off.
Once a fan point has been turned on, the system will vary the fan speed for that compressor. This will
be based upon where the discharge pressure is in relationship to turning the current fan point off and
turning the next fan point on.
15.9. Modulating Condenser

The example is of a system with a water condenser. The water valve will be modulated.
The water condenser setpoints are as follows:
Setpoint #50 CND VLV TARG
- Discharge target pressure
Setpoint #51 CND VLV DIV
- Condenser valve adjustment sensitivity
Setpoint #52 CND VLV MIN
- Condenser valve minimum opening
Setpoint #53 CND VLV ROC- Condenser max negative Rate of Change
Setpoint #54 CND MIN SPD
- Minimum speed for the variable speed condenser fan
Setpoint #55 CND MAX SPD
- Maximum speed for the variable speed condenser fan
Condenser water valve will be adjusted based upon the Rate of Change of the discharge pressure. The
logic is setup to modulate a water valve using the analog output (0 to 10vdc), to maintain the discharge
pressure (logic selects the highest discharge pressure from the running compressors).
Example
CND VLV TARG

CND VLV DIV
CND VLV MIN
CND VLV ROCCND MIN SPD
CND MAX SPD
=
=
=
=
=
=
190.0P
1
25%
-5.0P
25%
100%
84
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
15.10. Condenser Fan Ba

ank
The purpose
e of the fan ban
nk is to indicatte compressorrs that share ccondenser fanss. During the ffirst five
minutes afterr a compresso
or is started if itts discharge p
pressure is lesss than setpoin
nt #44, conden
nser cut
in, and setpo
oint #46, conde
enser differenttial, the discha
arge pressure of this compre
essor will be ussed to
determine wh
hen fans will be
b turned on. This
T will allow head pressure
e to be built for the starting
compressor. The five-minu
ute time frame can be extend
ded with setpo
oint #204, COND LOW AMB
B. When
this setpoint is active and the
t ambient temperature is less than its va
alue, the time will be extended by the
time in the sa
afety time field
d.
The fan bank
k number is sp
pecified in the MCS-Config program in the
e compressorr grid. If not use
ed the
fan bank num
mber must be the same as the compresso
or number.
15.11. Condenser Contro

ol
The Conden
nser Control lo
ogic is run with
h every pass of
o the algorithm
m.
15.11.1
1. Common Terms
Condenserr Fan Bank:

Gro
ouping differen
nt compressorrs that share co
ommon conde
enser fans.
oup:
Suction Gro
Gro
ouping differen
nt compressorrs with those th
hat are on a co
ommon suctio
on line.
Fluid Coole
er Econo?
Opttion to enable the fluid coole
er/economizer function to usse condenser ffans or VFD.
(
PSI):
Control Condenser On (Disc
s on a compre
essors discharrge pressure o
or other senso
or. If other is ch
hosen the
Opttion to enable to control fans
sen
nsor must be selected.
s
In the
e above exam
mple, discharge
e pressure con
ntrol is selecte
ed.
The
e system will check
c
for the compressor
c
witth the highest discharge and
d use that as tthe controlling
pressure.
85
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Control Condenser On (Other

(
SI):
In above
a
example
e the Other SI option is chos
sen. The syste
em will not che
eck for the com
mpressor with the high
disc
charge but will always use th
he value of the
e sensor that is selected as the control.
2. Develop the
t Control Discharge
D
P
Pressure
15.11.2
If control is based
b
on discharge pressurre, all types of condenser de
evelop the con
ntrol discharge
e pressure in th
he
following fas
shion. They wiill use this control discharge pressure to co
ontrol their typ
pe of condense
er.
For compres
ssors within th
he same fan ba
ank or suction
n group, the co
ompressor with
h the highest d
discharge presssure will
be held as th
he control pres
ssure. The compressors do not have to b
be running!
Unless therre is a compressor within the
e same fan ba
ank but not in tthe same suctiion group thatt is in a startup
p mode.
Startup mod
de is when the
e compressor has
h been on fo
or less than 5 minutes and itts discharge p
pressure is lesss than
the value of setpoint #45, CND STG1 ON,
O minus the value of setpo
oint #47, CND DIFF ON. If a compressor iis in
startup mod
de, its discharg
ge pressure will be held as th
he control presssure. This will enable the ccompressor to build up
head pressu
ure.
Unless therre is a compressor within same fan bank whose
w
discharrge pressure iss greater than the value of ssetpoint
#81, HI DISCH PSI, minus the value of setpoint #83, HI DISCH UN
NLD. This will e
enable the com
mpressor that is
approaching
g a high discha
arge pressure safety to use its discharge p
pressure as th
he control disccharge pressurre.
s based on Otther SI, the va
alue of that se
ensor is alwa
ays used as th
he control dis
scharge pres
ssure.
If control is
15.11.3
3. Condense
er Related Setpoints
S
45
D STG1 ON
CND
46
CND
D STG1 OFF
47
48
48
49
CND
D DIFF ON
CND
D DIFF OFF
DUA
AL PSI DELTA
A
CND
D MIN RUN
49
DUA
AL TIME DELA
AY
50
CND
D VLV TARG
51
CND
D VLV DIV
Air coole
ed- When the discharge pre
essure is above
ve this value; tu
urn on the firstt
stag
ge of the condenser fans.
Safety Time
T
Field: If th
his field is not equal to zero then a compre
essor that is in
n
starrtup state will not
n control the
e discharge pre
essure.
Air coole
ed- If stage 1 is on and the d
discharge presssure drops be
elow this value
e
turn
n off the first stage of conden
nser fans.
Air coole
ed- Differential PSI to turn o
on the remainin
ng stages of co
ondenser fanss.
Air coole
ed- Differential PSI to turn of
off the remainin
ng stages of co
ondenser fanss.
Dual V8
8 Difference in pressure be
efore stage 2 ccan be entered
d.
Air coole
ed- Once a co
ondenser fan sstage has been
n turned on; it will remain on
n for
at le
east the amount of minutes sspecified in this setpoint.
Dual V8
8 Time delay
y once the presssure differencce as been rea
ached before
stag
ge 2 can be en
ntered.
Water cooled- Target discharge pre
essure to main
ntain by integra
ation and Rate
e of
Cha
ange logic.
Water cooled- Usually
y 1. Allows con
ntrol of the am
mount the valve
e is adjusted. T
The
larg
ger the numberr the smaller th
he valve adjusstment.
86
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
52
CND
D VLV MIN
53
CND
D VLV ROC-
54
55
CND
D MIN SPD
CND
D MAX SPD
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Water cooled- Minimu

um valve open
ning percentag
ge allowed.
If the co
ompressor is off then check tthe Safety Tim
me Field:
= 0,, then set the VFD
V
to the vallue of this setp
point;
= 2 and the run/sttop is run, then
n set the VFD to 100%;
else
e set the VFD to 0%. Set up
p in the Comprressor Informa
ation under the
e
MAG HVAC V8 button
b
option D
Default Valve Opening % when Comp is o
off.
Water cooled- Maximum negative d
discharge presssure Rate of C
Change allowe
ed.
If the actual rate of
o change is le
ess than this se
etpoint then sttop opening th
he
valv
ve. The absolu
ute value of thiis setpoint also
o severs as the maximum
pos
sitive rate of ch
hange allowed. If the actual rrate of change
es is greater th
han
the absolute value
e of this setpo
oint then stop cclosing the valve.
Minimum
m speed perce
entage for variiable speed co
ondenser conttrol.
Maximum speed perc
centage for varriable speed ccondenser con
ntrol.
15.11.4
4. Type of Condenser,
C
No
N Condense
er Type
This option indicates

i
there
e is no conden
nser associate
ed with this uniit.
15.11.5
C
RO
R Step Com
mmon Type
e without a F
Fan AO
The RO Ste
ep Common ty
ype of condens
ser has one ba
ank of fans. Alll compressorss will use this b
bank of fans; m
make
sure that all compressors in the Compre
essor Base po
oint to the sam
me common fan
n bank. The above example
e does
not have a Fan
F AO and th
here are three stages of fans
s starting with FAN 1 relay. A
All stages musst be consecuttive relay
outputs.
For example
e:
Setpoin
nt #
45
46
47
48
49
Va
alue
200
0.0P
170
0.0P
15..0P
5.0
0P
1
Na
ame
CND
D STG1 ON
CND
D STG2 OFF
CND
D DIFF ON
CND
D DIFF OFF
CND
D MIN RUN
87
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Discharge control
c
pressurre is 200.0 P, FAN
F
1, first co
ondenser stage
e. (Refer to disscussion on de
eveloping the
discharge co
ontrol pressure
e.)
If control pre
essure is equa
al to or greaterr than 215.0 P then the seco
ond stage will b
be turned on. (200.0 + (15.0
0 * 1))
If control pre
essure is equa
al to or greaterr than 230.0 P then the third stage will be tturned on. (20
00.0 + (15.0 * 2
2))
Discharge control
c
pressurre is above 230.0 P; all three
e condenser sstages are on.
When the co
ontrol pressure
e drops to 180
0.0P the third condenser
c
sta
age will be turn
ned off. (170.0 + (5.0 * 2))
When the co
ontrol pressure
e drops to 175
5.0P the secon
nd condenser stage will be tturned off. (170
0.0 + (5.0 * 1))
When the co
ontrol pressure
e drops to 170
0.0P the first co
ondenser stag
ge will be turne
ed off. (170.0)
Condenserr Faults
This example has no cond
denser faults. If used and an
ny one of the d
digitals are on for the time sp
pecified in setpoint #90
and this setp
point must also
o be active the
e unit will be placed
p
in a locckout state, UNIT IN LOCKO
OUT and an alarm
message wiill be generate
ed.
15.11.6
C
RO
R Step Com
mmon Type w
with a Fan A
AO and Condenser
Faults
The above example

e
is the
e same as the previous exam
mple with the a
addition of a F
Fan AO and tw
wo condenser ffaults.
ONTROL (fan control will be
b the same for
f all types o
of condenser air control)
FAN AO CO
Use the sam
me setpoints plus two additio
onal are neede
ed to control th
he speed of th
he fan.
Setpoin
nt #
54
55
Na
ame
CND
D MIN SPD
CND
D MAX SPD
Va
alue
20.0%
100
0.0%
FAN 1 will be
b turned on when
w
the contro
ol pressure is equal to or gre
eater than 200
0.0, same as in
n previous exa
ample. At
this point the
e Fan AO speed will be set to
t its maximum
m value, setpo
oint #55. If the pressure changes between
n 170.0
and 214.9 th
he fan speed will
w also be cha
anged proporttionally betwee
en its maximum and minimu
um settings. If the
pressure is at185.0
a
the fan speed will be
e set to 61.2%
%. If the pressu
ure is at 190.0 the fan speed
d will increase to
75.0%. This
s will provide additional contrrol in maintaining the discha
arge pressure.
If the pressu
ure increases to
t 215.0 the co
ondensers sec
cond stage willl be turned on
n and the fan sspeed will also
o be at
100.0%. . If the pressure changes
c
betw
ween 175.0 and
d 229.9 the fan
n speed will allso be change
ed proportionally
between its maximum and
d minimum se
ettings.
If the pressu
ure increases to
t 230.0 the co
ondensers thirrd stage will be
e turned on an
nd the fan spe
eed will also be
e at
100.0%. . If the pressure changes
c
betw
ween 180.0 and
d 229.9 the fan
n speed will allso be change
ed proportionally
between its maximum and
d minimum se
ettings. If the prressure is at 2
230.0 and abovve the fan spe
eed will be at 1
100.0%.
As the press
sure decrease
es toward a cutout point the fan
f speed deccreased towarrd its minimum
m setting. Once
e a stage
is turn of the
e fan speed will be set to 100
0.0% and aga
ain it will be mo
odulated based
d upon the pre
essure.
88
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Condenserr Faults
This example has two con
ndenser faults. They must be consecutive
e digital input tyypes starting w
with FANfault. If either
of these digitals are on forr the time spec
cified in setpoint #90 and this setpoint musst also be active the unit will be
placed in a lockout
l
state, UNIT
IN LOC
CKOUT and an
a alarm messsage will be ge
enerated.
15.11.7
7.
Type of Condenser,
C
RO Step Ind
dividual Typ
pe
The RO Ste
ep Individual ha
as a bank of fa
ans for each compressor.
c
Th
he number an
nd location of the fan are spe
ecified
under the Compressor Ba
ase button.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
e
has 2 compressors
s.
The above example
(1) With eac
ch compressorr having 4 fans
s.
(2) The first fan for compre
essor 1 is FAN
N A and B; the
e other 3 fans m
must follow in consecutive p
positions. The first fan
ssor 2 is FAN K and L; the otther 3 fans mu
ust follow in co
onsecutive possitions. Note, tthe number of fans in
for compres
each comprressor does no
ot have to be the same but the condenserr fan bank musst be different..
(3) There is no condenserr fan AO. If a condenser
c
fan AO was speccified it would ffunction as de
escribed in the example
of the RO co
ommon with a condenser fa
an AO and con
ndenser faults..
(4) and (5) There
T
are no condenser
c
faults. If there we
ere condenser faults they wo
ould function a
as described in
n the
example of the
t RO comm
mon with a cond
denser fan AO
O and condensser faults.
(6) Each com
mpressor has a different fan
n bank.
Each comprressor fan ban
nk is controlled
d individually. The
T control disscharge presssure is develop
ped for each
compressorr.
The fans in each bank are
e staged on an
nd off in the sa
ame matter ass described in a
above example, RO Step C
Common
without a Fa
an AO.
Condenserr Faults
ny one of the d
and this setp
point must also
o be active the
e associated compressor will be placed
d in a lockout sstate, CMP LO
OCKED
OUT and an
a alarm message will be ge
enerated.
89
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
15.11.8
8.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Type of Condenser,
C
RO Step Co
ombined Typ
pe
The RO Com
mbined type has
h a bank of fans
f
that are used
u
by two co
onsecutive com
mpressors. Th
he number and
d location
of the fans are
a specified under
u
the Com
mpressor Base button. This iss same as the
e RO Step Indiividual set up e
except
only every other
o
compress
sor has a cond
denser fans as
ssociated with
h it.
Compressor one and two will share the fan bank that is specified in
n the compresssor one grid under the Compressor
Base button
n. The highest pressure betw
ween these two compressorrs will be used as the control discharge pre
essure
e fan bank.
for this bank
k of fans. Thes
se two compre
essors should have the same
Compressor three and fou
ur will share th
he fan bank tha
at is specified in the compre
essor two grid under the Com
mpressor
Base button
essure
for this bank
k of fans.
These two compressors
c
should
s
have th
he same fan ba
ank.
Condenserr Faults
ny one of the d
and this setp
point must also
o be active the
OCKED
OUT and an
enerated.
C
Modulating
M
C
Common Ty
ype
15.11.9
90
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
This type of condenser uses water to provide cooling to the compressors. All compressors should have the same
condenser fan bank to insure that the proper control discharge pressure is developed. The AO Modulating Valve will
modulate the cold water based upon this discharge pressure.
The following applies to both the modulating common and individual water condenser types.
The valve opening percentage can be specified when all of the associated compressors are off. By selecting the
default valve opening %, the valve can be completely closed, 0%; the value of setpoint #52 or completely open,
100% if the Run/Stop indicator is on.
This type uses the following setpoints:
#
NAME
DESCRIPTION
48
CND DELAY
Water cooled- if active, this is the time in seconds between adjustments to the
water valve. If inactive, then 30 seconds will be used as the delay.
49
CND VLV START
Water cooled- If the valve opening is less than setpoint 52 and this setpoint is
active; make the valve opening equal to this setpoint. This enables minimum
opening to be set at larger opening percentage.
50
CND VLV TARG
Water cooled- Target discharge pressure to maintain by integration and Rate of
Change logic.
51
CND VLV DIV
Water cooled- Usually 1. Allows scaling of the amount the valve is adjusted. The
larger the number the smaller the valve adjustment as the adjustment will be
divided by this value.
52
CND VLV MIN
Water cooled- Minimum valve opening percentage allowed.
If the compressor is off then check the Safety Time Field:
= 0, then set the VFD to the value of this setpoint;
= 2 and the run/stop is run, then set the VFD to 100%;
else set the VFD to 0%. Set up in the Compressor Information under the
MAG HVAC V8 button option Default Valve Opening % when Comp is off.
53
CND VLV ROCWater cooled- Maximum negative discharge pressure Rate of Change allowed.
If the actual rate of change is less than this setpoint then stop opening the
valve. The absolute value of this setpoint also severs as the maximum
positive rate of change allowed. If the actual rate of changes is greater than
the absolute value of this setpoint then stop closing the valve.
54
CND VLV MULT
Water cooled- Allows scaling of the amount the valve is adjusted. The larger the
number the larger the valve adjustment as the adjustment will be multiplied
by this value.
The control discharge pressure will be developed. All compressor fan banks must be the same. This will develop the
compressor that needs the condenser cooling.
The delay timer, setpoint #48 will be decremented by 4 if the control discharge pressure is more than 20.0 PSI or 2.0
bar from the target setpoint #50; if the difference is less but greater than 15.0 PSI or1.5 bar the delay will be
decremented by 2 else it is decremented by 1.
Delay is zero and compressor is running develop the valve adjustment value. Adjustment is equal to the absolute
control discharge pressure minus setpoint #50 multiplied by setpoint # 54 and then divided by setpoint #51.
The system then determines where the control discharge pressure is in relation to the target, setpoint #50 and how
fast the pressure is changing.
If the control discharge pressure is greater than setpoint #50 plus 5.0 PSI or .5 bar (above the zone): If the control
discharge pressure change is decreasing (current value previous value) more than twice the value of setpoint #53
then the pressure is dropping too fast close the valve by the calculated adjustment. If the control discharge
91
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
pressure change is increa

asing (current value
v
previo
ous value) morre than the vallue of setpointt #53 then the pressure
is decreasin
ng too slow open
o
the valve
e by the calcula
ated adjustme
ent. Else make
e no adjustmen
nt at this time.
If the control discharge pre
essure is less than setpoint #50 minus 5.0
0 PSI or .5 barr (below the zo
one): If the con
ntrol
discharge pressure chang
ge is increasing (current valu
ue previous vvalue) more th
han twice the vvalue of setpo
oint #53
minus 20.0 PSII or 1.3 bar the
en the pressurre is
and the control discharge pressure is grreater than settpoint #50.0 m
oo fast close
e the valve by the calculated
d adjustment. IIf the control d
discharge presssure change is
increasing to
increasing (c
current value previous value) more than
n the value of ssetpoint #53 th
hen the pressu
ure is increasin
ng too
slow open
n the valve by the
t calculated adjustment. Else
E make no adjustment att this time. Else
e make no adjjustment
at this time.
essure is withiin the zone: If the control disscharge presssure change is increasing (cu
urrent
value prev
vious value) more
m
than the value
v
of setpoint #53 then clo
ose the valve by 1 percent. If the control d
discharge
pressure change is decrea
asing (currentt value previo
ous value) mo
ore than the va
alue of setpoin
nt #53 then ope
en the
valve by 1 percent.
p
10.
15.11.1
Type
e of Conden
nser, Modula
ating Individual Type
ses water to prrovide cooling to the compre

essors. The AO
O Modulating Valve will mod
dulate the
This type of condenser us
b
upon thiis discharge pressure.
cold water based
The individu
ual condenser must be set up in the Comp
pressor Base sscreen.
The control will be the sam

me as in the Modulating
M
Com
mmon type exxcept that the ccontrol discharge pressure w
will be
developed for
fo each compressor.
Condenserr Faults
ny one of the d
point must also
o be active the
OCKED
and this setp
OUT and an
enerated.
92
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
15.11.1
11.
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Typ
pe of Conde
enser, RO Sh
hared Type
The RO Sha
ared type has a bank of fans
s that are sharred between tw
wo consecutivve compressorrs. The numbe
er and
location of th
he fan are spe
ecified under th
he Compresso
or Base button
n. This is simila
ar to the RO S
Step Individual set up.
Compressor one and two will share the fan bank that is specified in
n the compresssor one grid under the Compressor
Base button
essure
for this bank
k of fans.
Compressor two and three will share the fan bank tha
at is specified in the compressor two grid u
under the Com
mpressor
Base button
essure
for this bank
k of fans.
In a unit with
h three compre
essors, comprressor three will
w not have a ffan bank asso
ociated with it. It shares compressor
2s fan bank
k.
Note: the las
st compressorr will not be ch
hecked as it ha
as no fans asssociated with itt.
Condenserr Faults
ny one of the d
and this setp
point must also
o be active the
OCKED
OUT and an
enerated.
12.
15.11.1
Type
e of Conden
nser, Dual V8
8 Type
This is a spe
ecial type of co
ondenser. It is a common air type that hass two stages o
of fans plus Fa
an VFD. The co
ontrol of
the fan spee
ed will be different depending on whether one or two sta
ages are on. A
All compressorrs are checked
d to
develop the control discha
arge pressure.. All compress
sors should be
e in the same ffan bank.
A compress
sor must be run
nning and the delay counterr, setpoint #49
9, has counted
d down to zero
o before the syystem will
check to dettermine the sta
atus of this typ
pe of condense
er.
essure is less than setpoint #45 both cond
denser stagess are off and th
he fan speed iss zero.
93
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7

essure is grea
ater than setpo
oint #45 and le
ess than setpo
oint #46 stage 1 will be on. T
The fan
speed will be equal the va
alue of (setpoin
nt #55 minus setpoint
s
#54) d
divided by (settpoint #46 min
nus setpoint #4
45) this
will be multip
plied by (contrrol discharge pressure
p
minus setpoint #46
6) plus setpoin
nt #54.
essure increas
ses while in sttage 1 above tthe value of se
etpoint #46 plu
us setpoint #48
8 for the
time contain
n in setpoint #4
49 stage 2 will be entered. Both
B
relays willl be on and the
e fan speed w
will be equal the
e value of
(setpoint #55 minus setpo
oint #54) divide
ed by setpoint #46 this will b
be multiplied byy (control disccharge pressurre minus
setpoint #46
6) plus setpoin
nt #54.
If the speed of the conden
nser fan is less
s than setpointt #54 it will be set to that value or if the speed of the con
ndenser
fan is greate
er than setpoin
nt #55 it will be
e set to that va
alue.
15.11.1
13.
Typ
pe of Conde
enser, Comm
mon VFD Fan
n w/Bypass Type
on VFD Fan with

w a Bypass type
t
of conden
nser has one ffan. All compre
essors will use
e this fan; makke sure
The Commo
that all comp
pressors in the
e Compressorr Base point to
o the same com
mmon fan ban
nk. The above setup shows that
there is one condenser sta
age. Howeverr this type requ
uires the follow
wing three con
nsecutive relayy outputs to be
e set up.
For example
e:
This type of condenser requires one con

ndenser fault. If the fault occcurs then the V
VFD will be byypassed and th
he fan
will run at 10
00% if needed
d.
The followin
ng setpoints wiill be used.
45
CND
D STG1 ON
Air coole
ed- When the discharge pre
essure is above
ve this value; tu
urn on the firstt
stag
ge of the condenser fans.
Safety Time
T
Field: If th
his field is not equal to zero then a compre
essor that is in
n
starrtup state will not
n control the
e discharge pre
essure.
46
CND
D STG1 OFF
Air coole
ed- If stage 1 is on and the d
discharge presssure drops be
elow this value
e
turn
n off the first stage of conden
nser fans.
54
CND
D MIN SPD
Minimum
m speed perce
entage for variiable speed co
ondenser conttrol.
55
CND
D MAX SPD
Maximum speed perc
centage for varriable speed ccondenser con
ntrol.
94
90
COND FAULT
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
This setpoint is used to determine the action when a system has condensers
with fault indicators and one indicates a fault.
If this setpoint is active and a condenser fault occurs, a setpoint alarm message
will be generated. If this setpoint type is LOCKOUT then all of the
compressors associated with this fault will be locked off.
Or
Time in seconds for the delay before the bypass can be used when a fault has
occurred for a condenser type of Common VFD Fan w/Bypass.
Fan control when there is no fault:

The control discharge pressure is developed based upon all compressors.
The first relay, VFD LOAD, is on and the second relay, VFD BYPS, is off.
When the control discharge pressure is greater than the value of setpoint #45 the third relay, VFD ENAB, will
be turned on and the VFD will be set to the value of setpoint #55. If the control discharge pressure
decreases the VFD will be modulated between setpoints #54 and #55 based upon the control discharge
pressure.
Assume setpoint values
45
46
54
55
90
CND STG1 ON
CND STG1 OFF
CND MIN SPD
CND MAX SPD
COND FAULT
250.0P
170.0P
20.0%
100.0%
30s
When the discharge control pressure is greater than 250.0P the relay VFD ENAB will be on and the VFD on
the fan will be set to 100.0%.
If the discharge control pressure drops to 210.0 the fan speed will be set to 60.0%. The discharge control
pressure is half of its cut in and cut out range (250.0 170.0 = 80.0 / 2 = 40.0 = 170.0 = 210.0) therefore,
the VFD will be positioned to half of its range (100.0 20.0 = 80.0 / 2 = 40.0 + 20.0 = 60.0).
The VFD will continue to be modulated in this matter until the discharge control pressure drops below 170.0.
If this happens the VFD will be at 0.0% and relay VFD ENAB will remain on. If the pressure goes above
170.0 the VFD will be modulated. For example if the discharge control pressure goes to 190.0 the VFD will
be set to 50.0%.
Fan control when there is a fault:
If a fault occurs, an alarm message will be generated, relay VFD LOAD will be turned off and its state will be
LOCKOFF, relay VFD ENAB will be off, the VFD speed will be set to 0% and the bypass, VFD BYPS, will be
enabled if needed after waiting for 30 seconds, setpoint #90. Once the fan bypass is enabled and the
discharge control pressure goes above 250.0 the bypass will be turned on enabling the fan to run at 100.0%
and it will remain on regardless of the discharge control pressure.
If the fault resets itself, no longer on, the state of VFD LOAD will be set to AUTO, the VFD BYPS relay will be
turned off and VFD will be enabled to control the fan speed if it is needed.
15.12. Chiller Barrel Heater Options

Chiller Barrel Heater, if specified a heater for the chiller barrel will be controlled based upon ambient
temperature and setpoint #134, BARREL HEATER.
95
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
15.13. Hot Gas Bypass (Screw Chillers)

Will be turned on/off depending on pressure and/or temperature if the appropriate setpoints are active.
LEAVING LIQUID SETPOINTS (LLSP) and LOW SUCTION SETPOINTS INACTIVE (LSSP)If both setpoints are inactive the HGB is enabled when the machine is unloaded to within 25% of the
minimum slide percentage.
LEAVING LIQUID SETPOINTS ACTIVEIf the LLSP is active the HGB is on when the machine is unloaded and the leaving liquid goes below
the LLSP cut in. HGB is turned off when the HGB is on and the leaving liquid temperature goes above
the LLSP cutout or the machine leaves the unloaded state.
HGB SUCTION SETPOINTS ACTIVEIf the LSSP is active the HGB is on when the machine is unloaded and the suction pressure goes
below the LSSP cut in. HGB is turned off when the HGB is on and the suction pressure goes above the
LSSP cutout or the machine leaves the unloaded state.
LEAVING LIQUID SETPOINTS (LLSP) and LOW SUCTION SETPOINTS ACTIVE (LSSP)If both setpoints are active the HGB is on when the machine is unloaded and either the leaving
liquid temperature goes below the LLSP cut in or the suction pressure goes below the LSSP cut in. The
HGB goes off when the machine leaves the unloaded state or both the leaving liquid temperature goes
above the LLSP cutout and the suction pressure goes above the LSSP cutout.
15.14. Chilled Water Reset

Chilled Water Reset (CWR) is a 0 to 5 volts dc sensor input; Display Type is TRGTRST, to the MCS
microprocessor. The CWR follows the following rules using setpoint #21, MAX TRG RESET:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the input is 2.5 volts dc the CWR is zero.

At 0 volts dc the CWR is a negative value equal to the setpoint value.
At 5.00 volts dc the CWR is a positive value equal to the value in the setpoint.
For values in between 0 2.5 and 2.5 5.0 the CWR is a plus or minus value which is proportional
to the sensor input voltage.
15.15. Two Expansions Valves per Compressor Option

Two expansion valves per compressor are supported in MAGNUM V8 software. Refer to section
Compressor relay output sequence (examples) for RELAY OUTPUT order and options.
When the compressor first starts, the small LLS opens after a pre pump down. The large LLS turns on
at 30 percent above unloaded amps + 5 amps. The large LLS opens based on the following
calculations.
1. Using setpoints for full load amps and min var step calculate UNLOADED AMPS.
UNLOADED AMPS = (FULL LOAD AMPS) X (MIN VAR STEP)
2. Using setpoint full load amps and calculated unloaded amps calculate AMP TRAVEL 30.
AMP TRAVEL 30 = [(FULL LOAD AMPS) (UNLOADED AMPS)] X .3
3. Using UNLOADED AMPS and AMP TRAVEL 30 calculates LLS LARGE OFF.
LLS LARGE OFF = UNLOADED AMPS + AMP TRAVEL 30
4. Using LLS LARGE OFF calculate LLS LARGE ON.
LLS LARGE ON = LLS LARGE OFF + 5
96
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
15.16. Oil Equ

ualization Option
O
Oil equalizatiion occurs with
h common suc
ction/common
n discharge syystems. This fe
eature allows ffor a
solenoid valv
ve to open, allo
owing oil to eq
qualize betwee
en compressors. The oil equ
ualization occu
urs at a
compressor starting.
s
Referr to section Co
ompressor re
elay output se
equence (exa
amples) for R
RELAY
OUTPUT ord
der and option
ns.
e is installed th
he micro will en
nergize the Oill Equalization solenoid valve
e for 1 minute at the
If this feature
time a comprressor is turne
ed on.
15.17. Liquid Injection Option

O
This option is
s selected by accessing
a
the Compressor B
Base button:
mn click on the
e cell for the ccompressor; a drop menu givves in the optiions of
In the Liquid Injection colum
elect option de
esired.
No, 1 Stage or 2 Stage. Se
ust follow the list of available
ption is selecte
ed the second stage relay mu
e options, it m
may not be
If 2 Stage op
following the first stage rela
ay.
The first stag
ge will be turne
ed on if either the
t discharge temperature is greater or eq
qual to the disscharge
temperature setpoint #8 orr suction press
sure is less tha
an the unsafe suction setpoiint #80 plus .5
5 if Metric
else 5.0 PSI.
If 2 Stage ha
as been selecte
ed, the second
d relay will be turned on if th
he discharge te
emperature is greater
or equal to th
he discharge te
emperature se
etpoint #8 pluss 2.5 if Metric e
else 5.0 degre
ees and the firsst relay
has been on for a time greater that the safety
s
time of tthis setpoint.
If the Slide Multiple
M
cell of relay
r
output fo
or the first stag
ge of liquid inje
ection is not eq
qual to zero the
en this
relay will be turned
t
on during the fast unload logic.
15.18. Oil Coo

oler Option
Oil cooler option can be sp
pecified for com
mpressors with
h oil. This featture requires a temperature sensor to
capture the oil
o seal temperrature, a relay out to energizze the oil coole
er and the OIL
LCOOLER ON
N setpoint
(#145) to be active. Refer to
t section Compressor rellay output seq
quence (exam
mples) for RE
ELAY
OUTPUT ord
der and option
ns.
If the oil seal temperature is
i above the va
alue in the settpoint for longe
er than the tim
me specified, th
he relay
output is ene
ergized. The re
elay output willl remain on un
ntil the tempera
ature is less 5
5.0F degrees b
below the
setpoint value.
15.19. Oil Pum

mp Control Option
OIL PUM
MP ALWAYS ON:
O The oil pump will alwayys be on when
n the associate
ed compresso
or is on. If
the oil PS
SI drops below
w the value of setpoint #74, shut down the
e associated ccompressor with a
LOW DIFFERENTIAL
L alarm. Keep the
t oil pump o
on after the compressor is tu
urned off regarrdless of
97
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
the reason, for the time specified in setpoint #62.
OIL PUMP CYCLES:

After the compressor has been running for 2 minutes and when the
discharge PSI minus the suction PSI is greater than the value in setpoint #74 (OIL PUMP OFF) the
oil pump will be turned off. If the discharge PSI minus the suction PSI drops 10 PSI below the value
of setpoint #74 the oil pump will be turned on.
OIL PUMP LUBE ONLY: After the compressor has been running for 2 minutes and when the
discharge PSI minus the suction PSI is greater than the value in setpoint #74 (OIL PUMP OFF) the
oil pump will be turned off. If the differential PSI has not been reached after 5 minutes, shut down
the associated compressor with a LOW DIFFERENTIAL alarm. Once the differential psi has been
reached and the oil pump turned off, if the discharge PSI minus the suction psi drops 5 psi below
the value of setpoint #74, shut down the associated compressor with a LOW DIFFERENTIAL
alarm.
15.20. Oil Differential Calculation

The calculation is OIL PRESSURE minus DISCHARGE PRESSURE for chillers with external oil pumps.
For all other software the calculation is OIL PRESSURE minus SUCTION PRESSURE. This provides
the flexibility of using oil pressure if available or if not, discharge pressure can be used in place of the oil
pressure. This is set up in the compressor information section of MCS-Config by pointing the oil
pressure sensor to the discharge pressure sensor. The difference between oil pressure and discharge
pressure is the drop across the oil filter.
On units with both oil and discharge pressure sensors you have the ability to generate an oil filter alarm
and shut down the compressor.
15.21. On/Off Switches
The following digital input switches can be associated with the system, their action will affect the
chiller package or an individual compressor, then action will only affect that compressor:
Flow switch, if off the system has lost flow. The system wills either lock out, if NO FLOW setpoint is
active, or shut down, if NO FLOW setpoint is inactive.
Pump down switch, if on and the compressor is off, will not start the compressor. If the compressor
is on, the system moves to the pump down state to begin the process of turning off the
compressor(s) in normal steps.
Run/Stop, if off the system will not run. This is usually wired to a RUN/STOP switch that is manually
positioned. If the system is running, the system moves all compressors (compressor) to off in
normal steps. (If a RUN/STOP and a Network RUN/STOP are both available they operate in
series.)
Network Run/Stop, if off the system will not run. This input is provided by another system that
resides on the network. It functions in the same matter as the Run/Stop switch.
Emergency Stop switch, if on, the system will be shut down immediately and will remain disabled
until the switch is off.
15.22. Low Suction Unloading and Holding

This option is activated when the setpoint #78, LO SUCT UNLD, is active. The purpose of this option is
to take corrective action prior to a safety being tripped. When the suction pressure is below the value
98
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
calculated by adding the value of this setpoint to the value of the LOW SUCTION setpoint for the time
specified, the system will turn on the WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and take
the following action:
For a fixed step compressor, the system will turn off one step of capacity associated with that
compressor until that compressor is in an UNLOADED state that is all steps except one are
unloaded. The compressor (compressor) state will be LO SUCT HOLD. The compressor will remain
in that state until the capacity control indicates that another step is to be unloaded or if after 5
minutes the suction pressure has turned to normal.
For an infinite step compressor, the system will begin unloading that compressor until the suction
pressure rises above the calculated value. During this time the compressor (compressor) state is
LO SUCT UNLOAD. Once this pressure has been reached, the compressor (compressor) state will
be LO SUCT HOLD. The compressor will remain in that state until the capacity control indicates that
less capacity is needed or if after 5 minutes the suction pressure has turned to normal.
Normal pressure is the value calculated by adding the value of the LO SUCT RELD setpoint 79 to the
value of the LOW SUCTION setpoint 77.
Refer to setpoint #78 and 79 for additional information.
15.23. High Discharge Pressure Unloading and Holding

This option is activated when the setpoint #82, HI DISC UNLD, is active. The purpose of this option is to
take corrective action prior to a safety being tripped. When the discharge pressure is above the value
calculated by subtracting the value of this setpoint from the value of the HI DISCH PSI setpoint for the
time specified, the system will turn on the WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and
take the following action:
unloaded. The compressor (compressor) state will be HI DISC HOLD. The compressor will remain
minutes the discharge pressure has turned to normal.
For an infinite step compressor, the system will begin unloading that compressor until the discharge
pressure drops below the calculated value. During this time the compressor (compressor) state is
HI DISC UNLOAD. Once this pressure has been reached, the compressor (compressor) state will
be HI DISC HOLD. The compressor will remain in that state until the capacity control indicates that
less capacity is needed or if after 5 minutes the discharge pressure has turned to normal.
Normal pressure is the value calculated by subtracting the value of the HI DISC RELD setpoint 83 to the
value of the HI DISC PSI setpoint 81.
15.24. High Discharge Temperature Unloading and Holding

This option is activated when the setpoint #88, HI DISC UNLD, is active. The purpose of this option is to
take corrective action prior to a safety being tripped. When the discharge temperature is above the value
calculated by subtracting the value of this setpoint from the value of the HI DISCH TMP setpoint for the
time specified, the system will turn on the WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and
take the following action:
99
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
unloaded. The compressor (compressor) state will be HI DISC HOLD. The compressor will remain
minutes the discharge temperature has turned to normal.
For an infinite step compressor, the system will begin unloading that compressor until the discharge
temperature drops below the calculated value. During this time the compressor (compressor) state
is HI DISC UNLOAD. Once this temperature has been reached, the compressor (compressor) state
will be HI DISC HOLD. The compressor will remain in that state until the capacity control indicates
that less capacity is needed or if after 5 minutes the discharge temperature has turned to normal.
Normal pressure is the value calculated by subtracting the value of the HI DISC RELD setpoint 89 to the
value of the HI DISC TMP setpoint 87.
15.25. High Ampere Unloading and Holding

This option is activated when the setpoint #75, HI AMPS %, is active. This option can only be active for
fixed step compressors. The purpose of this option is to take corrective action prior to a safety being
tripped. When the amp draw is within one-half of the calculated HI AMP safety value, the system will
turn on the WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and take the following action:
unloaded. The compressor (compressor) state will be HI AMP HOLD. The compressor will remain
minutes the amp draw has turned to normal.
15.26. Low Water Temperature Unloading and Holding

The purpose of this option is to take corrective action prior to the freeze safety being tripped. When the
leaving liquid temperature is within 1.5F or .8C degrees of the freeze safety, the system will turn on the
WARNING relay output if specified in the MCS-Config and take the following action:
unloaded. The compressor (compressor) state will be LO TMP HOLD. The compressor will remain
minutes the leaving liquid temperature has turned to normal.
For an infinite step compressor, the system will begin unloading that compressor until the leaving
liquid temperature rises above the calculated value. During this time the compressor (compressor)
state is LO TMP UNLOAD. Once the leaving liquid temperature has been reached, the compressor
(compressor) state will be LO TMP HOLD. The compressor will remain in that state until the
capacity control indicates that less capacity is needed or if after 5 minutes the leaving liquid
temperature has turned to normal.
Normal leaving liquid temperature is the value calculated by adding 3.0F or 1.6C to the freeze safety trip
value.
15.27. Energy Efficient Compressor Staging

In a multi-screw package, it may be more efficient to run the screws at less than 100% of their FLA until
all of the screws have been turned on.
100
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
The following setpoints will be used to control the screw compressor staging:
Setpoint #30, MAX SLIDE %, contains the maximum slide percentage, based upon amp draw, FLA
before the system will bring on the next compressor.
Setpoint #31, MIN SLIDE %, contains the minimum slide percentage, based upon amp draw, FLA
before the system will reduce the number of compressor that are on.
For example if the MAX SLIDE % is 80% and the MIN SLIDE % is 40 a two-screw compressor system
would be ramped up as follows:
The Lead compressor will be started at 40% and increased up to 80%. If more capacity is needed
the next compressor will be started at 40% and the first compressor decreased to 40%. The two
compressors will then have their slide positions changed together. Since there are only two
compressors, they will be ramped together up to 100% if required.
If both compressors are at 40% and less capacity is needed, one compressor will be turned off and
the other increased to 80%.
For example if the MAX SLIDE % is 75.0%, MIN SLIDE % is 45.0% and #102 = 2,
The system will bring on the first compressor at 45% of FLA and ramp it from 45 up to 75% of FLA.
This will provide the 30 to 50% of slide movement. If more capacity is needed the second
compressor will be started. Since setpoint #102 is equal to 2, the maximum will now be 100%;
Compressors 1 and 2s slide will be varied from 45 to 100% of FLA. If more capacity is needed, a
third compressor will be turned on. This will continue until all compressors are on. If less capacity is
needed, compressors will be turned off in the same manner. Note: stage 1 will be varied from 45 to
75% all other stages will be varied from 45 to 100%.
This provides the user with additional capabilities in fine-tuning the efficiency of a screw compressor.
15.28. Chilled Water Pump Control

The system will support a chilled water pump plus a backup with rotation. These must be set up in the
MCS-Config program.
Setpoint #105 and Setpoint #106 are used with this control logic.
If setpoint #105, PUMP FAILURE, is active and flow is lost for the period of time contained in the value
and only one pump is present the system will move to a LOCK OUT state. If the system has two pumps
and flow is lost the backup pump will start and the lead pump will be locked out. A lock out reset will be
required to restart the system or to reactive a locked out pump.
If this setpoint is inactive and the flow is lost, the system will move to the OFF- NO EVAP FLOW state.
When flow is returned the system will automatically restart, no reset is required.
Setpoint #106, LEAD PUMP, indicates whether the rotation option is active or which pump is the lead
pump.
If the setpoint #106s value is zero, then rotation of the pumps will occur whenever the lead pump is
turned off. If no rotation has occurred during the current day, a forced rotation at midnight will occur. This
forces at least one rotation per day.
If the setpoint #106s value is non-zero, then rotation of the pumps is inactive and the value will specify
the lead pump. This setpoint can be changed in a live unit and the appropriate action will be taken.
15.29. Process Pump / Heat Exchanger Control

The process pump control logic can provide control either a VFD or fixed stages of relay outputs. This is
specified in the Evaporator Information Section under the MAG HVAC V8 button.
101
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
The Staged (RO) option can

c be applied
d to heat excha
anger control.
NOTE: when
n Staged (RO
O) option is se
elected, setpo
oint #150 mus
st contain the
e number of
consecutive
e relay outputts that will be
e staged on an
nd off.
The Magnum
m V8 software initially suppo
ort one processs pump with co
ontrol based u
upon the proce
ess
temperature sensor. This is still support but it has bee
en expanded to
o support two process pump
ps with
rotation and control based upon pressurre.
The pump information mus
st be set up in the Evaporato
or Information Section unde
er the MAG HV
VAC V8
button. The following
f
inform
mation is required for each p
pump if used:
Pump re
elay output,
Pump VFD analog outtput if used,
VFD fault if used,
Pressure
e sensor inputt if used,
Pressure
e sensor outpu
ut if used, and
Process temperature ifi temperature control.
The following
g setpoints are
e required:
#146, PR
ROC TARGET
T. Target for th
he process pumps. This must be adjusted
d to either a
temperature or pressu
ure value.
#147, PR
ROC ZONE. Used
U
to develo
op the control zzone for proce
ess pump.
#148, PR
ROC DELAY. Delay betwee
en making adju
ustments to prrocess pump o
output.
#149, PR
ROC MAX RO
OC. The slope of the either th
he process tem
mperature or tthe pressure ccontrol
will be co
ompare to this
s value to dete
ermine if the ra
ate of change iis too great.
#150, Prroc MinVlv%. If
I the control is
s Modulating (A
AO) then this is the minimum
m opening of tthe
analog output.
o
If the co
ontrol is Stage
ed (RO) then th
his is the number of conseccutive relay outtputs that
will be sttaged on and off.
o
#197 LE
EAD ProcPmp
p. Indicates wh
hether the rota
ation option is active or whicch process pum
mp is the
lead pum
mp. If the value
e is zero, then rotation of the
e process pum
mps will occur w
whenever the lead
process pump is turne
ed off. If no rota
ation has occu
urred during th
he current dayy, a forced rota
ation at
midnightt will occur. Th
his forces at lea
ast one rotatio
on per day. Elsse if value is non-zero, then rotation
of the process pumps is inactive and
d the value willl specify the le
ead process p
pump. This settpoint can
be chang
ged in a live unit and the appropriate actio
on will be taken.
#198 PR
ROC PUMP FLT.
F
The safe
ety time of thiss setpoint is u
used to determ
mine if a proccess
pump ha
as failed.
The process pump is on whenever
w
the chilled
c
water pu
ump is on.
A control zon
ne is develope
ed for the proce
ess temperatu
ure by adding a
and subtractin
ng the value in
n setpoint
#148 (PROC
C ZONE) to setpoint #147 (P
PROC TARGE
ET). The proce
ess temperature or the contrrol
pressure is maintained
m
with
h in this zone by modulating
g the control va
alve with a 0-1
10Vdc analog output
signal or by staging
s
the pro
ocess pumps relay
r
outputs.
102
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
15.30. Control Power Relay No Stop

This option provides the capability of interrupting the power supply to the compressors in the system. A
relay output, referred to as the control relay, must be wired so that when it is off no power reaches the
compressors. This is a safety measure that will insure that the compressors are off then the system calls
for them to be off. The relay output must be indicated in the MCS-Config program and setpoint 112, NO
STOP, must be active. The system will continually monitor the amp draw of compressors that the
system has in an off state. The system will calculate the minimum amp draw by multiplying the FLA for
that compressor times the percentage value in the NO STOP setpoint. If the amp draw is greater than
this value for the time specified; the system will turn the control relay off, generate a NO STOP alarm
and place the system in a lockout state. This provides an additional level of protection.
15.31. Part Wind or Star Delta Starter

Either a part winding or star delta type of compressor starter is supported. This option is specified in the
MCS-Config program and will require two successive relay output points. When this option is specified,
setpoint #73, STARTER DLAY, must contain the delay in seconds before the second relay output is
turned on. This delay is normally 1 second for part winding or 5 seconds for a star delta starter. With this
option, when a compressor is to be turned on, the first relay output is turned on and the system will wait
the time specified in setpoint 73 before the second relay output is turned on.
15.32. Low and High Ambient Shutdown

The system supports both a low and a high ambient shut down. This option requires an ambient
temperature sensor and both LOW AMB OFF setpoint (#24) and HIGH AMB OFF setpoint (#26). The
AMBIENT OFF state is entered when the ambient temperature falls below the LOW AMB OFF setpoint
(#24) or is above the HIGH AMB OFF setpoint (#26). The system will remain in this state until the
ambient temperature rises 5.0F (or 2.5C) above the LOW AMB OFF setpoint value or drops 5.0F (or
2.5C) below the HIGH AMB OFF setpoint value. When the chiller is in this state, the individual
compressor states if active are moved to the CMP IS OFF state through the normal staging function.
One capacity STEP will be moved per second.
15.33. English, Metric or Mixed C/P sensor readings

The system supports English, Metric or Mixed C/P sensor readings. This setting is specified in the MCSConfig program. All sensor values and all software-coded offsets are automatically converted into the
option selected and displayed with the appropriate character. The following table contains the display
character:
SENSOR READING
Temperature
Pressure Gage Reading
Pressure Absolute Reading
Humidity
Digital or Switch
Amp or CT
Voltage
Refrigeration Level
ENGLISH
CHARACTER
F
P
p
%
METRIC
CHARACTER
C
B
b
%
MIXED
CHARACTER
C
P
p
%
A
V
%
A
V
%
A
V
%
NOTE: If the type of display is changed, MCS-Config will give you an option to automatically change the
value of all items in setpoints to match the new type. Their display character will be automatically
adjusted.
15.34. Compressor Auto Rotation

The auto rotation option is selected by setting the value in setpoint #103, LEAD COMP to zero. If this
value is not zero, it will contain the number of the lead compressor (compressor) and auto rotation is
103
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
disabled. Note this setpoint can be manually changed to force a different compressor as the lead
compressor or to enable auto rotation.
When this option is enabled, the system will rotate the compressors based upon the value in setpoint #
104, CMP ROTATION.
If setpoint # 104 value is zero, rotation will occur with every complete capacity cycle and the next
compressor will be selected as the lead compressor.
Else, the value is the number of days between rotations. At midnight the system will check if it is
time to rotate compressors. If yes, the system will check the run hours on each compressor and
select the one with the least amount of run hours to be the lead compressor.
If setpoint # 104 is set up as an ALARM type of setpoint, a compressor rotation message will be
generated each time a compressor is rotated.
15.35. Compressor Anti-Cycle Logic

When a compressor is to be turned off, the system will make a calculation to determine the amount of
time that the compressor shall be in an anti-cycle state. This calculation is based upon how long the
compressor has been on and setpoints #59 (ACYC OFF->ON) and #63 (ACYC ON->ON).
If the value of setpoint #63 minus the amount of time that the compressor has been on is greater than
the value in setpoint #59, the compressor will remain in the anti-cycle state for the period of time
specified in setpoint #63. Else the anti-cycle time will be set to the value in setpoint #59.
For example:
A compressor has been running for 180 seconds
#59 (ANTI-CYC OFF) = 300 seconds
#63 (ANTI-CYC ON) = 600 seconds
600 180 = 420 this is greater than setpoint #59; therefore, the anti-cycle timer will be set to 600
seconds, the value of setpoint #63.
If the compressor had been running for 12 minutes (720 seconds)
600 720 = -120 this is less than setpoint #59; therefore, the anti-cycle timer will be set to 300
seconds, the value of setpoint #59.
If the controller losses power, the length of time that the system was down will be taken into
consideration when determining whether the compressor should be in an anti-cycle state and for how
long.
15.36. Warning and Alarm Relay Outputs

Warning Relay Output will be turned on whenever the system generates a warning type of message.
These messages are:
LOW REFR TEMP UNLOAD
LOW SUCT PSI UNLOAD
HIGH DISC TEMP UNLOAD
LOW SUCT RELOAD
LOW DISC RELOAD
CICRUIT IS IN A SAFETY STATE

The system will continue to run and no safeties have been tripped.
Warning Relay Output will also be turned on whenever a compressor is placed in a safety state.
Alarm Relay Output will be turned on whenever the system generates an alarm type of message. This
indicates that a safety or lockout condition has occurred.
104
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
15.37. Vi Port Control Logic (Open Drive Screw only)

The internal volume (Vi) of the open drive screw can be dynamically varied to obtain maximum
efficiency by opening and closing solenoids that control the Vi. These solenoids are pulsed and the
duration of each pulse is contained in setpoint #114 (Vi PULSE).
Calculate a ratio of discharge pressure divided by suction pressure. This ratio is blocked between 50
and 22. The value of setpoint #115(Vi DEADBAND) is added to and subtracted from this ratio to
develop a control zone. The control zone will be recalculated based upon the time in setpoint #116(Vi
DELAY).
The Vi reading is provided by a special sensor refer to setpoints #117, #118 and #119. The system will
pulse the open or close solenoids to keep the Vi reading within the calculated control zone.
15.38. Operating Schedules

Two operating schedules per each day of the week and 8 holidays are supported. Each schedule
contains a start and end time, if the time and day of the system is within these limits the schedule is true
and the system will be allowed to run. If not, the system will be off due to schedule.
15.39. Mod-Motor Limit Control for Flooded Chiller

This option was added for Dunham-Bush flooded chillers. The Mod-Motor is a self-contained device that
modulates a valve to controls the level in a flooded chiller barrel base on a level sensor. The MAGNUM
controls two relay outputs that change the limits on the movement of the Mod-Motor (The relay outputs
change resistance on an input to the Mod-Motor. These relay outputs must be consecutive relays and
are setup in the general section of the MCS-Config for MAG V11 CHL. When none or one compressor
is on, the first Mod-Motor relay output is turned on and the second Mod-Motor relay output is off.
When 2 or more compressors are on, first Mod-Motor relay output is turned off. The second Mod-Motor
relay output will be turned on if the suction pressure is greater than 85.0 psi (5.8 if metric) and the
discharge suction pressure differential is less than 30.0 psi (2.0 if metric). Or if the second Mod-Motor
relay output is already on and the suction pressure is greater than 80.0 psi (5.8 if metric) and the
discharge suction pressure differential is less than 35.0 psi (2.4 if metric). If neither of the above is true,
then the second Mod-Motor relay output will be turned off.
15.40. Compressor lead and Rotation

Refer to Setpoints #103 and #104.
15.41. Exhaust Fan

If an Exhaust Fan exists, its status will be checked every 120 seconds. It will be turned on if any of the
following conditions exist:
o
o
Exhaust fan digital input is on

Or
Ambient temperature is greater than the valve in setpoint #107. The setpoint must be active and
a sensor input must be setup that reads the ambient temperature.
The exhaust fan will be turned off if the digital input exists, the input is off and the ambient temperature if
used is 2.5F (or .8C) below the setpoint #107.
15.42. Hot Gas Reheat (Humidity) Control

To specify the Reheat option select the Compressor Base Button:
105
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Select YES in
n the column HG
H Reheat. Th
his indicates th
hat the compre
essor selected
d will have the
necessary hott gas reheat in
nformation.
The hot gas control
c
sensorr is specified by
y selecting the
e MAG CHL B
Button:
In the Evapora
ator Informatio
on Section, in the
t Reheat Co
ontrol cell sele
ect the input se
ensor that will be used
to control the hot gas reheat function.
When this opttion is selected
d the relay outt puts must be setup as follo
ows:
The hot gas re

eheat relays are
a required an
nd they must fo
ollow the last o
option selected.
The following setpoints mus
st be set up:
129
130
131
132
133
RH CUTIN
C
RH CUTOUT
C
ADJ
RH START
S
DLY
RH BLEED
B
DLY
RH STAGE
S
DLY
Reheat cutt in temperature

Reheat cuttout temperatu
ure is develop
ped by adding this value to ssetpoint #129
Reheat de
elay in secondss before startin
ng
Reheat de
ng bleeding off gas
Reheat de
ng next stage of reheat
106
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Hot gas rehea

at sequence of
o operations:
(The names in
n the above ex
xample will be
e used to indica
ate the status of the relays: M-6 REHEAT
T, M-7 RHvalve, and M-8
M R-Hbleed))
Conditio
on
The reheat sta
ate is OFF. Co
ompressor is running
r
and the RH TEMP
T
is greate
er than setpoin
nt #129
plus #130. Th
he reheat state
e is OFF.
Compressor is running and the RH TEMP
P is less
than setpoint #129. The reh
heat state is
STARTING. Itt will remain in
n this state unttil the
time is greater than setpoint #131, it will th
hen
move to the ON
O state.
The reheat sta
ate is ON. The
e reheat will re
emain in
this state untill the reheat tem
mperature is greater
g
than setpoint #129 plus #13
30. When the
temperature is
s greater the state
s
will be ch
hanged
to BLEED.
The reheat sta
ate is BLEED.. . It will remain
n in this
state until the time is greate
er than setpoin
nt #132,
it will then mo
ove to the OFF
F state.
M--6 REHEAT
ON
M-7 R-Hvalv
ve
OFF
M-8 R-Hb
bleed
OFF
F
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
15.43. Outside Air Econo

omizer/Fluid
d Cooler witth Analog O
Output Conttrol
Energy conse
ervation is an im
mportant part of any Heating
g, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC
C)
system design
n and operatio
on today. The purpose
p
of an economizer/ffluid cooler is tto take advantage of
free cooling in
n addition to the use of mech
hanical cooling
g. To take full a
advantage of a
all available fre
ee
cooling a num
mber of options
s can be specified in the MC
CS-Config prog
gram.
15.43.1
1. Set up
The analog va
alve that will be
e modulated is
s selected in th
he Economizzer AO cell in tthe Compress
sor
Information section.
s
In this example the name is 3WAY
Y VLV.
If the economizer/fluid coole
er has separatte fans (not asssociated with condensers) a
answer yes in
n the
Economizer Fans cell, else
e No. If Yes, th
hen four additiional cells will appear: Starting Economizzer Fan
(select the firs
st fan relay outtput), # of Eco
on Fans (speccify the numbe
er of fan pointss), Starting
Economizer Fault (select the
t first fan fau
ult, this is a sen
nsor input), an
nd # of Econ F
Faults (specify
fy the
number of fau
ults)
107
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
In the above example

e
there is one fan and
d one fault asssociated with tthe economize
er/fluid cooler. If there
is more than one
o fan they must
m be consec
cutive relay ou
utputs. The sa
ame is true of tthe condenserr faults.
The condense
er fans can als
so be used to assist
a
in the fre
ree cooling fun
nction when the system is no
ot using
mechanical co
ooling. All type
es of condense
ers can be use
ed. The above
e example hass individual fan
ns per
compressor. Whenever
W
a co
ompressor is running
r
the co
ontrol of its con
ndenser fans w
will be based ssolely on
the discharge pressure of th
hat compresso
or; the conden
nser fans of co
ompressors tha
at are not runn
ning will
be controlled by
b the econom
mizer function. If the type of ccondenser is ccommon; if an
ny compressorr is on all
of the fans will be controlled
d by the highes
st discharge pressure and n
not by the econ
nomizer functio
on.
The following setpoints mus
st be set up:
107
EcoD
DelayMech
115
EcoV
VFDfanDely
119
EcoO
OffsetON
120
Eco Stg
S Dely
121
Eco MIN
M VLV%
122
Eco MAX
M VLV%
123
Eco MAX
M ADJ
124
EcoV
VlvAdjDly
Value in se
econds is the d
delay after the
e economizer iis fully loaded,, valve
opene
ed to its maxim
mum and all asssociated fanss are on, before
e the
mecha
anical cooling is enabled. . Iff this setpoint is inactive then the
d for this delayy.
value of setpoint #12
25 will be used
If the fluid cooler
c
has a ccondenser VFD
D fan associatted with it, thiss
setpoint will be the ttime delay in sseconds betwe
een adjustmen
nts to
the VF
FD. If this setp
point is inactive
e then the valu
ue of setpoint #
#124
will be
e used for this delay timer.
Temperatu
ure off set use
ed to determine
e if the econom
mizer function could
be sta
arted. The amb
bient temperatture must be le
ess than targe
et
tempe
erature minus tthe value of th
his setpoint. Fo
or example if the
target is 45.0F and tthis value is 10
0.0F then the ambient
tempe
erature must be less than 35
5.0F to enable the economizzer to
begin.
Once the economizer
e
va
alve has been opened to its maximum and
d all
nomizer if anyy have been tu
fans associated
a
onlyy with the econ
urned
on; the
e economizer function will w
wait this time, e
expressed in
seconds, before the
e first condenser fan is turne
ed on or if a VF
FD it
will be
e set to its miniimum position
n. The minimum
m setting of the VFD
is the value
v
of setpo
oint #54.
Economize
er minimum A
Analog Output valve %. Whe
en the econom
mizer
functio
on begins the vvalve is opene
ed to this value
e. When closin
ng the
valve this
t will be the
e minimum settting. This setp
point must be a
active
to indicate that the E
Economizer AO
O option is acctive.
Economize
er maximum A
Analog Outputt valve %. Thiss is the maxim
mum
that th
he valve can be
e opened.
Economize
er maximum a
adjustment to tthe Analog Ou
utput valve % w
with
each calculation.
c
Exxample: {abs(T
Target current) * Multiplier}} /
Diviso
or
Economize
er delay betwe
een output valve adjustmentts.
108
125
Eco StageDly
126
Eco MULTI
127
Eco DIVIDE
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Time delay once the valve has been opened to its maximum and
turning on the associated condenser fans.
Economizer multiplier to scale adjustment to Analog Output valve %.
The difference between the control temperature and its target will
be multiplied by this value.
Economizer divisor to scale adjustment Analog Output valve %. The
difference between the control temperature and its target will be
divided by this value.
15.43.2. Sequence of Operation

The Economizer logic will be enable whenever the ambient temperature meets the requirement as stated
in setpoint #119. The ambient temperature must be less than target temperature minus the value of this
setpoint. For example if the target is 45.0F and this value is 10.0F then the ambient temperature must be
less than 35.0F to enable the economizer function to begin.
If mechanical cooling has NOT been enabled, zero steps are wanted on and zero steps are on, when the
economizer starts the Unit State will be ECONOMIZER ONLY. When in this state mechanical cooling
will NOT be started until the economizer function has reached its maximum capacity. That is the valve is
at maximum opening and all available fans have been turned on and the control temperature is still not
with in its target zone. At this point mechanical cooling may be used.
When the economizer logic starts, the valve will be staged from the value of setpoint #121, minimum
opening, to the value of setpoint #122, maximum valve opening. The system will wait the time contained
in setpoint #124 before making any adjustment to the valve opening. The system will modulate the
Analog Output valve % to maintain the entering temperature sensor reading within the temperature
control zone.
If control temperature is above the control target, setpoints #1, and the control temperature rate
of change, slope, is greater than the value of setpoint #27, MAX ROC-, the Analog Output valve %
will be adjusted as follows:
This indicates that the control temperature is high and it is not moving toward the target fast enough;
therefore, the valve opening must be increased if possible.
The amount of adjustment will be the difference between the control temperature target (setpoints
#1) and the actual control temperature. This difference will then be scaled by the multiplier in
setpoint #126 and divided by setpoint #127. If the absolute adjustment is greater than the value of
setpoint #123 it will be limited to this value.
The economizer valve opening will be increase by this value.
If control temperature is below the control zone, setpoints #1 - setpoints #3, and the control
temperature rate of change, slope, is less than the value of setpoint #28, MAX ROC+, the Analog
Output valve % will be adjusted as follows:
This indicates that the control temperature is low and it is not moving toward the target fast enough;
therefore, the valve opening must be decreased if possible.
The amount of adjustment will be the difference between the control temperature target (setpoints
#1) and the actual control temperature. This difference will then be scaled by the multiplier in
setpoint #126 and divided by setpoint #127. If the absolute adjustment is greater than the value of
setpoint #123 it will be limited to this value.
The economizer valve opening will be decrease by this value.
109
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
If control temperature is above the bottom of control zone, setpoints #1 - setpoints #3, but less
than the control target, setpoint #1 no change to the economizer valve opening will be made.
NOTE: The control rate of change is always checked before an adjustment to the valve is made.
The purpose is to not change the valve opening if the temperature is moving toward the target at
an acceptable rate.
Once the valve has reached its maximum opening (setpoint #122), the system will wait the time specified
in setpoint #125 before checking if there are any fans associated with the economizer function. If there
are the system will turn on and off the fans in an attempt to maintain the control temperature with in the
control zone. If there is a VFD, this will be modulated in the same matter. The delay between VFD
adjustments will be the value in setpoint #115 if active else setpoint #124 will be used. Once all of the
fans directly associated with the economizer function has been turn on, the system will when check to
determine if any condenser fans can also be used. If yes these fans will then be turned on or off to
maintain the control temperature.
Once all the fans and/or VFD (if any) have been turned on and the control temperature is still greater
than the control zone for the time specified in setpoint 107 if it is active else the time in setpoint125 will be
used, mechanical cooling will be enabled.
If during the economizer function the ambient temperature becomes too high, the economizer
function will be terminated, its valve will be set to zero percent opening, and mechanical cooling
will be enabled.
If during mechanical cooling the ambient temperature drops and is now acceptable, the
economizer function will begin. Note, the Unit State will NOT change, the economizer valve will
be modulated as described above, fans directly associated with the economizer will be used, and
NO fans associated with the condensers will used.
15.43.3. Economizer Function Is To Supply Outside Air
If the purpose of the economizer is to provide outside air then there will be no fans associated with the
economizer and no condenser fans will be used. In this setup, the economizer valve opening will never
be less than the value of setpoint #121, Eco MIN VLV%. This is required to supply the minimum of
outside air.
15.43.4. Mechanical Cooling Enabled
Once mechanical cooling has been enabled only the economizer will control the individual compressor
condenser fans whose compressors have not been started. The discharge pressure will control all
others.
The percentage of the economizer valve opening will not be decreased. It will remain at its maximum
setting. All stages of mechanical cooling must be off before the economizer valve will begin to close.
15.43.5. Termination of the Economizer Function
If at any time the ambient temperature is greater than the target temperature, setpoint #1, minus the
value of setpoint #119; the economizer function will be terminated and its valve opening will be set to
zero and all fans that it is controlling will be turned off.
110
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
If at any time the control tem

mperature is le
ess than the ta
arget temperatture, setpoint #
#1, minus the 3 times
value of setpo
oint #3; the eco
onomizer func
ction will be terrminated and iits valve opening will be set to zero
and all fans th
hat it is controlling will be turn
ned off.
15.43.6
6. Example: Fluid Coole
er with VFD c
condenser ffan
The economizer AO has

h been selec
cted and there
e are no separa
ate economize
er fans.
The condense
er type is common with VFD
D control and tthe fluid coolerr economizer o
option has bee
en
selected. The
e VFD of the co
ondenser fan will
w be controllled by the eco
onomizer functtion unless anyy
compressor is
s running. If a compressor is
s running the V
VFD control will be based up
pon the highesst
discharge pre
essure and nott the economiz
zer function.
Assume the following settup:
Setpoint #
1
2
3
27
28
54
55
107
115
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
ut
Analog outpu
AO M-1
AO M-2
Name
SPPY TR
RGT
CTRL ZO
ONE+
CTRL ZO
ONEMAX RO
OCMAX RO
OC+
CND MIN
N OPEN
CND MA
AX OPEN
ECON-M
MECHdly
EconVFD
Ddelay
EcoOffse
etON
EconDely
yFans
EcoVlvM
MinVlv
EcoVlvM
MaxVlv
EcoVlvM
MaxAdj
EcoVlvDe
elay
EcoVlvM
MaxDly
EcoVlv Mul
M
EcoVlv Div
D
Va
alue
44
4.0F
2
2.0F
1.0F
-.6F
..6F
20
0.0%
100
0.0%
240s
4
45s
10
0.0F
6
60s
0.0%
100
0.0%
5.0%
3
30s
120s
3
2
Name
3WAY VL
LV
VFD LOA
AD
111
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Conditions when the run/stop was set to RUN

Ambient temperature
Control temperature
30.0F
48.5F
The ambient temperature is less than 44.0 (setpoint #1) 10.0 (setpoint #119) and no mechanical
cooling steps are on; therefore, the Unit state will be ECONOMIZER ONLY and the economizer function
will be enabled.
The 3WAY VLV, AO M-1, will be opened to its minimum valve of 0% (setpoint #121) and it will be
modulated based upon the control temperature and the target (setpoint #1). The first adjustment will be
48.5 44.0 = 4.5. This value will be adjusted by multiplier of 3 (setpoint #126) and divided by 2 (setpoint
#127) to give an adjusted value of 6.7. This value is blocked; maximum allowed adjustment, by setpoint
#123 to allow an adjustment of 5.0%. The economizer valve opening will be increased by this amount if
the temperature control rate of change is greater than the value of setpoint #27.
The economizer function will wait 30 seconds (setpoint #124) before determining the next adjustment. If
the control temperature is now 47.3F; the following adjustment will be calculated.
47.3 44.0 = 3.3 x 3 / 2 = 4.9. Since this is less than 5.0 the valve will be open an additional 4.9% if the
temperature control rate of change is greater than the value of setpoint #27.
Each adjustment will be made after a delay of 30 seconds. If the control temperature is below the control
target, setpoint #1, and above the bottom the control zone (43.0F to 44.0F) there will be no change to
valve opening.
If the control temperature drops below the control zone the valve opening will be reduced. For example if
the control temperature is 42.6F then the following calculation will be made:
42.6 44.0 = 1.4 x 3 / 2 = 2.1. Since this is less than 5.0 the valve opening will be reduced an additional
2.1%.
When the valve reaches its maximum opening of 100.0% (setpoint #122) the economizer function will
use other fans if they are available. In this example there are no fans that are associated only with
economizer but the VFD fan can now be used. At time delay of 120 seconds (setpoint #125) be for the
VFD will be modulated. Following this initial delay the VFD will be opened to its minimum opening,
setpoint #54 of 20%.
At this point the unit state is ECONOMIZER ONLY, economizer valve is at 100% and VFD will be
modulated between its minimum, setpoint #54 and it maximum, setpoint #55. The delay between these
adjustments will be 45 seconds, value of setpoint #115.
Once the VFD opening is equal to its maximum, setpoint #55; there will be a delay of 240 seconds, value
of setpoint #107. At this time the unit state will be changed and mechanical cooling will be enabled.
112
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
15.43.7
7. Example: Fluid Coole
er with condenser comp
pressor fans
s
The economizer AO has

h been selec
cted and there
e are no separa
ate economize
er fans.
The condense
er type is RO Step
S
Individua
al and the fluid
d cooler econo
omizer option h
has been seleccted. The
individual com
mpressor cond
denser fans will be controlled
d by the econo
omizer function
n unless a com
mpressor
is running. If a compressor is running the condenser fans associated
d with that com
mpressor will be
e
controlled bas
sed upon the discharge
d
pres
ssure of the co
ompressor tha
at is running an
nd not the eco
onomizer
function. The economizer fu
unction will con
ntinue to contrrol condenser fans on comp
pressors that a
are not
running.
Assume the following settup:
Setpoint #
1
2
3
27
28
107
115
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
Name
SPPY TR
RGT
CTRL ZO
ONE+
CTRL ZO
ONEMAX RO
OCMAX RO
OC+
ECON-M
MECHdly
EconVFD
Ddelay
EcoOffse
etON
EconDely
yFans
EcoVlvM
MinVlv
EcoVlvM
MaxVlv
EcoVlvM
MaxAdj
EcoVlvDe
elay
EcoVlvM
MaxDly
EcoVlv Mul
M
EcoVlv Div
D
Va
alue
44
4.0F
2
2.0F
1.0F
-.6F
..6F
240s
4
45s
10
0.0F
6
60s
10
0.0%
100
0.0%
10
0.0%
3
30s
120s
2
1
113
Anal
og
outp
ut
AO
M-1
N
Name
E
ECONOM
ZR
Conditio
ons when the
run/stop
p was set to R
RUN
Ambient temperature
Control te
emperature
The amb
bient temperatu
ure is
less than
n 44.0 (setpoin
nt #1)
10.0 (settpoint #119) an
nd no
30.0F
49.7
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
mechanical cooling steps are on; therefore, the Unit state will be ECONOMIZER ONLY and the
economizer function will be enabled.
The ECONOMZR, AO M-1, will be opened to its minimum valve of 10% (setpoint #121) and it will be
modulated based upon the control temperature and the target (setpoint #1). The first adjustment will be
49.7 44.0 = 5.7. This value will be adjusted by multiplier of 2 (setpoint #126) and divided by 1 (setpoint
#127) to give an adjusted value of 11.4. This value is blocked; maximum allowed adjustment, by setpoint
#123 to allow an adjustment of 10.0%. The economizer valve opening will be increased by this amount if
the temperature control rate of change is greater than the value of setpoint #27. NOTE: With setpoint
#126 equal to 2 and #127 equal to 1; the valve will be adjusted by 2% for every degree difference from
the target.
The economizer function will wait 30 seconds (setpoint #124) before determining the next adjustment. If
the control temperature is now 47.3F the following adjustment will be calculated.
47.3 44.0 = 3.3 x 2 / 1 = 6.6. Since this is less than 10.0 the valve will be open an additional 6.6% if the
temperature control rate of change is greater than the value of setpoint #27.
Each adjustment will be made after a delay of 30 seconds. If the control temperature is below the control
target, setpoint #1, and above the bottom the control zone (43.0F to 44.0F) there will be no change to
valve opening.
If the control temperature drops below the control zone the valve opening will be reduced. For example if
the control temperature is 42.6F then the following calculation will be made:
42.6 44.0 = 1.4 x 2 / 1 = 2.8. Since this is less than 10.0 the valve opening will be reduced an additional
2.8%.
When the valve reaches its maximum opening of 100.0% (setpoint #122) the economizer function will
use other fans if they are available. In this example there are no fans that are associated only with
economizer but the condenser fan can now be used. At time delay of 120 seconds (setpoint #125) be for
the first condenser fan will be turned on, this will be first fan of the first compressor unless it is not
available.
At this point the unit state is ECONOMIZER ONLY; economizer valve is at 100% and the compressor
fans will be used to aid in the economizer cooling. The delay between starting the condenser fans will be
30 seconds, value of setpoint #124. If all condenser fans are available, not have been placed in manual
off, the pattern of turning on the fans will be the first fan on compressor 1, after the delay the first fan of
compressor 2, after the delay the second fan on compressor 1. This will continue until all available
condenser fans have been turned on. At this point the economizer has used all of its available resources
to maintain the control temperature with in its control zone.
Once all of the condenser fans have been turned on; there will be a delay of 240 seconds, value of
setpoint #107. At this time the unit state will be changed and mechanical cooling will be enabled. When a
compressor is running, its associated condenser fans will be controlled by the discharge pressure of the
running compressors.
15.44. Extra Liquid Line Solenoid Control

Both two and three liquid line solenoid are supported for extra control. To specify, select the Compressor
Base Button:
114
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
The third sole

enoid can be co
ontrolled eithe
er on the slide wanted perce
entage or as th
he last step is o
on for
that compress
sor. The follow
wing setpoints will be used:
98
99
LL
LS#2 ON
The value, safety tim

me and delay between trips
s fields can b
be used.
This settpoint is used to
t control a 2ndd liquid line sollenoid.
Value: When
W
the chille
er capacity wa
anted is greate
er than this vallue for number of
seconds containe
ed in the Safety
ty Time Field the 2nd liquid lin
ne solenoid will
ope
en. When the compressor
c
ca
apacity is below
ow the value in
n Delay Betwee
en
Trip
ps Field the value will be turn
ned off.
Safety Time
T
Field: This field contain
ns a forced delay before the solenoid will b
be
turn
ned on. If it is zero
z
then there
e will be no de
elay.
Delay Between Trips Field: This fielld contains the
e cut off offset for turning thiss
sole
enoid off. If it is
s zero then an
n offset of 20 w
will be used.
LL
LS#3 ON
The value, safety tim
me and delay between trips
s fields can b
be used.
This settpoint is used to
t control a 3ndd liquid line sollenoid.
Value: When
W
the chille
er capacity wa
anted is greate
er than this vallue for number of
seconds containe
ed in the Safety
ty Time Field the 3nd liquid lin
ne solenoid will
ope
en. When the compressor
c
ca
apacity is below
ow the value in
n Delay Betwee
en
Trip
ps Field the value will be turn
ned off.
Safety Time
T
Field: This field contain
ns a forced delay before the solenoid will b
be
turn
ned on. If it is zero
z
then there
e will be no de
elay.
Delay Between Trips Field: This fielld contains the
e cut off offset for turning thiss
sole
enoid off. If it is
s zero then an
n offset of 20 w
will be used.
Liquid line solenoids 2 and 3 will be turne
ed on and off a
as indicated in their setpointss.
15.45. Specia
al Pattern fo
or Scroll Co
ompressors
Special patterrns have been developed for Trane Scroll 3-D compresssors, HVAC 7.00 software a
and later
are required fo
or this function
n. These patte
erns are for eith
her a 3 or 4 sccroll unit. Theyy are specified by
selecting eithe
er the Trane Trio
T for the thre
ee-compressorr package or T
Trane Quad fo
or the four-com
mpressor
package in the
e Compressorr Type selectio
on under the M
MAG CHL buttton. The seque
encing will pro
ovide
proper oil control for the Tra
ane compresso
ors.
The compress
sors set will be
e treated as on
ne compresso
or. There will be one commo
on suction presssure,
suction tempe
erature, and discharge press
sure and disch
harge tempera
ature sensors. Each compre
essor will
have an amp sensor and they must be co
onsecutive inp
puts.
New chiller sta
ates have bee
en allocated for these pattern
ns: SCROLL STEP 1 thro
ough SCROL
LL STEP
4.
1. The follow
wing is a sam
mple of the ffour-compre
essor setup::
15.45.1
Select compre
essor type:
115
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
# of Compressors and # of steps:

s
essor:
Set up compre
Set up relay outputs:

o
15.45.2
2. Pattern off the four-co
ompressor s
setup:
SCROLL STE
EP 1:
SCROLL STE
EP 2:
SCROLL STE
EP 3:
SCROLL STE
EP 4:
COM
MP A
ON
N
OF
FF
OF
F
ON
N
COMP
C
B
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
COMP C
OFF
ON
ON
ON
COMP D
OFF
ON
ON
ON
15.45.3
3. The three
e-compresso
or type will b
be setup in a
as follows:
116
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Select the com

mpressor:
# of Compressors and # of steps:

s
Set up compre
essor:
Set up relay outputs:

o
15.45.4
4. Pattern off the three-c
compressor setup:
SCROLL STE
EP 1:
SCROLL STE
EP 2:
SCROLL STE
EP 3:
COM
MP A
OF
FF
ON
N
ON
N
COMP
C
B
OFF
ON
ON
COMP C
ON
OFF
ON
15.45.5
5. Safeties are
a the same
e for both co
ompressor ttypes
The standard
d unloading an
nd holding log
gic has been incorporated with their com
mpressor statte
names. When
n a step is un
nloaded it will go to the pre vious step pa
attern. For exa
ample if the
compressor is in SCROLL
L STEP 3 and unloading is required the relay output ffor SCROLL STEP 2
will be used. The state nam
me will reflectt why the com
mpressor has unloaded.
The unloading and holding
g can result frrom high disccharge and low
w suction pre
essure and hig
gh
discharge tem
mperature.
Low and high
h amp drawn will
w be check for all comprressors that a
are on. The standard amp ssafety
checks will be
e made and iff one occurs the
t compresssor will be off on a safety o
or a lock out iff the
same safety reoccurs.
Note, the standard setpoin
nts are used for
f all safety cchecks, unloa
ading, and holding function
ns.
117
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
15.46. High Suction

S
Supe
erheat Safe
ety
To add a high
h suction superheat safety
y, activate set point #203. Iff the suction ssuperheat is g
greater
than the value of this setpo
oint for the sa
afety time, an alarm will be
e generated a
and the comprressor
will be shut down with a sa
afety or lock out
o state.
15.47. Low Te
emperature
e Safety and
d Unload (lo
ow saturate
ed suction temperaturre)
The system is
s setup to che
eck for a low refrigerant te mperature sa
afety and unlo
oad. To activa
ate this
test make settpoint #155 (L
LO REF TMP
P) active and i n the refrigerration tempera
ature column of the
Compressor SI grid in MC
CS-Config prog
gram provide
e a pointer to a sensor thatt will be checkked.
When the com
mpressor is running the sa
afety will be c hecked. If the
e sensor value is less than
n the
value of setpo
oint #155 for the time in the safety time an alarm me
essage will be
e generated a
and the
associated co
ompressor will either be placed in a safe
fety or lockoutt state.
The system will
w also deterrmine if a low temperature condition exists and there
efore stop load
ding or
unload if nece
essary. If the sensor value
e is less than the value of ssetpoint #155
5 plus the valu
ue of
setpoint #156
6 (LO REF UN
NLD) the com
mpressor state
e will be LO T
TMP UNLOAD
D. Refer to thiss state
documentation.
By using the power
p
of the se
ensor user defined logic, we
e can test any value for a low
w condition. Fo
or
example pointt the refrigeran
nt temperature
e index to a usser defined sen
nsor that pickss up the satura
ated
suction tempe
erature for thatt compressor. Make setpoint #155 active w
with the low te
emperature va
alue that
will trigger the
e safety and un
nload action an
nd you have a low saturated
d suction temp
perature condition.
15.48. Electro
onic Expans
sion Valve Control
C
Log
gic (EXV)
The EXV is set
s up in the MCS-Config
M
program
p
as fo llows:
15.48.1
1. Control lo
ogic for the EXVs
E
can b
be based upo
on either Su
uperheat or
Refrigeratte Level.
By clicking on the
e EXV Control cell under th
he Circuit Base
e button, the co
ontrol option w
will toggle betw
ween
Sup
perht and Ref Lvl control.
118
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
The
T following chart shows
s the control logic
l
for the E
EXVs with su
uperheat con
ntrol option.
119
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
120
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
15.48.2. EXV Related Setpoints.

9
SPRHT TARGET
10
SPRHT ZONE +-
11
12
13
EXV LOAD ADJ

EXV FINE ADJ
EXV COURSE
14
EXV LOAD DIV
15
EXV MIN %
16
EXV MAX %
17
LO SUPERHEAT
18
19
LOWSUCPSI DLY
EXV DELAY
20
EXV STRT TIME
This is the target for SUPERHEAT that the system will maintain. This value can
be dynamically changed, see setpoint # 110.
Safety Time Field: If equal to 0 and the superheat is within the zone and it is
either falling or rising too fast then take action.
This setpoint, plus or minus the SPRHT TARGET, defines the width of each
control zone. (opening/closing, 2x or 4x
EXV adjustment made in response to a load or unload slide adjustment
The adjustment made when in the 1st zone above or below the control zone.
This adjustment made when in the 2nd zone above or below the control zone
and the adjustments are made in 1/2 the time.
This adjustment made when above or below the 2nd control zone and the
adjustments are made in 1/4 the time.
As the amp % changes this divides the EXV % change. Calculate as follows:
(Max slide% min slide% / Max vlv% - min vlv%) +1
This is the minimum valve position allowed when modulating the expansion
valve. The calculated position is not allowed to be less than this setpoint.
This value should be set so when hot gas is applied the valve opening is
adequate.
This is the maximum position allowed when modulating the expansion valve to
maintain the SUPERHEAT target. This value should be the valve% opening
at 100% capacity + 10 to 15 %.
If the calculated SUPERHEAT remains below this value for the time specified,
the system will place the associated value in the LOW SPR STATE and
generate LOW SUPERHT alarm.
Delay in seconds when in Low Suction PSI Opening
Delay in seconds between valve adjustments. Should not be less than 48.
(When adjusting at 4x this will allow 12 seconds to see the result before
making the next adjustment.
This is a time (in seconds) to hold the valve at the start % setpoint when the
compressor starts. Since the SUPERHEAT calculation is not valid when the
compressor is not running the EXV logic sets the valve to a giving position
for a given time in order to allow the system to run and develop a valid
SUPERHEAT temperature. This setpoint contains the given time to hold
the valve at the given opening. (See setpoints #113 to #120 for the time).
Safety Time Field: If this 0 then there is not delay when a compressor is ready to
start, if it is non-zero then the compressor start will be delay for the time in
this field. This allow the EXV time to open.
The following setpoints were added to provide fine-tuning to the testing of the movement of the superheat
temperature. Refer to EXV control logic chart in a previous section.
65
EXV ZONE1
66
EXV ZONE2
Temperature differential that is used to build the EXV Zone 1 both plus and
minus. Previously was hard coded as 2 times the value of setpoint #10,
SPRHT ZONE +-.
Temperature differential that is used to build the EXV Zone 2 both plus and
minus. Previously was hard coded as 3 times the value of setpoint #10,
SPRHT ZONE +-. Note temperature above this zone is considered in zone
3.
121
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
67
68
69
70
EXV
V ROC ZONE
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
The EXV
V control logic
c will compare the value of th
his setpoint to the temperatu
ure
rate
e of change to determine the
e valve adjustm
ment when the
e temperature is
with
hin the EXV co
ontrol zone. Prreviously was hard coded ass 0.
EXV
V ROC ZONE1
The safe
ety time of this
s setpoint has delay time tha
at for the EXV control zone.
Previously was ha
ard coded as 15.
The EXV
V control logic
ure
rate
e valve adjustm
ment when the
e temperature is
with
hin the zone 1.. Previously wa
was hard coded
d as 0.4.
EXV
V ROC ZONE2
2
The safe
ety time of this
Previously was ha
ard coded as 15.
The EXV
V control logic
ure
rate
e valve adjustm
ment when the
e temperature is
with
was hard coded
d as 0.9.
EXV
V ROC ZONE3
3
The safe
ety time of this
Previously was ha
ard coded as 15.
The EXV
V control logic
ure
rate
e valve adjustm
ment when the
e temperature is
with
was hard coded
d as 0.9.
71
EXV
V TOO FAST
72
EXV
V CHANGING
G
The safe
ety time of this
Previously was ha
ard coded as 15.
The EXV
V control logic
ure
rate
e valve adjustm
ment when the
e temperature is
with
hin the zone an
nd rising too fa
ast. Previouslyy was hard cod
ded as 1.0
When th
he superheat is with the con
ntrol zone, the EXV control lo
ogic will compa
are
the value of this setpoint
s
to the temperature rrate of change
e to determine the
valv
ve adjustment when the tem
mperature is wiithin the zone and rising.
Previously was ha
ard coded as 3
3.0
15.48.3
3. EXV Conttrol States
The EXV
V Control Sta
ates are desig
gned to show the status of the compresssors expansion valve.
If the co
ompressor has
s an EXV it will
w be displaye
ed under the Status entry. The state will be
precede
ed by EXV.
D screen in th
he Status and
d then page to
o the EXV in tthe header lin
ne for the
On the Magnum LCD
valve infformation.
States:
122
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
LOCKED OUT The compressor is in a lock out state.

IS CLOSED
The associated compressor is off and the valve is closed.
PRE-PMPDWN The valve has been in a closed state and the system is requiring the
valve action.
IN STARTUP At startup the valve will remain in this state for the time in setpoint
#20. At that time the state will be changed to holding, at this point the valve control
logic will position the valve.
AT 100%
This state will be entered when the valve opening reaches 100%.
IS HOLDING
acceptable.
Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in control zone and ROC is
IS OPENING Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in control zone but rising too
fast, ROC less than 1.0.
IS CLOSING Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in the control zone and the
rate of change is acceptable, ROC greater than 0.5.
LOW SPRHT
Refer to EXV Logic Chart, force a course valve adjustment.
OPENING 4x
Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is above control zone.
OPENING 2x Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in control zone but rising too
fast, ROC greater than 1.0.
LO PSI OPN Refer to EXV Logic Chart, state indicates that a low suction pressure
condition exists. The suction pressure is less than setpoint #77 (LOW SUCTION) plus
twice the value of setpoint #79 (LOW SUCT RELOAD) and the superheat is greater
than setpoint #9 (SUPERHT TRGT) plus twice the value of setpoint #10 (SPRHT
ZONE+-).
CLOSING 2x Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in the control zone and the
rate of change is acceptable, ROC less than 0.5 and greater than 1.0.
CLOSING 4x Refer to EXV Logic Chart, superheat is in control zone but falling too
fast, ROC less than 1.0.
HI LVL CLS
This state indicates that a high refrigerate level. This state is entered
if setpoint #109 (HiRefLevel) is and the super heat is greater than the value of this
setpoint.
IS MOP CLS Refer to EXV Maximum Operating Pressure. Maximum operating
pressure option is active and it is forcing the EXV to close. In this state the EXV
valves opening will be reduced.
IS MOP HLD Refer to EXV Maximum Operating Pressure. Maximum operating
pressure option is active and it is forcing the EXV to hold.
15.48.4. EXV Maximum Operating Pressure
The following setpoints are used by this option:
123
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
199
9
MOP TAR
RG PSI
200
0
201
1
MOP PSI ZONE

MOP ADJ % TME
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
If this setpoint is active, maxximum operatin

ng pressure (M
MOP) control w
will be
added to the
t EXV contro
ol logic.
Used
U
to develo
op the control zone around ssetpoint #199
This
T setpoint is
s used if MOP
P is active.
The
T amount off EXV valve cllose adjustment that will be made with eacch valve
adjustmen
nt when the MO
e closed.
OP is forcing tthe EXV value
Safety
S
Time Field: The time delay betwee
en making adju
ustments to the
e EXV
valves when in MOP co
ontrol is the saffety time of thiis setpoint.
Note settpoint #199 must

m
be active
e if the suction
n pressure is to be checke
ed for maximu
um
operatin
ng pressure.
If the suction pressurre is above the MOP contro
ol zone, see ssetpoints #19
99 and #200 tthe EXV
state willl be changed
d to IS MOP CLS.
C
The EXV
V valve openiing will be clo
osed by the va
alue in
setpointt #201 with ea
ach adjustmen
nt. The safetyy time of setpoint #201 will be the delay be
etween
making adjustments
a
to
o the EXV valv
ves. The EXV will remain in this state untill the suction pressure
drops be
elow the top off the MOP con
ntrol zone. At tthis point the sstate will be ch
hanged to IS M
MOP
HOLD.
In the IS
S MOP HOLD state the EXV
V valves open
ning cannot be
e increased but it can be clossed. The
EXV will remain in this
s state until the
e suction presssure drops below the MOP ccontrol zone. A
At that
time the EXV control state
s
will chang
ge to IS HOLD
DING and normal EXV con
ntrol will resume.
5. Tandem EXV
E
Setup
15.48.5
The Mag
gnum supporrts tandem EX
XV control. Ho
owever a sep
parate compre
essor must be
e set up
to suppo
ort this functio
on. Therefore, the maximu m compresso
ors that can b
be supported with
tandem EXV are ten. The tandem EXV compre
essors must fo
ollow the activve compresso
ors in the
system.
The follo
owing is an ex
xample of a system
s
with o ne compress or and one sttep with tande
em EXV.
Click on
n the MAG HV
VAC V8 button
n and in the G
General Inform
mation sectio
on of the Magn
num
HVAC V8
V Information
n Screen ente
er the numberr of compresssors and step
ps:
Click on
n the Compres
ssor Base buttton and in th e Magnum C
Compressor B
Base Screen the base
compres
ssor informatiion will be enttered. The acctive compresssors informattion is to be
completted as normall and the tand
dem EXV info
ormation will b
be provided as needed.
Note the
e Type of LLS
S cell must be
e EXVandLLS
S for the active
e compressor and EXV forr the
tandem compressor. This is the on
nly cell that iss required for the tandem E
EXV.
In the ne
ext section the EXV Outpu
ut cell must be
e set up for bo
oth the EXVss
124
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
In the ne
ext section the active comp
pressor is asssociated with its tandem E
EXV in the Tan
ndem
EXV Co
ompressor #. Compressor
C
#1
# ties to com
mpressor #2, this is the tan
ndem EXV. Th
he
Suction Group cells are
a 1 and 2 re
espectively.
Click on
n the Compres
ssor SI button
n and in the M
Magnum Com
mpressor SI Sccreen the sen
nsor
informattion for the co
ompressor willl be entered. The active co
ompressors information is to be
completted as normall and only the
e Suction Presssure and Suction Temperrature must be
entered for the tande
em EXV. The different sucction temperatture provides the unique control for
the tand
dem EXV.
The follo
owing is an ex
xample of a system
s
with tw
wo compresso
ors and four ssteps with tan
ndem
EXV.
Click on
n the MAG HV
VAC V8 button
n and in the G
General Inform
mation sectio
on of the Magn
num
HVAC V8
V Information
n Screen ente
er the numberr of compresssors and step
ps:
Click on
n the Compres
ssor Base buttton and in th e Magnum C
Compressor B
Base Screen the base
compres
ssor informatiion will be enttered. The acctive compresssors informattion is to be
completted as normall and the tand
dem EXV info
ormation will b
be provided as needed.
Note the
e Type of LLS
S cell must be
e EXVandLLS
S for the active
e compressor and EXV forr the
tandem compressor. This is the on
nly cell that iss required for the tandem E
EXV.
125
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
In the ne
ext section the EXV Outpu
ut cell must be
e set up for alll the EXVs
In the ne
ext section the active comp
pressors are associated w
with its tandem
m EXV in the T
Tandem
EXV Co
ompressor #. Compressor
C
#1
# ties to com
mpressor #3, this is the tan
ndem EXV an
nd
Compre
essor #2 ties to
t compressor #4, this is th
he tandem EX
XV. The Suctiion Group cellls are 1,
2, 3 and
d 4 respective
ely.
Click on
n the Compres
ssor SI button
n and in the M
Magnum Com
mpressor SI Sccreen the sen
nsor
informattion for the co
ompressor willl be entered. The active co
ompressors information is to be
completted as normall and only the
e Suction Presssure and Suction Temperrature must be
entered for the tande
em EXV. The different sucction temperatture provides the unique control for
the tand
dem EXV.
15.49. Test fo
or Voltage Out
O of Balan
nce (8.02-A
A)
This testt requires the following
f
setpo
oint to be activve.
207
UNB
BAL VOLTS
If this se
etpoint is activ
ve, the avera
age of the volttage sensors is developed.
Eac
ch individual voltage
v
senso
ors is comparred to this ave
erage, if the
diffe
erence is grea
ater than the value of this setpoint an alarm message is
gen
nerated and th
he unit is lockked out.
Only volttage sensors that

t
are speciffied will be inclluded in the avverage and the out of balance test.
15.50. Expand
ded Testing
g of Low an
nd High Off (8.02-E)
This testt requires the following
f
setpo
oint to be activve.
126
208
LOW SI OFF
(Only HVAC)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Presently there is Low SI Off cell in the circuit sensor input grid. This has
been expanded to be either a digital input or an analog input.
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is a digital input, when it is on
this circuit will be disabled. The circuit will be enabled when the digital is off.
209
HI SI OFF
(Only HVAC)
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is an analog input, when its value
is less than the value of this setpoint the circuit will be disabled. The circuit
will be enabled when the sensor reading is greater than this value plus the
value in the safety time. The value in the safety time cell will be scaled
based upon the number of decimals in this setpoint
Presently there is High SI Off cell in the circuit sensor input grid. This has
been expanded to be either a digital input or an analog input.
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is a digital input, when it is on
this circuit will be disabled. The circuit will be enabled when the digital is off.
If this setpoint is active and the above sensor is an analog input, when its value
is greater than the value of this setpoint the circuit will be disabled. The
circuit will be enabled when the sensor reading is less than this value minus
the value in the safety time. The value in the safety time cell will be scaled
based upon the number of decimals in this setpoint.
Purpose was to provide flexibility is setting up tests to disable circuits.
15.51. New Large Character Screen Displaying Control Information (8.03-B)

New information screen added with large character size for ease of reading.
Screen is accessed from the Main Menu by pressing the F3 key.
ACTUAL DISPLAY
09:55
Control On
OUT
IN
48.1F
45.3F
DESCRIPTION
HH:MM
Heading
First line is sensor that is the controlling sensor; either entering

or leaving
Second line is contains the other value
The last line is the refrigerant type
If the scrolling information option has been selected, this screen will be included in the screens that
are scrolled.
15.52. The Actual Circuit Amp Value added to Circuit Status Screen (8.03-B)
The amp value is included in the first page of each compressor information screens. Using the left
arrow button accesses it.
127
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
15.53. Low Diischarge Su

uper Heat Test
T
to Econ
onomizer (8..03-F)
Requires
s the following
g setpoint.
210
ECO
O LL3 D-SHT
(On
nly HVAC)
If the ec
conomizer liqu
uid line solen
noid exists and
d it is controllled on %, not last
step, ad
dd a low disch
harge superhe
eat test beforre checking w
whether the
solenoid
d should be tu
urned on or n
not.
er heat is lesss than the valu
ue of this setp
point plus
If the discharge supe
_LO_DISCH_
_SUPERHEA
AT, #84,
SP_
do not
n test wheth
her the soleno
oid should be
e turned on orr not, turn it offf.
15.54. Tonnag
ge and KW Information (8.03-F)
If tonnag
ge and KW inp
put is available
e an additional screen has b
been added to the unit statuss screens
to show this informatio
on
Set up fo
or tonnage and
d KW (the Volts A, Amps A and KW senssors in the Unitt Power sectio
on will be
used):
Two new
w types of sens
sor have been
n added to sup
pport these ca
alculations.
1) TONS
S type is a virtu
ual sensor that will calculate
e the unit tonna
age.
The tonn
nage = [flow * (chiller in temp
p chiller out ttemp)] / 24
The flow
w (GPM) must be contained in a sensor tha
at is selected in the Temperature / GPM / Power
Factor SI
S cell and the value of 24 must
m be set up in the Multiplier cell.
This calc
culation is valid
d for a direct expansion
e
chilller barrel.
128
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
Set up sensor for syste

em tonnage, M-1
M will contain the calculate
ed tonnage an
nd M-2 contain
ns the
flow in GPM:
G
2) KW ty
ype is a virtual sensor that will
w calculate th
he unit KW usa
age.
The KW = AMPS * VO
OLTS * PF * .0
00173
mps A cell in tthe general infformation
The AMP
PS value is ob
btained from th
he sensor indiccated in the Am
section, if not used the
en the Amps A cell from eacch circuit will be
e used to deve
elop the ampss value.
The VOL
LTS value is obtained
o
from the
t sensor ind
dicated in the V
Volts A cell in tthe general infformation
section, this must be provided.
p
The pow
wer factor (PF) must be conta
ained in a sen
nsor that is sele
ected in the T
Temperature / GPM /
Power Factor
F
SI cell and
a the value of
o 1730 must b
be set up in th
he Multiplier ccell.
Set up sensor for syste
em kilowatt, M-1
M will contain
n the calculate
ed KW and M-2
2 contains the
e PF:
ge/KW informa
ation is availab
ble the followin
ng screen has been added tto the Status sscreens:
If tonnag
L DISPLAY
ACTUAL
09:55
0
Unit
U
60/
/65
UNIT IS
S UNLOADED
025
5:42;33
AMPandVLT
A
KWandTON
KW/TON
K
110.0A
73
3.8K
0.
.15
388.0V
479T
4
CRIPTION
DESC
HH:MM
H
AMPandVLT
A
AMPS
VOLTAGE
CHILLER UNIT
LEV/ENT
CURRENT C
CONTROL STAT
TE
TIME IN C
CURRENT STAT
TE
KWandTON
KW/TON
KW
KW/TON with 2 decimals
TONS
The above screen is based

b
upon flo
ow of 230 GPM
M and power fa
actor (PF) of 1
1. All other values in
the calcu
ulation are disp
played on the screen.
15.55. Added Oil Flow Sa

afety (8.03-J
-J)
Requires
s the following
g setpoint if HV
VAC configurattion type, if CE
ENT configura
ation type then
n this is
setpoint #214.
129
211
NO OIL FLOW
(Only HVAC)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
If this setpoint is active and there is a sensor in the Oil Flow Switch cell of
the circuit grid a test will be made for no oil flow.
If the sensor is an analog input, then a low condition indicates that there is
no oil flow
This safety is only checked when the compressor is running.
130
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
16. MAGNUM Alarms and Safeties

16.1. Introduction
There are three types of alarms that are generated by the MAGNUM control logic:
Information only alarms,

MAGNUM system alarms and
Chiller setpoint safety alarms.
All of the alarms have the same format. The alarm is identified and it is date time stamped. Alarms can
be viewed from the MAGNUM by pressing the ALARM STATUS (4) key or from the MCS-Connect
program.
16.2. Information only alarms

16.2.1.
System generated alarms
The following alarms are generated to provide information; they will not cause a change in the control
algorithm such as a lock out condition or a relay output being forced off.
POWER FAILED
POWER RETURNED
COMPUTER RESET
LCD FAILURE
HW DATE INVALID
HW TIME INVALID
SW DATE INVALID
SW TIME INVALID
RAM INTEGRITY
WATCHDOG RESET
LOST A/D CONVTR
LOST DISPLAY
CF INIT ERROR
16.2.2.
Alarms as a result of individual action
The following alarms indicate that an individual took action:
ALARMS CLEARED
STPT CHANGED
RO MANUAL
AO MANUAL
SI MANUAL
POINT INFO CLEAR
CLOCK SET
CFG DOWNLOADED
NETWORK ADDR CHG
RS485 CHANGED
CF CARD REMOVED
CF CARD INSERTED
16.2.3.
Alarms generated by the control algorithm
The following alarms indicate that the control algorithm took action:
ROTATED LEAD
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
131
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
16.3. MAGNUM system alarms

16.3.1.
Alarms are generated by the MAGNUM control algorithm:
16.3.1.1.
Configuration problem alarms
These alarms indicate a problem with the configuration file that has been loaded into the system. The
system is not operational, a configuration must be transmitted to the unit form MCS-Connect or the
config chip must be replaced with a valid one.
INVALID CONFIG. (Check if sums are incorrect)

INVALID CFG VER (version number of the configurator is invalid)
INVALID CFG TYPE (the type does not agree with software, chiller software with a
home unit configuration)
16.3.1.2.
MCS local network problem alarms
These alarms indicate problems with the MCS local network, the system can be accessed but the
system is in a lock out state, LOST I/O.
MCS-I/O 1 LOST
MCS-I/O 2 LOST
MCS-I/O 3 LOST
MCS-STAT OFFLINE
LOST IO SHUTDOWN
16.3.1.3.
Key sensors problem alarms
This alarm indicate a problem with a key sensor, it is either shorted or open. The alarm will contain
ALARM followed by the 8-character name of the sensor.
The following sensors related to the entire system are tested:
Leaving liquid, if failed: lock out the chiller system
Returning liquid, if failed: alarm only no lock out
Ambient temperature, if failed: alarm only no lock out

The following compressor sensors are tested. If they fail that compressor only is locked out.
Suction pressure and temperature
Discharge pressure and temperature
Oil pressure and temperature
Motor temperature (if it is an analog input device)
16.3.1.4.
EMERGENCY STOP alarm
This alarm indicates that the emergency stop switch has been turned on. The system can be accessed
but the entire system is in a lock out state.
EMERGENCY STOP
16.4. Setpoint safety alarms

16.4.1.
Introduction
The MAGNUM chiller algorithm incorporates a number of safety checks to ensure that the various
components that make up the chiller package are not damaged. These types of safeties are based
upon setpoints. When a safety trips, the condition exists for the time in the Time (sec) cell, for the first
time; the compressor will be set to SAFETY TRIPPED state. The compressor will remain in SAFETY
TRIPPED state for the time in the Safety Down Time (sec) cell and then move to the CMP
ANTICYCLE or CMP IS OFF state where the compressor will be allowed to run if required. If the
same safety trips occurs again within the time in the Lockout Delay Hrs cell of the first trip, the
compressor will be set to CMP LOCKED OUT state, which requires a manual reset to restart the
132
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
compressor. In this matter the MAGNUM attempts to take corrective action to protect the compressors
but avoid nuisance trips.
The time the safety times that are specified in the individual setpoints enables the safety/lockout to be
unique for each setpoint.
16.4.2.
Sensor inputs used in conjunction with MAGNUM setpoint safeties:
Suction Pressure
Pressure transducer to read the suction pressure. (Optional digital input)
Discharge Pressure
Pressure transducer to read the discharge pressure. (Optional digital input)
Oil Pressure
Pressure to read the oil pressure (optional digital input)
Oil Differential Pressure
Calculated valve of the oil pressure as follows:
- Fixed step compressors, oil psi minus suction psi
- Screws with oil pump, Oil psi minus discharge psi
- Screws without oil pump, discharge psi minus suction psi
Oil Temperature
Either a temperature sensor or a digital input that indicates when a high temperature condition exists.
Discharge Temperature
Motor Temperature
Motor Amps
Sensor input that measures AMP draw of the compressor. (Optional digital input)
Motor Fault
A digital input that indicates when a motor fault condition exists or an analog sensor that will read
resistance value. If an analog sensor, a setpoint is required that contains the resistance value that the
sensor will indicate on safety trip. This is a general fault indicator, that may have been caused by high
temperature, amp draw etc.
Liquid Temperature
Temperature sensor that can be used to detect a freeze condition
Compress Proof
A digital input that when on indicates that a compressor is running.
Flow Switch
A digital input that indicates that flow through the chiller barrel exists. There can be one switch per
chiller or one for each compressor.
16.4.3.
Setpoint safeties
For a safety to be interrogated, both the associated sensor input and the lockout setpoint must be active.
If a safety trips, the alarm name will consist of the setpoint name plus additional identification such as
point number or compressor number if applicable.
The system exercises smart safety testing in the following manner:
If a safety applies to a compressor and it is an active lockout type of a setpoint, the first time this
safety trips an alarm will be generated and the compressor will be shut down and placed in a safety
133
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
state. The system will attempt to reactivate this compressor after waiting the length of time specified
in this setpoint, safety down time. If successful the system will continue to run. If the same safety
trips the time specified in the lockout delay time, the compressor will be locked off and a manual
intervention is required. If the lockout delay time is set to zero, the system will generate a lockout
condition the first time that the safety occurs.
The time in the safety state and the time between safeties are specified in the individual setpoints. This
enables the times to be unique for each lock out setpoint.
MOST SAFETIES ARE CHECKED ONLY IF THE COMPRESSOR IS RUNNING, IF THE SAFETY IS
ALWAYS CHECKED IT WILL BE SO NOTED.
The following are a list of safeties that are incorporated in the standard chiller algorithm control. These
safeties are checked every second. Note, for a multiple compressor system, each compressor is tested
individually. If a safety condition exists, action will be taken with that compressor only, other
compressors will continue to function.
Freeze Protection (SAFETY IS ALWAYS CHECKED), setpoint #77
If the leaving liquid temperature drops below the setpoint value the system, and all compressors, will
enter a lockout state and a freeze notification alarm will be generated. You have the option of one freeze
protect for the package or individual freeze protections by compressor. This is selected in the MCSConfig program.
111
FREEZE
If active, the system checks for freeze protection. The system will compare the
chilled water out temperature to this value. It must be less than the value for
the period of time specified in the setpoint before this safety will trip.
No Flow Protection, setpoint #105

If the flow switch is for the chiller system, then the entire system will be shut down with the LOCK OUT
state if setpoint 105, PUMP FAILURE, is an active lockout type of setpoint. If the setpoint is inactive, the
system will determine if there is a second pump, if so it will be started. Else, the system will be shut
down and automatically restarted when the flow switch is on, indicating that there is flow. If the flow
switch is for the individual compressor, then that compressor will be locked out.
105
PUMP FAILURE
(NO FLOW)
If active and flow is lost and only one pump is present the system will move to a
LOCK OUT state. If the system has two pumps and flow is lost the backup
pump will start and the lead pump will be locked out. If the second pump is
running and flow is lost then the entire system will be locked out. A lock out
reset will be required to restart the system or to reactive a locked out pump.
If inactive and the flow is lost, the system will move to the OFF- NO EVAP
FLOW state. When flow is returned the system will automatically restart, no
reset is required.
This setpoint had been referred to as the NO FLOW.
Phase Loss Protection, setpoint #166

Phase loss, as indicated by the phase loss monitor, will result in the system and all compressors being
locked off and a phase loss notification alarm will be generated. If setpoint #166 is not active the system
will wait for 2 seconds before the lock out occurs. The alarm will be PHASE LOSS and no restart will be
attempted.
If setpoint #166 is active, see below, the alarm will be a setpoint alarm; therefore, the name of the alarm
will be in the message.
134
166
PHASE LOSS
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
If this setpoint is active and the phase loss digital input is on, when a phase loss
occurs the system will wait the number of seconds contained in this setpoint
before generating a phase loss condition. Also after a phase loss has
occurred, the system will attempt to restart after waiting the number of
minutes contained in the Time in Safety field of this setpoint. Enter number
of minutes to wait in Time in Safety
Emergency Stop
Emergency stop, as indicated by the emergency stop switch, will result in the system and all
compressors being locked off and an emergency stop notification alarm will be generated. No setpoint is
required.
Low Differential Oil Pressure, setpoint #91
This safety is designed to meet the compressor manufacturer requirements on oil pressure. For the first
5 (60 seconds if setup as Hitachi screw compressors) seconds following a compressor start this safety
is NOT checked. For the next 30 seconds, if the oil differential pressure drops below of the value of
the setpoint or the digital input turns ON and it remains there for the time specified in the safety time of
that setpoint, the compressor will be locked out and a low oil alarm generated. After this time period, if
the oil differential pressure drops below the value of the setpoint and it remains there for the time
specified in the safety time, the compressor will be locked out (as described in section Chiller setpoint
safety alarms.) and a low oil alarm generated. This enables the setpoint value and the safety time to be
much tighter. This safety is interrogated when the compressor is on and not in a pump down state.
91
LOW OIL DIF
If active, the system checks for low differential oil pressure. The system will
compare the calculated differential oil pressure to this value. It must be less
than the value for the period of time specified in the setpoint before the
safety will trip.
Digital or analog Refers to Oil Pressure column under Compressor SI
Low Suction Pressure, setpoint #77

If the suction pressure drops below the value of the setpoint or the digital input turns ON and it remains
there for the time specified in the safety time, the compressor will be locked out and a low suction alarm
generated. For the first 5 minutes after the compressor has started the safety time is extend by 2
minutes, this enables the setpoint safety time to be set much tighter for normal operation. This safety is
bypassed when the compressor is in the CMP PUMP DOWN state. This safety can also be used as a
freeze protection based upon the suction PSI. When this safety occurs, all compressors in the same
suction group will react the same.
77
LOW SUCTION
If active, the system checks for low suction pressure for each running
compressor. The system will compare the suction pressure sensor reading
to this value. It must be less than the value for the period of time specified in
the setpoint before this setpoint will trip. This also indicates a freeze
condition.
Digital or analog Refers to Suction Pressure column under Compressor
SI
Unsafe Suction Pressure, setpoint #80

This safety is similar to the low suction pressure safety except this setpoint can be set up with a lower
value and a very short safety time. If the suction pressure drops below the value of the setpoint or the
digital input turns ON and it remains there for the time specified in the safety time of that setpoint, the
135
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
compressor will be locked out and a low suction alarm generated. This safety will always cause a lock
out on the first trip requiring a manual reset to restart the compressor. For the first 5 minutes after the
compressor has started the safety time is extend by twice the normal time delay, this enables the
setpoint safety time to be set much tighter for normal operation. . This safety is bypassed when the
compressor is in the CMP PUMP DOWN state. When this safety occurs, all compressors in the same
suction group will react the same.
80
UNSAFE SUCT
If active, the system checks for low suction pressure that is in an unsafe
condition for each running compressor. The system will compare the suction
pressure sensor reading to this value. It must be less than the value for the
period of time specified in the setpoint before this setpoint will trip. Note the
time period specified should be very short, 2-5 seconds. This safety setpoint
trips the compressor to the LOCKOUT state immediately, no retry.
Low Discharge Pressure, setpoint #85

If the discharge pressure drops below the value of the setpoint and it remains there for the time specified
in the safety time of that setpoint, the compressor will be locked out and a low discharge alarm
generated.
85
LO DISC PSI
If active, the system checks for low discharge pressure. The system will
compare the sensor reading to this value. It must be less than the value for
the period of time specified in the setpoint before a safety trip occurs.
High Discharge Pressure (SAFETY IS ALWAYS CHECKED) , setpoint #81

If the discharge pressure rises above the value of the setpoint or the digital input turns ON and it
remains there for the time specified in the safety time of that setpoint, the compressor will be locked out
and a high discharge alarm generated.
81
HI DISCH PSI
If active, the system checks for high discharge pressure condition for each
running compressor. The system will compare the discharge pressure
sensor reading to this value. It must be greater for the period of time
specified in the setpoint before this safety will trip.
Digital or analog Refers to Discharge Pressure column under
Compressor SI
High Discharge Temperature (SAFETY IS ALWAYS CHECKED) , setpoint #87

If the discharge temperature analog input rises above the value of the setpoint or the digital input turns
ON and it remains there for the time specified in the safety time, the compressor will be locked out and a
high temperature alarm generated.
87
HI DISCH TMP
If active, the system checks for high discharge temperature condition for each
compressor that has at least one step on. The system will compare the
discharge temperature sensor reading to this value. It must be greater for
the period of time specified in the setpoint before this safety will trip.
Digital or analog Refers to Suction Temperature column under
Compressor SI
136
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
HI Motor Temp or Motor Fault (SAFETY IS ALWAYS CHECKED) , setpoint #95

If the high motor temperature input rises above the value of the setpoint or the digital input turns ON and
it remains there for the time specified in the safety time, the compressor will be locked out and a high
motor temperature or motor fault alarm generated.
95
MOTOR FAULT
If active, the system checks for high motor temperature. This can be either a
digital input or an analog input; the system will compare the sensor reading
to this value. It must be ON or greater for the period of time specified in the
setpoint before this setpoint will trip.
Digital or analog Refers to Motor Temp column under Compressor SI
Hi Oil Temp, setpoint #94

If the oil temperature rises above the value of the setpoint or the digital input turns ON and it remains
there for the time specified in the safety time of that setpoint, the compressor will be locked out and a
high oil temperature alarm generated.
94
HI OIL TEMP
If active, the system checks for high oil temperature. The system will compare
the oil temperature sensor reading to this value. It must be ON or greater for
the period of time specified in the setpoint before this setpoint will trip. The
sensor can be either an analog or digital input.
Digital or analog Refers to Oil Temp column under Compressor SI
Hi Motor Amp, setpoint #75

If the ampere analog input rises above the value of the compressors FLA setpoint #171 190 times the
value of setpoint #75 or the digital input turns ON and it remains there for the time specified in the safety
time of setpoint #75, the compressor will be locked out and a high motor amp alarm generated. This
safety is bypassed for the first 3 seconds after a compressor has started.
75
HI AMPS
This setpoint is a percentage of the FLA; it is used to create the high amp draw
limit. Depending on the compressor that is being tested: the value of this
setpoint is multiplied by either the value in setpoints 171 through 190 to
obtain the compressors high limit. This value is tested in the high amp
safety, if the amps exceed this value for the time specified in this setpoint
the safety is tripped.
Low Motor Amp, setpoint #76

If the ampere analog input drops below the value of the compressors FLA setpoint #171 190 times the
value of setpoint #76 or the digital input turns ON and it remains there for the time specified in the safety
time of setpoint #76, the compressor will be locked out and a low motor amp alarm will be generated.
This safety is bypassed for the first 3 seconds after a compressor has started.
76
LO AMPS
This setpoint is a percentage of the FLA; it is used to create the low amp draw
limit. Depending on the compressor that is being tested: the value of this
setpoint is multiplied by either the value in setpoints 171 through 190 to
obtain the compressors low limit. This value is tested in the low amp draw
safety, if the amps are below this value for the time specified in this setpoint
the safety is tripped.
137
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
No Compress Proof, setpoint #96

If a compressor is called to be on and the compressor proof input is off (this is a digital input), a NO
COMP PROOF alarm will be generated.
96
NO CMP PROOF
If this setpoint is active and there is a digital input indicated for compressor proof,
when the compressor is on, the compressor proof will be checked for that
compressor.
High Oil Seal Temperature (Screw Compressors only) , setpoint #93

If the oil seal temperature analog input rises above the value of the setpoint and it remains there for the
time specified in the safety time of that setpoint, the compressor will be locked out and a high oil seal
alarm generated. This safety is bypassed for the first 4 minutes after a compressor has started and
when the compressor is in the CMP PUMP DOWN state.
93
HI OIL SEAL
Only used with a screw or centrifugal compressor. If the oil seal / or oil cooler
temperature exceeds the value of this setpoint the system for the time
specified, this safety will trip.
Dirty Oil Filter (Fixed Step Compressors only), setpoint #97

If the difference between the discharge pressures minus the oil pressure is above the value of the
setpoint and it remains there for the time specified in the safety time of that setpoint a dirty oil filter alarm
will generate. If the difference raises 20.0 above the setpoint then the compressor is locked out on the
first trip requiring a manual reset to restart the compressor.
97
DIRTY FILTER
Only used for screw compressors. If the discharge pressure minus the oil filter
pressure is greater than this value for the time specified a safety trip would
occur.
Low Discharge Superheat, setpoint #84

If the discharge superheat is below the value in setpoint and remains there for the time specified in the
safety time of that setpoint, the compressor will be locked out and a low discharge superheat alarm will
be generated. This safety is bypassed for the first 4 minutes after a compressor has started.
84
LO DISC SHEAT
This setpoint contains the value that indicates a low discharge SUPERHEAT
condition. If the calculated discharge SUPERHEAT is less than this value,
the low discharge SUPERHEAT timer will be set to 120 seconds. This will
keep the low discharge SUPERHEAT RO on for that period of time. (This
can be used as a warning only or the user may wire through the low
discharge superheat relay to solve the problem.)
Safety Time Field: This field is used to determine how long to stay in an
unloading state or to change the superheat target.
138
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
17. Magnum Unit Control States Quick Reference

The Unit Control States indicate the unit status; this information is critical. From the Magnum keypad /
display, press the menu key and select STATUS>. The unit control status will be displayed.
UNIT STATE (#)

UNIT IN POWER (0)
NO RUN- I/O LOST (2)
UNIT IN LOCKOUT (3)
UNIT IS OFF (4)
UNIT IS HOLDING (5)
UNIT UNLOADING (6)
(Only HVAC software)
UNIT UNLDNG-VANE (6)
(Only CENT software)
UNIT LOADING (7)
UNIT LOADNG-VANE (7)
NO RUN-SAFETY (8)
RUN/STOP SW OFF (9)
SCHEDULED OFF (10)
OFF-NO FLOW(s) (11)
AMBIENT OFF (13)
UNIT IS UNLOADED (15)
Brief Description
System Reset or Power Returned (delay of 60
seconds or setpoint value)
Lost communication Chiller locked out
Chiller locked out, all points except alarm point are
OFF
System ready to run but no cooling capacity required
No change in capacity
Reduce capacity
Reduce capacity by closing the vanes.
Increase capacity
Increase capacity opening the vanes.
Unit disabled: due to unit safety condition.

Unit disabled: run/stop switch is off.
Unit disabled: operating schedule is false.
Unit disabled: no evaporator or condenser flow.
Unit disabled: either high or low ambient temperature.
Unit is unloaded, No cooling capacity is being
provided.
Unit is loaded, maximum cooling capacity is being
UNIT IS LOADED (16)
provided.
OFF TMP-ICE MADE (17) This state is entered when target temperature has
been satisfied.
ECONOMIZER ONLY (18) Only economizer cooling is on, no mechanical cooling
steps.
SWITCHING MODES (19) Unit is switching being heating and cooling modes.
UNIT SMOKE UNLDG (20) Smoke alarm: quickly force all compressors off.
UNIT OFF UNLDING (21) System ready to run but no cooling capacity required
UNIT DMD UNLDING (22) Demand limiting function: force unit to unload.
UNIT HEAT UNLDNG (23) Unit in heat mode and needs to unload.
UNIT UNLDING-VFD (24) Vanes are fully open and it is necessary to reduce the
compressor speed.
UNIT LOADING-VFD (25)
Vanes are fully open and it is necessary to increase

the compressor speed.
139
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
18. Magnum Compressor Control States Quick Reference

Compressor Control States tell the user the compressor status; this information is critical. From the
Magnum keypad / display, press the menu key and select STATUS>. Then press the F2 or F3 buttons
to navigate through the compressor status information.
UNIT STATE (#)

LOST IO LOCKED (0)
CMP LOCKED OUT (1)
SWITCHED OFF (2)
UNLD and PMPDWN (3)
CMP ANTICYCLE (4)
CMP OFF/READY (5)
OIL PMP LUBING (6)
CMP UNLOADED (8)
CMP UNLD STEP1 (9)
CMP UNLD STEP2 (10)
CMP IS HOLDING (11)
CMP IS LOADING (12)
CMP IS UNLDING (13)
CMP IS RUNNING (14)
FAST UNLOADING (15)
LO SUCT UNLOAD (16)
LO SUCT HOLD(17)
HI DISC UNLOAD (18)
HI DISC HOLD (19)
SAFETY TRIPPED (20)
LO TEMP UNLOAD (21)
LO TEMP HOLD (22)
HI AMP UNLDING (30)
HI AMP HOLD (23)
Brief Description
Lost communication with I/O boards, compressor
locked out.
Compressor locked off due to safety.
Pump down switch on or system state is DISABLE.
Compressor is unloaded and being pump down.
Compressor off, not ready until anti cycle time
reached.
Compressor ready but not required or has not been in
this state for 60 seconds
Screw wanted ON, waiting for good oil pressure and
temp and slide fully unloaded
Compressor ON, all steps OFF.
Compressor on with only one step active.
Compressor on with two steps active.
Control temperature with in target control band,
Pulsing screw load solenoid
Pulsing screw unload solenoid
Compressor is fully loaded, all unloaders are OFF
Fast unload screw compressor at start up.
Pulse screw unload solenoid or unload 1 step, suction
temp or pressure is too low
Holding screw slide or 1 unloader off until suction temp
or pressure returns to normal
Pulse screw unload solenoid because discharge temp
or pressure is too high
Holding until discharge temp or pressure returns to
normal. Can only be unloaded.
Compressors off until to safety, check alarms.
Comp unloading, temperature less than 1.5 F above
freeze point.
Hold until temperature is 3.0 F above freezing point.
Can only be unloaded.
Compressor unloading due to high amps.
Compressor holding due to high amps. Can only be
unloaded.
140
UNIT STATE (#)

HI DIS TMP HLD (24)
CMP IS AT 40% (25)
CMP IS AT 70% (26)
HI WATER HOLD (27)
EXTRA 70% STEP (28)
OFF-LO OIL TMP (29)
HI TEMP UNLOAD (34)
HI TEMP HOLD (35)
SCROLL STEP 1 (36)
SCROLL STEP 2 (37)
SCROLL STEP 3 (38)
SCROLL STEP 4 (39)
CMP DECR SPEED (9)
CMP INCR SPEED (10)
CMP OPEN VANES (12)
CMP CLOSE VANE (13)
SURGE SPD/VANE (25)
DEF PREPMP OUT (31)
DEFROSTING (32)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Brief Description
Compressor unloading due to high discharge
temperature Can only be unloaded.
Mitsubishi screw compressor only. Compressor
providing 40% capacity. This solenoid is on.
Mitsubishi screw compressor only. Compressor
providing 70% capacity. This solenoid is on.
Compressor holding due to high water indicator.
Mitsubishi screw compressor only. Compressor with
an extra step (solenoid) 70% capacity. This
solenoid is on.
Compressor off, low oil temperature.
Heat pump in heating move and temperature is high,
unload compressor.
Heat pump in heating move and temperature returning
to normal.
Special for Trane TRIO or QUAD:
TRIO: Comp C on, others off.
QUAD: Comp A on, others off.
TRIO: Comp A and B on, other off
QUAD: Comp C and D on, others off.
TRIO: Comp A, B and C on.
QUAD: Comp B, C and D on A off.
Special for Trane QUAD:
QUAD: Comp A, B, C and D on.
Compressor speed is being decreased.
Compressor speed is being increased.
Compressor running and opening compressor vanes.
Compressor running and closing compressor vanes.
High number of surges: close vanes and increase
compressor speed.
Defrost is needed, must pump down compressor prior
to defrosting.
Compressor is being defrosted.
141
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
19. OEM Factory Checkout Procedure

19.1. Visual Check
Control power wiring correct and 120 / 240 selector switch set correctly.
Jumper settings
Sensor input
MCS I/O communication termination
MCS communication termination
EEPROM write protection

Sensor Wiring
MCS-IO Communication Wiring
LCD Connector (dot to mark on the board)
Keypad Connector (dot to mark on the board)
RO Wiring
Ensure that the EMG stop is on (closed position) or run/stop input off so that the unit will not run after power applied
to micro.
19.2.
MCS Power On (Compressor Power off)

MCS System on
LCD on and valid display MCS Logo or Logo in configuration then Main Menu screen
Communications light blinking if I/O units
Get AUTHORIZED
Check sensor readings
Manually bump (on then off) each point (take care your in control)
142
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
20. The Magnum Keypad Display Quick Reference
No authorization is required to displaying information.

Pressing the MENU key will display the information below.
Using the , , , position the curser on the item you want.
Press the (ENTER) key to display item
Main Menu
4'-5. 30 3"
19:36
The bottom line of the display defines the functions of F1 F3.

For Passwords use the numbers on the keys. (1 thru 8)
The RS 232 connector is located at the bottom of the keypad.
To use MCS-Connect you need to use a null modem cable.
Help
F1
F3
F2
Menu
8
143
MICRO CONTR
ROL SYSTEMS
MAGNUM
M REVISION 1.7
21. Th
he MAGN
NUM Harrdware Rev
R 6 Qu
uick Refe
erence S
Sheet
144
4
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
22. The Magnum Hardware SI16/AO4 Quick Reference
145
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
23. The Magnum Hardware RO10 Quick Reference
146
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
24. The Magnum Quick Reference Sheet (Temp and Humidity)

MCS-T100 (SI #1 through 12 on MCS-MAGNUM or SI MCS-ZONE (SI #1 through 12 on MCS-MAGNUM or
16)
SI 16)
1.
2.
Connects to 1 of MCS Sensor Inputs 1 thru 12 or SI 16

Shielded cable GND drain must be connected to SI GND
Temp MCS-MAGNUM- SI (inputs 1-12) jumper setting is
ANALOG
3.
1.
2.
3.
Connects to 1 of MCS Sensor Inputs 1 thru 12 or SI 16

Temp MCS-MAGNUM SI (inputs 1-12) jumper setting is
ANALOG
MCS Sensor Input Terminal Strips

SENSOR (x)
+5 GND

+5
GND
S1
BLK
S1
WH
+5
VDC
Shielded cable only - min.

24 awg stranded
Out
Temp
GND
Shielded cable - 18 24 awg supplied
MCS
H100
REV 2.0
LAYOUT B
MCS-ZONE
MCS-T100
MCS-SAIR (SI #1 through 12 on Magnum or SI 16)

1.
2.
3.
Connects to 1 of MCS-MAGNUM Sensor Inputs 1-12 or SI 16

Temp on MCS-MAGNUM- SI (input 1-12) or SI 16 jumpers
setting to analog
Minimum extension inside duct 2.25
Normal extension, as shown, 4.00.
4.
5.
MCS-HUMD (SI #1 through 12 on Magnum or SI 16)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connects to 2 of MCS-MAGNUM Sensor Inputs 1 -12 or SI 16

Humidity MCS-MAGNUM-SI (input 1-8) jumper setting
to analog
+5 vdc & GND are common (only one connection required)
Temp. on MCS-MAGNUM-SI (input 1-12) or SI 16
jumper setting is analog

+5
BLK
GND
S1
Shielded cable - 18 24 awg supplied
+12

+12 OUT SENSOR (x1) SENSOR(x2)
GND
+5 GND S1
+5 GND
WH
+5
VDC
GND
+12 VDC
Min = 2.125
Max = 4.500
GND
circuits
Humd
Out
MCS-SAIR
MCS-H100
147
Out
Temp
S1
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
25. The Magnum Quick Reference Sheet (PSI, CT and Digital)

TI-xxx-xx (SI #1 thru 12 on MCS-MAGNUM or SI 16)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pressure transducer (3 wire 0-5 vdc)

Wiring for 3 wire to SI# 1 through 12 or on SI 16
Jumper settings for SI is ANALOG
Types: 150-A, 200, 500 or 667 indicate pressure ranges.

SENSOR (x)
+5
GND
S1
RED
Dry Contacts on MCS-MAGNUM

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Sensor (x)
WH or CLEAR
BLK
Digital inputs for use on sensor inputs (SI 1-16)

Dry Contact MCS-MAGNUM SI (inputs 1-12) jumper
setting is DIGITAL
Dry Contact MCS-MAGNUM SI (inputs 13-16)Digital
only
Verify on INPUTS Display on keypad
+5
MAGNUM DRY CONTACT DI

(SI 1 14)
TI-x00-yy
MCS-CT-xxx (SI #1 through 12 on Magnum or SI 16)

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect to MCS-MAGNUM sensor inputs 1 thru 12 or SI

16
The current transformer may be 100:0.5, 250:0.5, 500:0.5
AMPS jumper setting is ANALOG
For wiring only remove terminal block from CT.
DO NOT REMOVE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
DO NOT WIRE +5 FROM MAGNUM OR SI 16
MCS Sensor Input Terminal Strip Sensor (x)

+5
GND
S1
Shielded cable - min. 24 awg stranded
Shielded cable - (20 or

40 22 awg supplied)
1.
GND
S1
Shielded cable - min. 24 awg stranded
GND
S1
MCS-CT-xxx
148
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
--- NOTE --1)
SENSOR INPUTS SHOULD BE SHIELDED CABLE WITH
SHIELD TIED TO GROUND ON MAGNUM SENSOR INPUT

GROUND TERMINAL.
2)
THE FOUR DIGITAL INPUTS, ON THE MAGNUM PRINTED
COMPRESSOR BOARD, DO NOT REQUIRE SHIELDED CABLE.

3)
ALL MCS BOARDS WITH 24/120/240 VAC MUST HAVE
GROUNDS WIRED FROM TERMINAL DIRECTLY TO GROUND. (DO

NOT JUMPER GROUNDS).
149
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
26. The Magnum Trouble Shooting Quick Reference Sheet

(Complete trouble shooting write up is available on web site www.MCScontrols.com)
PROBLEM
No Sensor + 5 vdc or sensor +5
vdc less than 4.90 vdc.
A sensor input reads -99.9
A sensor input reads +999.9
A pressure sensor is reading more

than 1 psi off
(The temperature and humidity
sensors do not require calibration.)
Invalid reading on one sensor

input.
MCS CONTROLLER
INITIALIZATION on LCD display.
Top row of LCD display all bars
and 2nd row blank.
LCD blank.
Lost I/O
Changes to MCS not being made

from the units keypad.
MCS-Connect cannot make
changes
POTENTIAL SOLUTION
Indicates a possible shorted input sensor
Remove all sensor terminal blocks.
Wait about 30 to 60 seconds. If + 5 vdc returns, replace one

sensor wire at a time until the + 5 vdc is lost again. This will be the
shorted sensor.
This indicates an open sensor input signal or 5 VDC problem.
Check sensor wiring for missing wire or poor connection.
Check sensor for bad sensor.
Check + 5 vdc on sensor input to ground. If less than 5 VDC is on

the sensor 5 VDC terminal block, the problem is with probably a
shorted sensor. (A poly fuse protects the board)
- Remove all sensor input terminals.
- Wait about 1 min. or until 5 VDC restored at sensor input.
- Connect terminals 1 at time until short reappears and fix bad sensor.
This indicates a shorted sensor input signal.
Check sensor wiring for +5VDC shorted to signal etc.
Check sensor for bad sensor.

This indicates the transducer sensor input needs to be calibrated via the
offset capability in the software. (Transducers by design need to be
calibrated based on construction and altitude.)
You need to have a valid Auth code to change sensor
offsets
You must use the Windows based software package
MCS-Connect
See MCS-Connect Interactive section for instructions.
(Change SI Status, Manual Value and / or offset.)
This indicates an input problem with 1 sensor.
Verify jumper settings correct for that SI.

Indicates Micro in constant reset.
Check incoming power > 105 VAC or 22 VAC

Indicates software chip problem possible.
Possible U11 software version incorrect or faulty chip.
Possible U13 GAL chip incorrect or faulty chip.
Possible bad connection or cable between LCD and MCS8

Indicates bad connection.
Connector J2 on MCS not on or offset on connector.
Resistor adjustment VR1 out of adjustment.

Indicates communications problem.
Verify RS485 LED blinking.
Verify termination jumper J6 only on at MAGNUM and last I/O.
Verify MAGNUM and I/O addresss set correctly.
Verify wiring from MAGNUM to each I/O correct.
Check fuses/120 VAC on I/O units

This indicates inability to write to chip U10.
Verify EEP WRITE ENABLE jumper W6 is on.
Not authorized
This indicates you are not at a proper authorization level.
Follow steps below for proper authorization
150
PROBLEM
Invalid authorization
SI from AMPS board 10 A low.
INVALID CONFIG VER

INVALID CONFIG TYPE
INVALID CONFIG CHECKSUM
Sensor input believed invalid
(Under Sensor Diagnostic Sub
Menu)
Communications to MCS-485GATEWAY from MCS-Connect
not working.
INVALID CONFIG
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
POTENTIAL SOLUTION
From either the SYSTEM INFO or STATUS screen,
under MCS-Connect, click on the AUTH button on the
lower right of your LCD display.
Follow prompts and enter a valid 4-digit authorization
number.
The authorization level is displayed at the top of the
display and is reflected via the color of the AUTH button.
1. RED
= view only
2. YELLOW = service level
3. BLUE
= Supervisor level
4. Green
= Factory level
This indicates an invalid auth number.
Follow steps below for proper authorization
Press SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS key until the authorization option
appears
Press the ENTER key
From the Display Status press keys corresponding to your
authorization number.
Press ENTER
This indicates a problem with this SI only.
Jumper setting on this SI in wrong position.
Incorrect sensor type used.

Indicates layout of CFG wrong.
CFG layout for different version than software

Indicates CFG incompatible with software.
.
Indicates Checksum invalid
Reload a valid CFG
Verify Berg jumpers using Quick Reference Sheets
Check board version number
Check wiring of sensor
Verify red LED on the gate way is blinking. This indicates that the
MCS-Connect program is talking to the gateway.
Verify that the two wire shielded cable is properly wired from the
RS-485 connector to the gateway.
Verify red LED (Located just to the left of the RS-485 connector
on the MAGNUM board is blinking. This indicates that the
MAGNUM is responding to the gateway.
If both of these LED are blinking, check the address of the

MAGNUM and any other MAGNUMs that are on the network.
Each must have a unique address. This address can be changed
from the MAGNUM. Proper authorization is required. Enter the
UNIT INFORMATION screen by depressing the SERVICE
DIAGNOSTIC key and scrolling to this item. Depress the ENTER
key and scroll to the NETWORK ADDRESS screen. Change
address if needed.
Verify + 12 vdc to MCS-485-GATEWAY

Indicates Checksum invalid
Either set to factory defaults on reset settings.
151
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
27. BMS Communication Protocols

MAGNUM supports BACnet IP, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, and Johnson N2. Supported baud rates for
Modbus RTU and Johnson N2 are 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, and 57600bps.
27.1. Sensor Input Points

Sensor numbering is based upon SI-16/ AO4 hardware type board
Notable BACnet properties available: Units
Magnum
Sensor M - 1
Sensor M - 2
Sensor M - 3
Sensor M - 4
Sensor M - 5
Sensor M - 6
Sensor M - 7
Sensor M - 8
Sensor M - 9
Sensor M-10
Sensor M-11
Sensor M-12
Sensor M-13
Sensor M-14
Sensor M-15
Sensor M-16
Sensor 1 - 1
Sensor 1 - 2
Sensor 1 - 3
Sensor 1 - 4
Sensor 1 - 5
Sensor 1 - 6
Sensor 1 - 7
Sensor 1 - 8
Sensor 1 - 9
Sensor 1 -10
Sensor 1 -11
Sensor 1 - 12
Sensor 1 - 13
Sensor 1 - 14
Sensor 1 - 15
Sensor 1 -16
Sensor 2 - 1
Sensor 2 - 2
Sensor 2 - 3
BACnet ID
AI: 1
AI: 2
AI: 3
AI: 4
AI: 5
AI: 6
AI: 7
AI: 8
AI: 9
AI:10
AI:11
AI:12
AI:13
AI:14
AI:15
AI:16
AI:17
AI:18
AI:19
AI:20
AI:21
AI:22
AI:23
AI:24
AI:25
AI:26
AI:27
AI:28
AI:29
AI:30
AI:31
AI:32
AI:33
AI:34
AI:35
BACnet Name
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Modbus Register
*30001
*30002
*30003
*30004
*30005
*30006
*30007
*30008
*30009
*30010
*30011
*30012
*30013
*30014
*30015
*30016
*30017
*30018
*30019
*30020
*30021
*30022
*30023
*30024
*30025
*30026
*30027
*30028
*30029
*30030
*30031
*30032
*30033
*30034
*30035
N2
*AI: 1
*AI: 2
*AI: 3
*AI: 4
*AI: 5
*AI: 6
*AI: 7
*AI: 8
*AI: 9
*AI: 10
*AI: 11
*AI: 12
*AI: 13
*AI: 14
*AI: 15
*AI: 16
*AI: 17
*AI: 18
*AI: 19
*AI: 20
*AI: 21
*AI: 22
*AI: 23
*AI: 24
*AI: 25
*AI: 26
*AI: 27
*AI: 28
*AI: 29
*AI: 30
*AI: 31
*AI: 32
*AI: 33
*AI: 34
*AI: 35
Sensor 2 - 4
AI:36
Refer to Config
*30036
*AI: 36
152
Magnum
Sensor 2 - 5
Sensor 2 - 6
Sensor 2 - 7
Sensor 2 - 8
Sensor 2 - 9
Sensor 2 - 10
Sensor 2 - 11
Sensor 2 - 12
Sensor 2 - 13
Sensor 2 - 14
Sensor 2 - 15
Sensor 2 - 16
Sensor 3 - 1
Sensor 3 - 2
Sensor 3 - 3
Sensor 3 - 4
Sensor 3 - 5
Sensor 3 - 6
Sensor 3 - 7
Sensor 3 - 8
Sensor 3 - 9
Sensor 3 -10
Sensor 3 -11
Sensor 3 - 12
Sensor 3 - 13
Sensor 3 - 14
Sensor 3 - 15
Sensor 3 -16
Sensor 4 - 1
Sensor 4 - 2
Sensor 4 - 3
Sensor 4 - 4
Sensor 4 - 5
Sensor 4 - 6
Sensor 4 - 7
Sensor 4 - 8
Sensor 4 - 9
Sensor 4 - 10
Sensor 4 - 11
Sensor 4 - 12
Sensor 4 - 13
Sensor 4 - 14
Sensor 4 - 15
Sensor 4 - 16
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
BACnet ID
AI:37
AI:38
AI:39
AI:40
AI:41
AI:42
AI:43
AI:44
AI:45
AI:46
AI:47
AI:48
AI:49
AI:50
AI:51
AI:52
AI:53
AI:54
AI:55
AI:56
AI:57
AI:58
AI:59
AI:60
AI:61
AI:62
AI:63
AI:64
AI:65
AI:66
AI:67
AI:68
AI:69
AI:70
AI:71
AI:72
AI:73
AI:74
AI:75
AI:76
AI:77
AI:78
AI:79
AI:80
BACnet Name
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
153
Modbus Register
*30037
*30038
*30039
*30040
*30041
*30042
*30043
*30044
*30045
*30046
*30047
*30048
*30049
*30050
*30051
*30052
*30053
*30054
*30055
*30056
*30057
*30058
*30059
*30060
*30061
*30062
*30063
*30064
*30065
*30066
*30067
*30068
*30069
*30070
*30071
*30072
*30073
*30074
*30075
*30076
*30077
*30078
*30079
*30080
N2
*AI: 37
*AI: 38
*AI: 39
*AI: 40
*AI: 41
*AI: 42
*AI: 43
*AI: 44
*AI: 45
*AI: 46
*AI: 47
*AI: 48
*AI:49
*AI: 50
*AI: 51
*AI: 52
*AI: 53
*AI: 54
*AI: 55
*AI: 56
*AI: 57
*AI: 58
*AI: 59
*AI: 60
*AI: 61
*AI: 62
*AI: 63
*AI: 64
*AI: 65
*AI: 66
*AI: 67
*AI: 68
*AI: 69
*AI: 70
*AI: 71
*AI: 72
*AI: 73
*AI: 74
*AI: 75
*AI: 76
*AI: 77
*AI: 78
*AI: 79
*AI: 80
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
*- Indicates value multiplied by 10 to include one decimal place. (I.e. BMS value of 500 indicates actual value
50.0)
27.2. Relay Output Points

Relay output points are read-only.
Sensor numbering is based upon RO-10 hardware type board
Magnum
Relay M - 1
Relay M - 2
Relay M - 3
Relay M - 4
Relay M - 5
Relay M - 6
Relay M - 7
Relay M - 8
Relay M - 9
Relay M-10
Relay 1 - 1
Relay 1 - 2
Relay 1 - 3
Relay 1 - 4
Relay 1 - 5
Relay 1 - 6
Relay 1 - 7
Relay 1 - 8
Relay 1 - 9
Relay 1- 10
Relay 2 - 1
Relay 2 - 2
Relay 2 - 3
Relay 2 - 4
Relay 2 - 5
Relay 2 - 6
Relay 2 - 7
Relay 2 - 8
Relay 2 - 9
Relay 2 -10
Relay 3 1
Relay 3 2
Relay 3 3
Relay 3 - 4
Relay 3 - 5
Relay 3- 6
Relay 3 - 7
Relay 3 - 8
BACnet ID
BO: 1
BO: 2
BO: 3
BO: 4
BO: 5
BO: 6
BO: 7
BO: 8
BO: 9
BO:10
BO:11
BO:12
BO:13
BO:14
BO:15
BO:16
BO:17
BO:18
BO:19
BO:20
BO:21
BO:22
BO:23
BO:24
BO:25
BO:26
BO:27
BO:28
BO:29
BO:30
BO:31
BO:32
BO:33
BO:34
BO:35
BO:36
BO:37
BO:38
BACnet Name
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Modbus
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
00017
00018
00019
00020
00021
00022
00023
00024
00025
00026
00027
00028
00029
00030
00031
00032
00033
00034
00035
00036
00037
00038
154
N2
BO: 1
BO: 2
BO: 3
BO: 4
BO: 5
BO: 6
BO: 7
BO: 8
BO: 9
BO: 10
BO: 11
BO: 12
BO: 13
BO: 14
BO: 15
BO: 16
BO: 17
BO: 18
BO: 19
BO: 20
BO: 21
BO: 22
BO: 23
BO: 24
BO: 25
BO: 26
BO: 27
BO: 28
BO: 29
BO: 30
BO: 31
BO: 32
BO: 33
BO: 34
BO: 35
BO: 36
BO: 37
BO: 38
Magnum
Relay 3 - 9
Relay 3 - 10
Relay 4 - 1
Relay 4 - 2
Relay 4 - 3
Relay 4 - 4
Relay 4 - 5
Relay 4 - 6
Relay 4 - 7
Relay 4 - 8
Relay 4 - 9
Relay 4 - 10
Relay 5 - 1
Relay 5 - 2
Relay 5 - 3
Relay 5 - 4
Relay 5 - 5
Relay 5 - 6
Relay 5 - 7
Relay 5 - 8
Relay 5 - 9
Relay 5 -10
Relay 6 1
Relay 6 2
Relay 6 3
Relay 6 - 4
Relay 6 - 5
Relay 6- 6
Relay 6 - 7
Relay 6 - 8
Relay 6 - 9
Relay 6 - 10
Relay 7 - 1
Relay 7 - 2
Relay 7 - 3
Relay 7 - 4
Relay 7 - 5
Relay 7 - 6
Relay 7 - 7
Relay 7 - 8
Relay 7 - 9
Relay 7 - 10
BACnet ID
BO:39
BO:40
BO:41
BO:42
BO:43
BO:44
BO:45
BO:46
BO:47
BO:48
BO:49
BO:50
BO:51
BO:52
BO:53
BO:54
BO:55
BO:56
BO:57
BO:58
BO:59
BO:60
BO:61
BO:62
BO:63
BO:64
BO:65
BO:66
BO:67
BO:68
BO:69
BO:70
BO:71
BO:72
BO:73
BO:74
BO:75
BO:76
BO:77
BO:78
BO:79
BO:80
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
BACnet Name
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Modbus
00039
00040
00041
00042
00043
00044
00045
00046
00047
00048
00049
00050
00051
00052
00053
00054
00055
00056
00057
00058
00059
00060
00061
00062
00063
00064
00065
00066
00067
00068
00069
00760
00071
00072
00073
00074
00075
00076
00077
00078
00079
00070
27.3. Analog Output Points

Analog Output points are read-only.
155
N2
BO: 39
BO: 40
BO: 41
BO: 42
BO: 43
BO: 44
BO: 45
BO: 46
BO: 47
BO: 48
BO: 49
BO: 50
BO: 51
BO: 52
BO: 53
BO: 54
BO: 55
BO: 56
BO: 57
BO: 58
BO: 59
BO: 60
BO: 61
BO: 62
BO: 63
BO: 64
BO: 65
BO: 66
BO: 67
BO: 68
BO: 69
BO: 70
BO: 71
BO: 72
BO: 73
BO: 74
BO: 75
BO: 76
BO: 77
BO: 78
BO: 79
BO: 80
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Sensor numbering is based upon SI-16/ AO4 hardware type board

Magnum
Analog Out M-1
Analog Out M-2
Analog Out M-3
Analog Out M-4
Analog Out 1-1
Analog Out 1-2
Analog Out 1-3
Analog Out 1-4
Analog Out 2-1
Analog Out 2-2
Analog Out 2-3
Analog Out 2-4
Analog Out 3-1
Analog Out 3-2
Analog Out 3-3
Analog Out 3-4
Analog Out 4-1
Analog Out 4-2
Analog Out 4-3
Analog Out 4-4
BACnet ID
AO:1
AO:2
AO:3
AO:4
AO:5
AO:6
AO:7
AO:7
AO:8
AO:10
AO:11
AO:12
AO:13
AO:14
AO:15
AO:16
AO:17
AO:18
AO:19
AO:20
BACnet Name
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Refer to Config
Modbus Register
*30201
*30202
*30203
*30204
*30205
*30206
*30207
*30208
*30209
*30210
*30211
*30212
*30213
*30214
*30215
*30216
*30217
*30218
*30219
*30220
N2
*AO: 1
*AO: 2
*AO: 3
*AO: 4
*AO: 5
*AO: 6
*AO: 7
*AO: 8
*AO: 9
*AO: 10
*AO: 11
*AO: 12
*AO: 13
*AO: 14
*AO: 15
*AO: 16
*AO: 17
*AO: 18
*AO: 19
*AO: 20
50.0)
27.4. Setpoints
Setpoints are read-only.
Magnum
Setpoint #1
Setpoint #21
Setpoint #163
BACnet ID
AV:0
AV:88
AV:230
BACnet Name
STP# 1-<Setpoint name>
Modbus
40301
40321
40463
N2
ADF:1
ADF:89
ADF:231
50.0)
27.5. Chiller/Compressor States

State values are read-only.
Notable BACnet properties available: Number of States, State-Text (Contains character text of current state)
156
Magnum
Chiller Unit State
Compressor #1 State
Compressor #2 State
Compressor #3 State
Compressor #4 State
Compressor #5 State
Compressor #6 State
Compressor #7 State
Compressor #8 State
Compressor #9 State
Compressor #10 State
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
BACnet ID
MV:0
MV:1
MV:2
MV:3
MV:4
MV:5
MV:6
MV:7
MV:8
MV:130
MV:131
MV:132
MV:133
MV:134
MV:135
MV:136
MV:137
MV:138
MV:139
MV:140
MV:141
BACnet Name
CHILLER STATE
COMPRESSOR #1 STATE
COMPRESSOR #2 STATE
COMPRESSOR #3 STATE
COMPRESSOR #4 STATE
COMPRESSOR #5 STATE
COMPRESSOR #6 STATE
COMPRESSOR #7 STATE
COMPRESSOR #8 STATE
COMPRESSOR #9 STATE
COMPRESSOR #10 STATE
Modbus
Register
30306
30307
30308
30309
30310
30311
30312
30313
30314
30560
30561
30562
30563
30564
30565
30566
30567
30568
30569
30570
30571
N2
BYT:1
BYT:2
BYT:3
BYT:4
BYT:5
BYT:6
BYT:7
BYT:8
BYT:9
BYT:131
BYT:132
BYT:133
BYT:134
BYT:135
BYT:136
BYT:137
BYT:138
BYT:139
BYT:140
BYT:141
BYT:142
27.6. Other Points

These points are read-only.
Magnum
Wanted FLA%
Steps Wanted
Steps On
Step Delay
Compressor #1 FLA%
Compressor #1 Sat Suction
Compressor #1 Sat Disch
Compressor #1 Disch SH
Compressor #1 Suct SH
Compressor #1 Oil Pres Diff
Compressor #2 FLA%
Compressor #3 FLA%
BACnet ID
BACnet Name
AV:3 Wanted FLA%
AV:4 Steps Wanted On
AV:5 Steps On
AV:6 Step Delay
AV:7 C1_FLA%
AV:10 C1_Sat Suct
AV:11 C1_ Sat Disch
AV:12 C1_Disch SH
AV:13 C1_Suct SH
AV:63 C1_Oil Pres Diff
AV:14 C2_FLA%
AV:17 C2_Sat Suct
AV:18 C2_ Sat Disch
AV:19 C2_Disch SH
AV:20 C2_Suct SH
AV:21 C3_FLA%
157
Modbus
30318
30315
30316
30317
*30319
*30327
*30329
*30330
*30328
*30375
*30320
*30331
*30333
*30334
*30332
*30376
*30321
N2
ADF:4
ADF:5
ADF:6
ADF:7
*ADF:8
*ADF:11
*ADF:12
*ADF:13
*ADF:14
*ADF:64
*ADF:15
*ADF:18
*ADF:19
*ADF:20
*ADF:21
*ADF:65
*ADF:22
Magnum
Compressor #4 FLA%
Compressor #5 FLA%
Compressor #6 FLA%
Compressor #7 FLA%
Compressor #8 FLA%
Compressor #9 FLA%
Compressor #10 FLA%
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
BACnet ID
BACnet Name
AV:24 C3_Sat Suct
AV:25 C3_ Sat Disch
AV:26 C3_Disch SH
AV:27 C3_Suct SH
AV:28 C4_FLA%
AV:31 C4_Sat Suct
AV:32 C4_ Sat Disch
AV:33 C4_Disch SH
AV:34 C4_Suct SH
AV:35 C5_FLA%
AV:38 C5_Sat Suct
AV:39 C5_ Sat Disch
AV:40 C5_Disch SH
AV:41 C5_Suct SH
AV:42 C6_FLA%
AV:45 C6_Sat Suct
AV:46 C6_ Sat Disch
AV:47 C6_Disch SH
AV:48 C6_Suct SH
AV:49 C7_FLA%
AV:52 C7_Sat Suct
AV:53 C7_ Sat Disch
AV:54 C7_Disch SH
AV:55 C7_Suct SH
AV:56 C8_FLA%
AV:59 C8_Sat Suct
AV:59 C8_Sat Suct
AV:60 C8_ Sat Disch
AV:61 C8_Disch SH
AV:62 C8_Suct SH
AV:440 C9_FLA%
AV: 443 C9_Sat Suct
AV: 444 C9_ Sat Disch
AV: 445 C9_Disch SH
AV: 446 C9_Suct SH
AV:447 C10_FLA%
AV: 450 C10_Sat Suct
AV: 452 C10_Disch SH
158
Modbus
*30335
*30337
*30338
*30336
*30377
*30322
*30339
*30341
*30342
*30340
*30378
*30323
*30343
*30345
*30346
*30344
*30379
*30324
*30347
*30349
*30350
*30348
*30380
*30325
*30351
*30353
*30354
*30352
*30381
*30326
*30352
*30355
*30357
*30358
*30356
*30382
*30572
*30584
*30586
*30587
*30585
*30656
*30573
*30588
*30590
*30591
N2
*ADF:25
*ADF:26
*ADF:27
*ADF:28
*ADF:66
*ADF:29
*ADF:32
*ADF:33
*ADF:34
*ADF:35
*ADF:67
*ADF:36
*ADF:39
*ADF:40
*ADF:41
*ADF:42
*ADF:68
*ADF:43
*ADF:46
*ADF:47
*ADF:48
*ADF:49
*ADF:69
*ADF:50
*ADF:53
*ADF:54
*ADF:55
*ADF:56
*ADF:70
*ADF:57
*ADF:53
*ADF:60
*ADF:61
*ADF:62
*ADF:63
*ADF:71
*ADF:441
*ADF: 442
*ADF: 443
*ADF: 444
*ADF: 445
*ADF:525
*ADF:448
*ADF: 451
*ADF: 452
*ADF: 453
Magnum
Compressor #11 FLA%
Compressor #12 FLA%
Compressor #13 FLA%
Compressor #14 FLA%
Compressor #15 FLA%
Compressor #16 FLA%
Compressor #17 FLA%
Compressor #18 FLA%
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
BACnet ID
BACnet Name
AV: 453 C10_Suct SH
AV:454 C11_FLA%
AV: 460 C11_Suct SH
AV: 526 C11_Oil Pres Diff
AV: 461 C12_FLA%
AV: 467 C12_Suct SH
AV:468 C13_FLA%
AV: 474 C13_Suct SH
AV: 475 C14_FLA%
AV: 481 C14_Suct SH
AV: 482 C15_FLA%
AV: 488 C15_Suct SH
AV: 489 C16_FLA%
AV: 495 C16_Suct SH
AV: 496 C17_FLA%
AV: 502 C17_Suct SH
AV: 503 C18_FLA%
159
Modbus
*30589
*30657
*30574
*30592
*30594
*30595
*30593
*30658
*30575
*30596
*30598
*30599
*30597
*30659
*30576
*30600
*30602
*30603
*30600
*30661
*30577
*30604
*30606
*30607
*30605
*30661
*30578
*30608
*30610
*30611
*30609
*3062
*30579
*30612
*30614
*30615
*30613
*30663
*30580
*30616
*30618
*30619
*30617
*30664
*30581
*30620
N2
*ADF: 454
*ADF:526
*ADF:455
*ADF: 458
*ADF: 459
*ADF: 460
*ADF: 461
*ADF: 527
*ADF: 462
*ADF: 465
*ADF: 466
*ADF: 467
*ADF 468
*ADF:528
*ADF:469
*ADF: 470
*ADF: 473
*ADF: 474
*ADF: 475
*ADF: 529
*ADF: 476
*ADF: 479
*ADF: 480
*ADF: 481
*ADF: 482
*ADF: 530
*ADF: 483
*ADF: 486
*ADF: 487
*ADF: 488
*ADF: 489
*ADF: 531
*ADF: 490
*ADF: 493
*ADF: 494
*ADF: 495
*ADF: 496
*ADF: 532
*ADF: 497
*ADF: 500
*ADF: 501
*ADF: 502
*ADF: 503
*ADF: 533
*ADF: 504
*ADF: 507
Magnum
Compressor #19 FLA%
Compressor #20 FLA%
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
BACnet ID
BACnet Name
AV: 509 C18_Suct SH
AV: 510 C19_FLA%
AV: 516 C19_Suct SH
AV: 517 C20_FLA%
AV: 523 C20_Suct SH
Modbus
*30622
*30623
*30621
*30665
*30582
*30624
*30626
*30627
*30625
*30666
*30583
*30628
*30630
*30631
*30629
*30667
N2
*ADF: 508
*ADF: 509
*ADF: 510
*ADF: 534
*ADF: 511
*ADF: 514
*ADF: 515
*ADF: 516
*ADF: 517
*ADF: 535
*ADF: 518
*ADF: 521
*ADF: 522
*ADF: 523
*ADF: 524
*ADF: 536
50.0)
27.7. Network inputs to MCS-Magnum

The MCS-MAGNUM can receive changes from the network to enable or disable the Network Run/Stop,
Network Target Reset (adjustments to the Cooling Target, Setpoint #1, based on Setpoint #21), Network
Demand FLA, and Network Demand Steps.
The MCS-Magnum must be setup to accept these inputs. The configuration file must contain a Network
Run/Stop, Network Target, Network Demand FLA, and Network Demand Steps sensors.
Note: If these sensors are not setup properly, changes will not be accepted by the MCS-Magnum.
Magnum
Network Run/Stop
Network Target/Reset
Network Demand/FLA
Network Demand/Steps
BACnet ID
AV:246
AV:247
AV:248
AV:249
BACnet Name
Net_R/S
Net_Tar/Res
Net_Demad_FLA
Net_Demad_Steps
Modbus
40201
40202
40204
40205
N2
BO:247
AO:248
AO:249
AO:250
The MCS-MAGNUM must be setup to accept these inputs. The configuration file in the MCS-MAGNUM must
contain a Network Run/Stop, and /or Network Target Reset, and/or Network Demand FLA, and/or Network
Demand Steps sensors. Note the following Information Screen has a Network Run/Stop, and /or Network
Target Reset sensors inputs indicated. This is an example of how the MCS-Config program must be setup.
160
MICRO CON
NTROL SYSTEMS
S
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
The senso
ors must be se
et up as follows
s (This is only an example)
ensors are no
ot setup prop
perly, changes
s will not be a
accepted by tthe MCS-MAG
GNUM
If these se
27.8.
2
MCS Capacity Control
C
State
e Chart
The values
s exposed in the
t capacity sttate relate to th
he descriptionss in this table.
Statte Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Description
"UNIT IN PO
OWER UP"
RESERVED
D
"NO RUN- I/O
I LOST"
"UNIT IN LO
OCKOUT "
"UNIT IS OFF "
"UNIT IS HO
OLDING "
"UNIT UNLOADING "
"UNIT IS LO
OADING "
"NO RUN - SAFETY "
"RUN/STOP
P SW OFF "
"SCHEDUL
LED OFF "
"OFF-NO FLOW(s)"
F
RESERVED
D
"AMBIENT OFF "
"PROCESS
S HEAT OFF"
"UNIT IS UN
NLOADED"
"UNIT IS LO
OADED "
"OFF TMP--ICE MADE "
"ECONOMIIZER ONLY "
"SWITCHIN
NG MODES "
"UNIT SMO
OKE UNLDG"
"UNIT OFF UNLDING"
"UNIT DMD
D UNLDING"
161
23
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
"UNIT HEAT UNLDNG"
27.9. MCS Compressor Control State Chart

The values exposed in the compressor state relate to the descriptions in this table.
State Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Description
"LOST IO LOCKED"
"CMP LOCKED OUT"
"SWITCHED OFF "
"CMP PUMP DOWN "
"CMP ANTICYCLE "
"CMP OFF/READY "
"OIL PMP LUBING"
"CMP IS RUNNING"
"CMP UNLOADED "
"UNLD1/HGBP OFF"
"PART LOADED "
"CMP IS HOLDING"
"CMP IS LOADING"
"CMP IS UNLDING"
"CMP IS AT 100%"
"FAST UNLOADING"
"LO SUCT UNLOAD"
"LO SUCT HOLD "
"HI DISC UNLOAD"
"HI DISC HOLD "
"SAFETY TRIPPED"
"LO TEMP UNLOAD"
"LO TEMP HOLD "
"HI AMP HOLD "
"HI DIS TMP HLD"
"CMP IS AT 40% "
"CMP IS AT 70% "
"HI WATER HOLD "
"EXTRA 70% STEP "
"OFF-LO OIL TMP "
"HI AMP UNLDING "
"DEF PREPMP OUT "
"DEFROSTING "
"DEF PUMP DOWN "
"HI TEMP UNLOAD "
"HI TEMP HOLD "
"SCROLL STEP1 "
"SCROLL STEP2 "
"SCROLL STEP3 "
"SCROLL STEP4 "
162
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
28. MCS-MAGNUM BMS CONNECTIONS
163
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
28.1. MCS-Magnum BMS protocols settings.

28.1.1.
Bacnet Over IP:
The BACNET DEVICE ID is a five-digit number. The first three digits are based on our Bacnet vendor ID
that is 181, and the last two are set by the Bacnet/MSTP address.
181
XX
Bacnet Bacnet MS/TP

Vendor ID Address
The Bacnet address can be verified and changed (with the proper authorization code) from the keypad/LCD of a
live unit.
Press Menu
Using , , , or position cursor to Passwords
Press key.
Enter 4 digit password and press .
Press Menu to make next selection.
The following steps will display the Bacnet MSTP Network address, and the Baud Rate:
(To change the address and the Baud Rate you must be authorized)
Press the MENU key and then using , , , or position cursor to Serv Tools then
press the ENTER key.
Select RS485 Network then press Enter.
Select Protocol then press Enter. Change the protocol to BACnet MSTP
Select address then press Enter. Change the address so it matches the last two digits
of the device ID then press Enter.
Select Protocol then press Enter .Set the protocol back to MCS.
The following steps will display the Ethernet Network settings:

(To change the settings you first must be authorized)
If you are going to manually assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
Press the MENU key and then using , , , or position cursor to Serv Tools then
Select Ethernet Network then press Enter.
Set DHCP Enabled to NO.
Set the IP Address.
Set the Subnet Mask.
Set Default Gateway.
If you are going to let your network assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway:
Press the MENU key and then Using , , , or position cursor to Serv Tools then
Set DHCP Enabled to YES; Connect the MCS-Magnum to the network and cycle
power to the board.
164
28.1.2.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Modbus RTU:
The Modbus RTU address can be verified and changed (with the proper authorization code) from the
keypad/LCD of a live unit.
Press Menu

Press key.
The following steps will display the Modbus RTU Network address, and the Baud Rate:
28.1.3.
Select Protocol then press Enter. Change the protocol to Modbus.
Select address then press Enter. Change the address then press Enter.
Select Baud then press Enter. Set the baud rate then press Enter.
Connect the communication wires to the TX RS485 three-position terminal located
above the Ethernet connector.
Modbus TCP/IP:
This protocol is always active.

Make sure the MCS-Magnum network settings are set correctly.
The following steps will display the Ethernet Network settings:
(To change the settings you first must be authorized)
Press Menu

Press key.
If you are going to manually assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
Set DHCP Enabled to NO.
Set the IP Address.
Set the Subnet Mask.
Set Default Gateway.
165
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
If you are going to let your network assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway:
Press the MENU key and then Using , , , or position cursor to Serv Tools then press the
ENTER key.
Set DHCP Enabled to YES; Connect the MCS-Magnum to the network and cycle power to the
board.
28.1.4.
Johnson N2:
The N2 address can be verified and changed (with the proper authorization code) from the keypad/LCD of a live
unit.
Press Menu

Press key.
The following steps will display the N2 Network address, and the Baud Rate:
Select Protocol then press Enter. Change the protocol to N2.
Select address then press Enter. Change the address then press Enter.
Select Baud then press Enter. Set the baud rate then press Enter.
Connect the communication wires to the TX RS485 three-position terminal located
above the Ethernet connector.
166
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
29. User Logic

MAGNUM provides the user the ability to customize control logic and calculated values. This is done in the
MCS-Config program by defining a sensor input, relay output, or analog output as a user logic type. This type of
point can be adjusted at run time via MCS-Connect by double clicking on the name of a user-defined point. This
requires a factory authorization. MCS-Connect identifies a user-defined relay output by following the name with
(UL), a sensor inputs Sensor Type cell has User Logic as the type and analog outputs Type cell has Linear
CTRL.
29.1. Operands
Operands are the building blocks of the MAGNUM User Logic. An operand consists of two parts: the top cell
provides a drop down list to select the types and then a drop down list to select the item within that type:
TYPE
Fixed Value
SI
AO
RO
CLOCK
Setpoints
Unit Chiller
Compressor
#1 Compressor
#20
ITEM
Enter a fixed value with decimal place if required.
Select sensor input
Select analog output
Select relay output
Select system clock. The following can be selected: Hours, Minutes, Seconds,
Day of Month, Day of Week (1 = Sunday - 7 = Saturday), Year (2 digits), and
Month (1-12). These are current values from the system.
Select setpoint, number is also display for ease of selection. All setpoints are
display, both active and inactive.
The following can be selected: FLA %, Steps wanted, Steps ON, Steps available,
steps allowed on, % Load, STATE, Lead Compressor, Mode (cooling or heating),
and Ice Mode Done (if ice mode option selected).
The following can be selected for any compressor: compressor state, suction
pressure, discharge pressure, oil pressure differential, motor amps, suction
temperature, discharge temperature, oil temperature, motor temperature, EXV
value position, oil pressure, refrigerant temperature, flow indicator, compressor
proof, compressor speed, oil float, refrigerant level, condenser temperature #1,
condenser temperature #2, FLA %, saturated suction temperature, suction super
heat, saturated discharge temperature, and discharge super heat.
Note all of the above may not exist for an individual configuration.
The value that is passed to the user logic depends on the item selected. For example:
A relay outputs value is 0 if it is off and a 1 if it is on.
A digital inputs value is 0 if it is off and a 1 if it is on.
An analog input and analog output value are the actual values as displayed, includes the
decimal place.
The unit, compressor or loop state is a numeric value that will relate to the state names in this
manual. This value is show as the number in parenthesis following the state name.
29.2. Action Cell

The action cell is located between the operand cells.
The following actions can be selected from a drop down list this will determine the value of the sensor:
167
MICRO CON
NTROL SYSTEMS
S
Display
y as:
Non
ne
+(DI OR)
O
*(DI AND)
/
High Value
V
Low Value
* NOT (D
DI only)
/ NOT (D
DI only)
>=
=
<=
=
> NOT (D
DI only)
< NOT (D
DI only)
==
=
NOT = (D
DI only)
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Actio
on
Sec
cond operand is not required
d.
Add
d the value of the two opera
ands if they are
e analog value
es; if digital the
en they will be
OR
R together. If diigital and eithe
er operand is o
on the result w
will be 1 (ON).
Operand 1 minus
s Operand 2.
Operand 1 times Operand 2 if they
t
are analo
og values; if digital then theyy will be AND
together. If digitall and both ope
erands are on the result will be 1 (ON) else
e the result
will be 0 (OFF).
Operand 1 divide
ed by Operand
d2
Res
sult will be the
e highest value
e between Ope
erand 1 and O
Operand 2
Res
sult will be the
e lowest value between Ope
erand 1 and Op
perand 2
Operand 1 times the opposite value
v
of Opera
and 2, which m
must be a digittal. If Operand
d
2 is
s on value will be 1; therefore
e its opposite w
will be 0.
Operand 1 divide
ed by the oppo
osite value of O
Operand 2, wh
hich must be a digital. If
Operand 2 is on value
v
will be 1; therefore its opposite will b
be 0.
Sen
nsor value will be on (true) iff Operand 1 iss greater than or equal to Op
perand 2.
Sen
nsor value will be on (true) iff Operand 1 iss less than or e
equal to Opera
and 2.
Sen
nsor value will be on (true) iff Operand 1 iss greater than the opposite o
of Operand 2.
Sen
nsor value will be on (true) iff Operand 1 iss less than the
e opposite of O
Operand 2.
Sen
nsor value will be on (true) iff Operand 1 iss equal to Ope
erand 2.
Sen
nsor value will be on (true) iff the opposite of Operand 1 is equal to Op
perand 2.
29.3.
2
User Sensor Inp
put (USER LOGIC)
L
Selecting the
t User Logiic display in th
he Sensor Info
ormation scree
en of the MCS
S-Connect prog
gram sets up tthis
type of sen
nsor. This type
e of sensor can be either an analog or dig
gital sensor. Th
his is a virtual iinput; the userr logic
sensor vallue is a calcula
ated value insttead of a hardw
wired externall sensor.
ct the display ty
ype and then complete
c
the selections.
s
No
ote operand #1
1 and #2 are d
defined in the
First selec
Operands section above
e and the Actio
on Cell is defin
ned in the Action Cell section above.
ow below is fro
om MCS-Conffig is configurin
ng a User Logiic type of senssor. It is a digitt type of senso
or (ON
The windo
or OFF) an
nd it is only loo
oking an Operrand 1. If the RO
R Sump and Doors is ON tthen the value
e of this sensorr will
be ON.
168
MICRO CON
NTROL SYSTEMS
S
29.3.1
1.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Example
es of User Logic
L
Sensorr Input
The windo
ow below is fro
om MCS-Conffig is configurin
ng a User Logiic type of senssor. If the relayy Sump and D
Doors
is on, then
n this sensor will
w read on.
The windo
ow below is fro
om MCS-Conffig building a User
U
Logic type
e of sensor. It is a temperatu
ure type of sen
nsor
(display a value with 1 decimal
d
place) the value of th
his sensor will be result of O
Operand 1 time
es Operand 2..
169
MICRO CON
NTROL SYSTEMS
S
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
29.4.
2
User Relay Outp
put
User Relay Outputs allo
ow customized
d control of rela
ays based on o
operand value
es. The User R
Relay Output ccan
calculate a value derived
d from two ope
erands and co
ombine the callculated value with a greater than and lesss than
conditions
s to turn a relay
y on/off. The User
U
relay is ca
apable of dela
aying the relay ON condition before turning
g the
relay ON. Note this relay
y can be a virtual relay with nothing wired to it or a real rrelay that conttrols and out b
bound
device.
170
MICRO CON
NTROL SYSTEMS
S
29.4.1
1.
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
Example
es of User Logic
L
Relay O
Outputs
In the abov
ve example th
he Store Alarm
m Msg option
n has been selected. When this relay goess from an off tto an
on state an
n alarm messa
age will be gen
nerated with th
he name of thiis relay.
171
MICRO CON
NTROL SYSTEMS
S
MAGNUM REVISION 1.7
29.5.
2
User Analog Outtput
Linear con
ntrol for analog
g output allows
s the user to co
ontrol an analo
og value base
ed on feedback from a senso
or
input or other operant co
ontrol input value. The outpu
ut can be set to
o control only when a relay is ON and fixe
ed at
put and adjustt the analog ou
a given ou
utput when the
e relay is OFF. Linear Contro
ol will monitor tthe Control Inp
utput
based the minimum/max
ximum output values. The Linear
L
Control window below
w is an example of Linear Co
ontrol
settings us
sing MCS-Con
nnect. Linear Control
C
setting
gs are adjustab
ble via MCS-C
Connect at run time with
FACTORY
Y level authoriz
zation. Note th
his analog outp
put could be a virtual point w
with nothing w
wired to it or a rreal
point that controls
c
and out
o bound device
ve example if relay CND PU

UMP is off the value will be zzero. If on, the
e value will be calculated bassed
In the abov
on the sen
nsor input CW IN. If CW INs
s value is 0 the
en the analog output will be set to 0%. If 5
50 then the ana
alog
output will be 100%. An
nalog output va
alue will vary between
b
these
e two points.
172

Magnum Version 8 Manual Rev1.7

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Magnum Version 8 Manual Rev1.7

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Magn

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

8.1. SCREW COMPRESSOR WITH SLIDE PISTON ............................................................................................................................ 23

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

11.2. COMPRESSOR CONTROL STATES (NUMBER) ........................................................................................................................ 39

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.3.1. Reciprocating Comp with Oil (Recip Comp w/Oil).................................................................................................... 69

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

15.25. HIGH AMPERE UNLOADING AND HOLDING ................................................................................................................... 100

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

16.4.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................ 132

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

Introduction to MAGNUM HVAC and CENT V8 Software

MAGNUM V8 Software Control Point Capacity

MAGNUM Hardware Supported by MAGNUM V8 Software

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

About this Manual

About the MAGNUM

PC Support Software for MAGNUM

MCS 485 Network

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

MCS Ethernet Port

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

New Setpoint Functions (08.00-A)

Four new setpoints have been added to provide flexibility:

Voltage Sensor (08.00-R)

Motor Amps (08.00-R)

Custom display description of circuit (08.00-R)

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

User Logic RO Delay Before Off (08.00-R)

Additional Information Messages (08.00-U)

Pump Rotation (08.01-C)

Process Pump Addition and Rotation (08.01-C)

MOP Control Option to EXV Logic (08.01-G)

Delta Temperature Evaporator (08.01-G)

Condenser Low Ambient (08.01-O)

New Pressure Sensor Supported (08.01-V)

Centrifugal Vane Control (08.01-C)

External Centrifugal Purge Control (08.01-P)

MICRO CONTROL SYSTEMS

MAGNUM REVISION 1.7

MCS Touch Screens Interface (08.00-U)

Sensor Averaging (08.00-R)

Virtual Points Separated From Real Points (08.00-A)

Added MDP to EXV Control Logic (8.01-X)

Low Discharge Superheat Adjustment to EXV Logic (8.01-X)

Setpoint #110 LOW REFRIGERANT LEVEL TARGET must be active.

Normal Condenser Discharge Control Bypass (8.02-A)

This test requires

Only voltage sensors that are specified